additional details sought by ms, dated · condensate polishing unit (cpu) for sugar & co-gen...

Additional details sought by MS, dated

29/12/2017

Revised EIA Report incorporated the corrections that has been sought by MS is

enclosing as Annexure III

Sl. No Particulars Reply

1 Water Balance Revised Water balance is

enclosed as Annexure I

2 Traffic management plan Traffic management plan

is enclosed as Annexure

II

Annexure –I

Water Balance for 6500 TCD & 18.14 MW Co-gen and for 14000

Sugars & 62.14 MW Co-gen for Nandi Sahakari Sakkare Karkhane Niyamit, Krishnanagar

Water Balance for 6500 TCD Sugar & 18.14 MW Co-Generation plant. A Fresh Water requirement from River. 650 B Water recovered from Sugar Cane 70% on cane. 4550

A+B Total Water requirement (Water into system) M3/Day

5200

C Excess vapor condensate recycled back. 2210

D Losses at various section. 1752 E Effluent generation. 1238

C+D+E Water out of system M3/Day 5200

Water Balance for 6500 TCD & 18.14 MW Co-gen

Sl. No.

Particulars 6500 TCD & 18.14 MW Co-gen

1. WATER INTO SYSTEM, m3/d 1A Source : Fresh water from river. 650 Usage : Domestic use in factory. 50 Laboratory 2 Water treatment plant, Process, Cooling, spraying & floor

washing etc. 598

(WTP- 246, Cooling & Spraying – 300, Floor washing – 52)

Total 650

1 B Water from sugar cane at 70 % on cane. 4550 Total of 1A & 1B 5200 2 WATER OUT OF SYSTEM, m3/d 2 A Effluent. 1238 i) Domestic sewage (80 % of water used) 40 ii) Factory effluent including, Process, Cooling spraying, floor

wash & laboratory waste water. 650

v) WTP drain 48 vi) Cooling tower blow down 452 vii) Boiler Blow down 48 2B Excess vapor condensate recycled back. 2210 Mill imbibitions 32% on Cane 1828 MOL preparation 2% On Cane 130 Vacuum filter , Pan, Centrifugal Etc – 3 to 3.5 % On cane 252 2C LOSSES 1752 Water going along with Bagasse 28% on cane with 50%

moisture. 975

Water going along with press mud & molasses (Losses) 4% on cane

185

i) Vapour & drift loss from cooling tower 7.5 % On Cane 360 ii) Vapour & drift loss at bearing (mill & turbine) cooling water

1% On Cane 65

iii) Steam losses at traps & vent at 0.5 % to 1% On Cane 45 iv) Domestic water loss. 10 v) Vapour loss at crystallization & Centrifugation - 0.5 % to 1%

On Cane 52

vi) Flash vapour loss at clarifier 0.5 % On Cane 30 vii) Vapour loss at mill – 0.5 % On Cane 30

Total of 2A, 2B, 2C 5200

Water Balance for proposed expansion for 14000 TCD Sugar & 62.14 MW Co-Generation plant.

A Fresh Water requirement from River. 1132

B Water recovered from Sugar Cane 70% on cane. 9800

A+B Total Water requirement

(Water into system) M3/Day 10932

C Excess vapor condensate recycled back. 6020

D Losses at various section. 3800

E Effluent generation. 1112

C+D+E Water out of system M3/Day 10932

Water Balance for 14000 Sugars & 62.14 MW Co-gen.

Sl. No

Particulars 14000 TCD & 62.14 MW Co-gen.

1. WATER INTO SYSTEM, m3/d 1A Source : Fresh water from river. 1132

Usage : Domestic use in factory. 80 Laboratory 2 Water treatment plant (WTP), Cooling for Bearing at Mill & Turbine

Section), Cooling tower, Spraying pond & etc. 1050

(WTP- 650, Cooling for Bearing at Mill &

Turbine, Cooling tower, Spray pond –

400 ) Total 1132

1 B Water from sugar cane at 70 % on cane. 9800 Total of 1A & 1B 10932

2 WATER OUT OF SYSTEM, m3/d 2 A Effluent. 1112 i) Domestic sewage (80 % of water used) 65 ii) Factory effluent including, Process, Cooling spraying, floor wash &

laboratory waste water. 775

v) WTP drain. 150 vi) Cooling tower blow down. 116 vii) Boiler Blow down. 6 2B Excess vapor condensate recycled back. 6020 Mill imbibition 32% on cane. 4480 MOL preparation 2% On cane. 280 Vacuum filter 4% On cane. 560 Centrifugal 3% On cane. 420 Pan section 2% On cane. 280 LOSSES 3800 2C Water going along with Bagasse 28% on cane with 50% moisture. 1960 Water going along with press mud & molasses (Losses) 4% 560 i) Vapor & drift losses at cooling tower, Spray pond Etc. 3% on cane. 420 ii) Vapour & drift loss at Mill & Turbine bearing cooling water 1% on

cane. 140

iii) Steam losses at traps & vent 2% On cane. 280 iv) Domestic water loss. 20 v) Vapour loss at crystallization & Centrifugation 1% On cane. 140 vi) Flash vapour loss at clarifier 1% On cane. 140 vii) Vapour loss at mill 1% On cane. 140

Total of 2A, 2B, 2C 10932

Action Plan for Reduction of fresh water consumption.

We could reduce our fresh water requirement quantity from 1400 m3/day to 1132 m3/day (i.e 268 m3 / day) The quantity of condensate & other water details is as follows,

Boiler blow down water - 06 m3 / Day

Cooling tower blow down - 116 m3 / Day

WTP drain (Backwash only) - 150 m3 / Day

Second body evaporator condensate - 1200 m / Day

1472 m3/Day

The quantity of condensate & other water generated is 1472 m3/Day, by introducing a proposing a Condensate Polishing Unit (CPU) for sugar & Co-gen unit of capacity 1500 m3/day we substantiately reduce the fresh water quantity and effluent quantity also, hence the above mentioned condensate we will treat in CPU and recycle back to same sections. Thus we propose a Condensate Polishing Unit (CPU) for our proposed expansion.

Proposed Condensate Polishing Unit of Sugar & Co-gen Unit

Condensate Inlet

Equalization Tank

Conventional Aeration Tank (CAT)

Primary Clarifier

Extended Aeration Tank (EAT)

HRSCC Tank

Polishing Pond or Treated water

Tank

ACF MGF Recycle to plant

Traffic Analysis for the Proposed Nandi SSK at Krishnanagar, Dist:Bijapur, Karnataka.

Page 1

Developer:

Nandi SSK, Krishnanagar, Bijapur, Karnataka.

Traffic Consultants:

M/s. Ultra-Tech (Environmental Consultancy & Laboratory)

Lab Gazetted by MoEF & CC – Govt. of India

NABET Certificate No. NABET/EIA/1417/RA010

TRAFFIC IMPACT STUDY REPORT

FOR

The Proposed Development

Nandi SSK, Krishnanagar Village, Hosur

Post, Vijayapur Taluk & District,

Pin code: 587117

Karnataka State

Annexure-II


Page 2

----INDEX---- 1.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................................................................. 3

2.1 Objectives ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4

3.1External Traffic Scenario ......................................................................................................................................... 4

4.1 Parking Provisions ..................................................................................................................................................... 7

5.1 Traffic Generations.................................................................................................................................................... 9

5.2 Traffic Dispersions ..................................................................................................................................................... 9

5.3 Generation Of Trips By Staff & Visitors ............................................................................................................. 9

5.4 Impacts On External Roads ................................................................................................................................ 11

5.5 Conclusion on Vehicular Impact & Inter Face ............................................................................................ 13

----LIST OF TABLE----

Table 1: Vehicular Volume on 20.00 M. State Highway .................................................................................... 5

Table 2 : The Product Requirement Vehicles per Day Is As Follows ............................................................ 8

Table 3: Shift Details ..................................................................................................................................................... 10

Table 4: Industrial Staff Trip Modal Split ............................................................................................................ 10

Table 5 : Trip Generated By Staff And Visitors During Peak Hours .......................................................... 11

Table 6 : Vehicular Impacts after Development ................................................................................................ 12

Table 7: Description of LOS based on V/C Ratio ............................................................................................... 13

----LIST OF FIGURES----

Figure 1: Site Location Map .......................................................................................................................................... 3

Figure 2: Road Network ................................................................................................................................................. 7

Figure 3: Parking Layout& internal Road Network ........................................................................................... 8


Page 3

TRAFFIC ANALYSIS FOR THE PROPOSED DEVELOPMENT M/S NANDI SAHAKARI SAKKARE KARKHANE NIYAMAT. KRISHNANAGAR VILLAGE,

HOSUR POST, VIJAYAPUR TALUK &, DISTRICT, PIN CODE: 587117

Karnataka State

Traffic Analysis Report

1.1 INTRODUCTION The Industrial Unit is proposed in Krishnanagar Village Dist Bijapur, abutting to SH55 of 20 m Wide Road. The Plot U/R is 240 acres. No other industry on the road. Hence Traffic on this road is not running to its full potential. We are intended to do “Traffic Analysis” for the said project explaining Traffic Management System for PROP. PROJECT Such Industrial Traffic Management requires comprehensive Planning majorly for Goods vehicles Ingress & Egress its parking provisions and also partially for Buses, LMVs & 2Wheelers.

Figure 1: Site Location Map

SITE U/R


Page 4

2.1 OBJECTIVES The purpose of this Analysis is to analyse the effect of generated traffic due to the proposed development on to the external roads around the proposed expansion project site. The studies have been carried out on the following:

Current external traffic on adjacent road Evaluation of traffic for the proposed land uses within the PROP.

PROJECT premises. Carrying out Classified Traffic Volume Count on External Road.

This study is helpful in suggesting possibilities for

Linking PROP. PROJECT traffic to external roads with minimum interruption.

Internal Traffic Management.

3.1EXTERNAL TRAFFIC SCENARIO Proposed expansion project is abutting to proposed 20.00M SH55.

Classified Traffic Volume Counts (CTVC) was carried out at this Mid-Block in both directions. All vehicle classes including car, Tractor, motorcycle, public bus, and goods carrier are captured by direction wise. Traffic Survey was carried out on

1) On Abutting 20m Wide SH55


Page 5

Summary of the Classified Traffic Volume Count analysis is in the following ables:

Table 1: Vehicular Volume on 20.00 M. State Highway

Type of Vehicle

Total No of Vehicles

Percentage of Vehicles

PCU Factors

Total PCU

Percentage of PCU

Direction Towards North

3 Wheeler 3 0.46 1 3 0.19

Bus 5 0.77 2.2 11 0.70

Car 53 8.14 1 53 3.36

2 Wheelers 255 39.17 0.5 128 8.08

LCV 16 2.46 1.5 24 1.52

2-Axle 33 5.07 2.2 73 4.60

3 Axle 58 8.91 4.5 261 16.54

Bull Cart 67 10.29 4.5 302 19.11

Multi Axle 157 24.73 4.5 725 45.91

Total 651 100.00

1578 100.00

Direction Towards South

3Wheeler 3 0.54 1 3 0.21

Bus 4 0.72 2.2 9 0.61

Car 50 9.01 1 50 3.44

2 Wheelers 191 34.41 0.5 96 6.57

LCV 16 2.88 1.5 24 1.65

2-Axle 16 2.88 2.2 35 2.42

3 Axle 45 8.11 4.5 203 13.93

Bull Cart 69 12.43 4.5 311 21.35

Multi Axle 161 29.01 4.5 725 49.83

Total 555 100.00

1454 100.00 Direction Peak Period Peak Hour

Volume /Hr

Peak Hour PCU / Hr

Peak Hour % PCU/hr

From To

20.00 M.WIDE ROAD

9 12 pm 52 124 9.51%

5 8pm 98 152 11.65%


Page 6

CHART -1

GRAPH 1

The above Traffic scenario observations found that Traffic through this 20m Wide SH55 is mix type which includes thorough traffic of Villagers majorly 2W and

3W 0%

Bus 1%

Car 9%

2W 37%

LCV 3%

2Axle 4%

3 Axle 8%

Bull Cart 11%

Multi axle 27%

SH 55 TRAFFIC COMPOSITION

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

VEH

ICLE

IN

PC

Us

HOURLY VARIATION BOTH DIRECTION ON 20M WIDE SH 55

Towards North

Towards South


Page 7

also current Distillery vehicles are contributing. Heavy Vehicles enter or exit majorly during Non Peak Hours. And Bullock carts and Tractors supplying Sugar cane to this Factory are using from SH55 as shown in following Figure.

Figure 2: Road Network

But we intend to work out Traffic Impact on Major Artery a 20m Wide SH55

1 PARKING PROVISIONS

Being a Industrial Project, Parking is divided in 3 Types Goods Vehicles i.e Tractor with Trolleys, Trucks and Bullock Carts and LMVs & Staff Parking of 2 and 4 Wheelers. Parking demand worked out on the basis of Product, its Raw Material and Finished Goods Vehicles Daily Influx. However, parking provision is made in Project boundary is about 25 Acres for all types of Vehicles including Sugar Supplying Vehicles Parking area is marked in following figure.


Page 8

Figure 3: Parking Layout& internal Road Network

Table 2 : The Product Requirement Vehicles per Day Is As Follows

Sr No

Name Vehicle type Existing

For Proposed Plant (Additional)

Total PCUs/Day

No. /day

No./ Month

No. /day

No./ Month

No. /day

No./ Month

1 Sugarcane

Bullock-carts 290

50

340

1360

Tractor 360

200

560

2240

Trucks 17

10

27

81

2 Sulfur Truck - 1 - 1 - 2

5 Sulfuric acid Tanker - 1 - 1 - 2

6 Nutrients N, P Truck - 1 - 1 - 2

7 Turkey Red Oil (TRO)

Tanker - 1 - 1 - 2

CANE

YARD


Page 9

8 Distillery Final Product

Tanker 3

-

3

9

9 Compost Tractors 5

5

10

40

10 Sugar bags Trucks 10

10

20

60

11 Miscellaneous Trucks 4

4

8

24

Total

689 4 279 4 976 8 3814

5.1 TRAFFIC GENERATIONS

The term Generation mean A trip, the person movement by a mechanized mode of Transport, having start or origin from his home and destination his office or working place. However Attraction is the person’s destination place where their trips end by creating traffic at working place as Visitor. For proposed expansion project there will be Peak Hours at which Persons coming In Ward are the Staff in Morning Peak Hour and leave the Premise in Evening. Rest Major Traffic Generator for this type of Project like Distilleries are Raw Material Vehicles reaching to the Project Site from different directions from nearest villages, Sugar Cane Farms and those are majorly Tractors with Trolleys and Bullock Carts. These types of Vehicles are slow moving Vehicles which causes congestion & Queuing of the fast Vehicles behind these Vehicles on 2 Lane Highways. But these vehicles start their journey from Farm to Industry majorly during Night and reach early morning.

5.2 TRAFFIC DISPERSIONS

As per Current Traffic Scenario we observed that the Traffic on 20 m is mixed traffic Industrial Heavy Vehicles and the Traffic from Villages, majorly 2 and 3 wheelers are most preferable public transport by the surrounding villagers for to & fro from their homes. It also observed that out of Total Traffic on 20 m Wide Main Road is 10-20% Traffic is from North & West Side Village and major of sugar cane supply vehicles.

5.3 GENERATION OF TRIPS BY STAFF & VISITORS

To work out the trip generations we will consider General Shift Staff Enter between 8 am to 9 am. And Contract Staff in morning 6am to 7am, And


Page 10

Managerial Staff between 10a to 12pm hence it will assume that 60-70% of occupancy will rich Project Premises in Morning & leave in the Evening.

Visitors such Industries are arrived majorly in Non-Peak Hours they may visit within whole day. We will consider are10% of occupancy.

Table 3: Shift Details

Shift Details Nos of Workers

A Administration Staff From 10:30 AM to 05:30 PM

71 Nos

B General Shift 08:30 AM to 05:30 PM

244 Nos

C First Shift 04:00 AM to 12:00 PM

177 Nos

D Second Shift 12:00 PM to 08:00 PM

127 Nos

E Third Shift 08:00 PM to 12:00 PM

120 nos

We will consider General Shift & Second Shift to worked out Traffic Impact

Total Population = 71 Admin Staff + Gen Shift Workers 244 + 127 2nd Shift

Following table explains distribution of occupants with their modal split.

Table 4: Industrial Staff Trip Modal Split

STAFF

Sr. No

Mode PCU/ECS Percentage of Total Trip

Vehicle Occupancy

1) Car 1 10% 2

2) Auto Rickshaw

1.5 15% 3

3) Two Wheelers

0.5 25% 1.5

4) Bus 2.2 20%

20

5) ST Bus 2.2 5

6) Walk trips -- 30% --


Page 11

Table 5 : Trip Generated By Staff and Visitors During Peak Hours

TYPE OCCUPENT LOAD Number of Vehicles Total

Vehicle in Nos

Total in PCUs Auto Bus Car 2W

Worker, Staff & Visitors 442 22 2 22 111 157 104

104 PCUs in Morning ( 8.30 to11.30 am) or Evening ( 5.30 pm to 8.30pm) Peak Hours i.e. 35 PCUs/ Hr (A)

We had done Traffic Count at site in which current Traffic is included with Project Traffic,

As per Proposed Traffic Estimation additional Vehicles coming to the Project Premises using 20m Wide Road i.e.3814 PCUs per Day

We will consider peak Hours Traffic 15% of above between 9 to 11 am and 5pm to 7pm i.e. 226 PCUs in Peak Hours 572 PCUs per Hour---------- (B) Total 607 PCUs in 2 Peak Hours

Hence Total Trip Generation to be considered for Worst Case scenario = 607 /2 = 304 PCUs per Hour

5.4 IMPACTS ON EXTERNAL ROADS

This chapter covers final output of Traffic Management Plan for PROP. PROJECT within the Project and Impact on External Public Roads. The major factor will be the Peak- Hour flow in Project Premises, for which design or planning of roads is crucial. It should reach the requirement of smooth, Environmentally Friendly & Non polluting Traffic Movement within the Project Premises and outside also. There shouldn’t be any congestion on roads inside the Project Premises. Impact on External Road /Highway had been considered to avoid Inconvenience to adjacent Project Premises.


Page 12

Table 6 : Vehicular Impacts after Development

Proposed & Existing Roads

Capacities of Roads in PCUs Per Hour as per IRC 106 -1990

External Peak Traffic

Load in PCUs Per Hr

Vehicles Added By Prop. Dev.

V/C Ratio Added By Prop.Dev.

Total V/C On Road

Level Of Service

Abutting 20m Wide Road 4 Lanes Undivided

3000 152 304 0.101 0.152 A


Page 13

Table 7: Description of LOS based on V/C Ratio

Level of Service (LOS)

Volume/Capacity Ratio (V/C)

Level of Comfort

Nature of flow

A <0.30 Highest Free Flow

B 0.30 – 0.50 Reasonably free

C 0.50 – 0.70 Stable flow

D 0.70 – 0.90 Threshold Approaching unstable flow

E 1.00 Unstable flow

F >1.00 Lowest Forced flow

5.5 CONCLUSION ON VEHICULAR IMPACT & INTER FACE

The project Traffic will use 20 m Wide SH55 on Which There will not any Congestion. Level of Service (LOS) will be ‘A’ on 20m Wide Road even after added Project Traffic.

-- END OF THE REPORT--

Revised Final Environmental Impact Assessment (With Environmental Management Plan)

For

Expansion Project (Existing Sugar Unit from 6500 TCD to 14000 TCD and

Existing Co-Generation Power Plant from 18.14 MW to

68.14 MW)

Project Proponents

M/s Nandi Sahakari Sakkare Karkhane

Niyamat.

Krishnanagar Village, Hosur Post,

Vijayapur Taluk &, District, Pin code: 587117

Karnataka State.

Environmental Consultants M/s. Ultra-Tech Environmental Consultancy & Laboratory

Unit No. 206, 224-225, Jai Commercial Complex,

Eastern Express High Way, Opp.Cadbury,

Khopat, Thane (West)-400 601

Accreditation

NABET Accreditation No. NABET/EIA/1417/RA010

Annexure -III

CONTENTS

Sl. No. Particulars Pg. no.

CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION

1.1 Preamble 1

1.2 Purpose of Environmental Impact Assessment report 1

1.3 Identification of the project 4

1.4 Background of the project proponent 5

1.5 Brief description of nature, size and location of the project 6

1.6 Need for the expansion of sugar cane crushing capacity &

Cogeneration & its importance to the country & or region

8

1.7 Demand– Supply Gap of Power Sector in India 10

1.8 Need for Bio Mass Based Power Plant. 11

1.9 Overview of power situation & sugar plant co-generation

projects, in India & in the state of Karnataka.

12

1.10 Power Scenario in Karnataka. 12

1.11 Cogeneration 12

1.12 Bagasse Based Cogeneration in Sugar Industry 13

1.13 Sugar Cane as Energy Crop 14

1.14 Imports vs. Indigenous Production. 14

1.15 Export Possibility. 15

1.16 Domestic / Export Markets 15

1.17 Employment Generation Due To the Project 15

1.18 Objective and Scope of EIA Studies 15

1.19 Methodology of EIA Studies 16

1.19.1 Existing Environmental Status 16

1.20 Identification of Impacts and Mitigation Measures 19

1.21 Terms of References (Tor) From MoEF and Their Compliances 19

CHAPTER 2: PROJECT DESCRIPTION

2.1 Type of project 34

2.2 Need for the project 34

2.3 Location of the project 36

2.3.1 General location 36

2.3.2 Basis for selecting the site 42

2.4 Size and magnitude of operation 42

2.4.1 Land requirement 43

2.4.2 Manpower 43

2.4.3 Housing facilities 44

2.4.4 Civil works during construction phase 44

2.4.5 Production and related activities during operation 45

2.4.6 Resources consumed 45

2.4.7 Sugarcane cultivation area 46

2.4.8 Transportation 46

2.4.9 Bulk storage facilities 47

2.4.10 Waste generation 47

2.4.11 Project investment 48

2.4.12 Employment generation due to the project 48

2.5 Schedule for approval and implementation of project 49

2.6 Technology and process description 49

2.6.1.1 Manufacturing process for co-gen sugar unit 50

2.6.1.2 Manufacturing process for Distillary unit 56

2.6.2 Raw materials and products 59

2.6.3 Power and steam requirement 61

2.6.4 Source and utilization of water 64

2.6.5 Utilization of water in co-gen sugar unit 65

2.7 Sources of Pollution and Built In Mitigation Measures 71

2.7.1 Wastewater Management in Co-Gen Sugar Unit 71

2.7.2 Gaseous emissions and air pollution control measures 86

2.7.3 Noise Pollution & Control Measures 90

2.7.4 Solid Waste Management 91

2.8 Pollution Mitigation Measures 94

2.9 Assessment of New & Untested Technology for the Risk of

Technological Failure

94

CHAPTER 3: DESCRIPTION OF ENVIRONMENT

3.1 Introduction 95

3.2 Establishment of Impact Zone 95

3.3 Baseline Data 96

3.3.1 Land Environment 99

3.3.2 Soil Environment 105

3.3.3 Meteorology 110

3.3.4 Ambient Air Quality 114

3.3.5 Noise Levels 121

3.3.6 Water Environment 125

3.3.7 Geology 136

3.3.8 Hydrology Profile 136

3.3.9 Biological Environment 140

3.3.10 Social Environment 148

CHAPTER 4: ANTICIPATED ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACTS AND

MITIGATION MEASURES

4.1 Introduction 161

4.2 Land Environment 162

4.2.1 Impact on Land Use 162

4.2.2 Mitigation measures with respect Land environment 163

4.3 Soil Environment 163

4.3.1 Impact on Soil Environment 163

4.3.2 Mitigation measures with respect soil environment 164

4.4 Air Environment 166

4.4.1 Impact on Air Environment 166

4.4.2 Mitigation measures w.r.t Air Environment 175

4.5 Noise Environment 177

4.5.1 Impact on Noise Environment 177

4.5.2 Mitigation Measures w.r.t Noise Environment 178

4.6 Water Environment 178

4.6.1 Impact on Water Environment 178

4.6.2 Mitigation Measures 179

4.7 Geology and Hydrology 183

4.8 Biological Environment 184

4.9 Socio Economic Environment 185

4.9.1 Impact on Socio Economic Environment 185

4.10 Health Environment 187

4.10.1 Impact on Health Environment 187

4.10.2 Mitigation Measures 187

4.11 Solid Waste and Hazardous waste Generation and Management

for Disposal

187

CHAPTER – 5: ANALYSIS OF ALTERNATIVES (TECHNOLOGY AND SITE)

5.1 Sitting of project 197

5.1.1 Environmental guidelines 197

5.1.2 General criterion for selection of location 197

5.1.3 Site requirement and proposed location 198

5.2 Environmental features of site 199

5.3 Technology/ process 199

5.4 No project option 199

CHAPTER – 6: ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING PROGRAMME


6.2 Monitoring plan 200

6.3 Sampling schedule and locations 201

6.4 Laboratory facilities 202

6.5 Compliances to environmental statutes 203

6.6 Monitoring of compliances to statutory conditions 203

6.7 Financial allocation for environmental aspects 203

6.8 Success indicators 204

CHAPTER 7: ADDITIONAL STUDIES

7.1 Public hearing and consultation 205

7.2 Risk assessment for the storage & handling of alcohol &

mitigation measures due to fire & explosion & handling areas

232

7.2.1 Occupational Health and Safety 232

7.2.2 Health and Safety Measures for the Workers 234

7.2.3 Safety of Personnel 235

7.2.4 Safety Department 237

7.2.5 Safety Training 238

7.2.6 Health and Safety Monitoring Plan 238

7.3 Identification and Assessment of Hazards 239

7.4 Risk Analysis 240

7.4.1 Identification of Hazards, Mitigation Measures. 240

7.4.2 Preventive measures for Hazards / Disasters during

construction phase

242

7.4.3 Risk Assessment during Construction Phase 247

7.4.4 Risk Assessment during Operation Phase 248

7.5 Emergency 251

7.5.1 On-Site Emergency Plan 251

7.5.2 Objectives, scope and contents of On-site Emergency Plan 251

7.5.3 Scope of Onsite Emergency Plan 251

7.5.4 Methodology 252

7.5.5 Structure of Emergency Management 252

7.5.6 Control Room 253

7.5.7 Alert Action Plan during Working /Non-Working Hours 253

7.5.8 Distances of Railway Station, Bus Stand, Air Port, Fire Service 253

7.5.9 Establish Line of Control Responsibility and Alternative Line of

Control

254

7.5.10 Constitution of Teams 254

7.5.11 Define Roles and Responsibilities in Brief 254

7.5.12 Notification of Emergency 257

7.5.13 Declaration of Emergency 257

7.5.14 Controlling of Emergency 258

7.5.15 Arrangements for Medical Treatment 258

7.5.16 Information to the Government Authorities 258

7.5.17 Information to the Relatives of the Injured 259

7.5.18 Law and Order 259

7.5.19 All Clear Signal 259

7.6 Disaster Management Plan 259

7.6.1 Structure of the Disaster Management Plan 260

7.6.2 Emergency Plan 260

7.6.3 Care and maintenance during temporary discontinuance 262

CHAPTER 8: PROJECT BENEFITS

8.1 Improvements in physical infrastructure 267

8.2 Improvements in the social infrastructure 267

8.3 Employment potential – skilled, semi-skilled and

unskilled

268

8.4 Other tangible benefits 269

CHAPTER – 9: ENVIRONMENTAL COST BENEFIT ANALYSIS


9.2 Corporate Social Responsibility 272

CHAPTER – 10: ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT PLAN


10.2 Environmental cell 288

10.3 Guidelines for plantation 291

10.4 Cost of Estimates for implementation of EMP 296

10.5 Social Commitment plan 296

10.6 Conservation of Air, Water and Energy recovery 297

CHAPTER – 11: SUMMARY AND CONCLUSIONS

11.1 Overall Justification for Implementation of the Project 299

11.2 Explanation of How Adverse Effects Have Been Mitigated 300

CHAPTER 12: DISCLOSURE OF CONSULTANTS ENGAGED 302

TABLES

Table

no.

Particulars Pg. no.

1.1 Present status and permissions available 3

1.2 Salient features of the project 6

1.3 Environmental attributes and frequency of monitoring 18

1.4 Terms Of Reference (TOR) 19

2.1 Location features of the project site 36

2.2 Land utilization 43

2.3 Operation parameters of co-gen sugar industry 58

2.4 Generation & utilization of power 59

2.5(a) Raw materials and products for co-gen sugar unit 60

2.5(b) Raw materials and products for Distillery unit 60

2.6 Source and quantity of water 64

2.7 Characteristics of vapor condensate water 66

2.8 Utilization of vapor condensate water 66

2.9 (a) Water balance for co-gen sugar unit 68

2.9 (b) Water balance for Distillery unit 71

2.10 Characteristics of wastewater from the industry 75

2.11 Characteristics of fuels 86

2.12 Sources of flue gases and APC 86

2.13 Solid wastes from co-gen sugar unit 93

3.1 Baseline data collection 97

3.2 Environmental Attributes and Frequency of Monitoring 98

3.3 Details of the land use pattern of study area 105

3.4 Test methods for Soil Analysis 106

3.5 Details of Soil sampling location 107

3.6 Soil Quality Analyses 109

3.7 Meteorological data of Bijapur Agro meteorological Services,

University of Agricultural Sciences, Dharwad (Monthly Mean values

of the Year 2016)

111

3.8 Site Specific Micro Meteorological data for the proposed Project site

for the period March 2016 to March 2017

112

3.9 Test methods adopted for ambient air quality monitoring 114

3.10 Details of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations 116

3.11 Ambient Air Quality status 118

3.12 Details of Noise Monitoring Locations 122

3.13 Ambient Noise Level Monitoring Results 125

3.14 Limits as per Environmental Protection Rules 125

3.15 Details of Water Quality Sampling Stations 128

3.16 (a) Protocol for ground water quality analysis 130

3.16 (b) Protocol for surface water quality analysis 131

3.17 Results of Ground Water quality 133

3.18 Results of Surface Water quality 134

3.19 Inference drawn for water quality 135

3.20 List of plant species observed in the study area 141

3.21 List of animal species observed in the study area 143

3.22 List of Avien species observed in the study area 143

3.23 List of Fishes observed in the study area 146

3.24 Demographic Attributes for Vijayapura District 149

3.25 Demographic Characteristics of Study Area 151

3.26 Literacy in the study area 153

3.27 Status of working population in the study area 153

3.28 Distribution of Total (main + marginal) workers by category 154

3.29 Key Features of the Sampled Villages 157

4.1 Boiler Details 167

4.2 Input and Assumptions 168

4.3 Stack and flue gas emissions details 169

4.4 Modeled concentrations for present scenario 171

4.5 Comparative Account of resultant concentration 171

4.6 Fugitive Emissions control strategy 176

4.7 Water Conservation Proposal Techniques Considered In the

Complex

179

4.8 (a) Solid and Hazardous waste generated in the operation phase of the

project for Distillary

188

4.8 (b) Solid and Hazardous waste generated in the operation phase of the

project for Co-gen Sugar

189

4.9 Impact Identification Matrix 190

4.10 Characteristics of Environmental Impacts from Construction

Activities

191

4.11 Characteristics of Environmental Impacts from Operational Phase 195

6.1 Post project monitoring schedule 201

6.2 List of laboratory equipment’s proposed 202

6.3 Financial allocation/budgetary provisions for environmental

management aspects

203

7.1 Compliance to Public hearing with action plan 208

7.2 Health Register 238

7.3 Preventive measures for Hazards / Disasters during construction

phase

242

7.4 Risk Assessment and quantification of impacts during construction

phase

247

7.5 Risk Assessment during Operation Stage 248

9.1 Financial Allocation for the Socio-Economic Activity 273

9.2 CSR Program for period of 5 year 273

10.1 Environmental Management Plan (EMP) during Construction Phase 278

10.2 Environmental Management Plan (EMP) during operation phase 282

10.3 Waste Minimization and Management Disposal Considered in the

Complex

289

10.4 List of Tree species recommended for landscaping and Greenbelt

Development.

294

10.5 Time frame for Green Belt Development Plan 295

FIGURES

Fig. no. Particulars Pg. no.

1.1 Location map of project site in Vijayapur district 8

2.1 Map showing project site location 39

2.2 Map showing project site location with 10 Kms Radius 39

2.3 Project site layout plan for 240 Acres 40

2.4 Factory layout plan 41

2.5 Flow diagram of sugar manufacturing process 53

2.6 Process flow chart with material balance for co-gen sugar unit 54

2.7 Process Flow Chart for Co Gen Power Plant 55

2.8 Process Flow Chart for Distillery Unit 58

2.9(a) Steam Balance during Season 62

2.9 (b) Steam Balance during Off - Season 63

2.10 Schematic flow diagram of water treatment plant 67

2.11(a) Flow diagram of effluent treatment plant – sugar unit 84

2.11(b) Flow diagram of effluent treatment plant –Distillary unit 85

3.1 Toposheet showing impact zones 97

3.2 Land use/ Land cover map of the study area 101

3.3 Satellite Imagery map of the study area 102

3.4 Satellite Imagery map of the study area 103

3.5 Contour map of the study area 104

3.6 Locations of Soil Sampling Stations 108

3.7 Photographs showing Soil sampling in the study area 108

3.8 Wind rose Diagram for the Period 15th December 2016 – 15th March

2017

114

3.9 Location of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Stations 117

3.10 Photographs showing Ambient Air Monitoring stations 118

3.11 Flow Chart showing AAQM Methodology 118

3.12 Location of Ambient Noise Level Monitoring Stations 123

3.13 Ambient Noise monitoring Photographs 123

3.14 Surface Water sampling photographs 126

3.15 Ground Water sampling photographs 127

3.16 Locations of Water Quality Sampling Stations 130

3.17 Drainage map of the study area 139

3.18 Specimens of Fishes found in Krishna River 148

3.19 Locations of the wards on 10 km radius map of the project area 156

3.20 View of Socio-economic Survey Photos 157

4.1 Present 24hr average emission dispersion contours for PM10 (Existing 172

stacks)

4.2 Present 24hr average emission dispersion contours for SO2 (Existing

stacks)

172

4.3 Present 24hr average emission dispersion contours for NOX (Existing

stacks)

173

4.4 Present 24hr average emission dispersion contours for PM10 (With

proposed stacks)

173

4.5 Present 24hr average emission dispersion contours for SO2 (with

proposed stacks)

174

4.6 Present 24hr average emission dispersion contours for NOX (with

proposed stacks)

174

4.7 Typical section of recharge shaft 183

7.1 Structure of Onsite Emergency Preparedness and Response 263

ANNEXURES

Annexure Particulars

1 TOR Copy obtained from from MOEF, New Delhi.

2 IEM Copy of Industry

3 Land Acquisition certificate

4 Earlier Environmental Clearances copy

5 Certified compliance Report

6 Latest CFO compliance

7 Water drawl permission

8 The letter obtained from Executive Engineer of Krishna Bhagya Jala Nigam

Ltd f of MWL of Alamati reservoir.

9 Baseline Monitoring Reports.

10 Stack Monitoring Reports ( 6 months )

11 ETP Treated water analysis Reports ( 6 months )

12 ETP Performance Report.

13 Health status report of the for the workers

14 NABET Certificate and validation

15 Project site Photographs

16 Site Layout Plan

17 Public Hearing Proceedings

18 A & B Executive summary in English (18A) and in Kannada (18B)

19 Traffic Analysis report

1

Chapter – 1

Introduction

1.1 Preamble.

M/s Nandi Sahakari Sakkare Karkhane Niyamit, (NSSKN) is a cooperative society

registered on 5th May 1982; under Karnataka Co-operative societies act 1959. The

company stated its crushing operation for commercial production of sugar on 9th

December 1992.

The main conception behind setting up the project to form a society for socio

economic development of the area. The management of the plant is planning to

develop its plant as integrated Sugar complex by value addition to its byproducts by

installing Co-generation and distillation Plant.

The initial sugarcane crushing capacity of the plant from the year 1992 till the year

2003 was 2500 TCD with 2.5 MW TG set Co-gen facilities (2 x 32 TPH Boiler). The

plant was further expanded to a crushing capacity to 3500 TCD along with Co-Gen

capacity of 18.14 MW (105 TPH Boiler) in the year 2003. The company in the 2008

again increased its capacity from 3500 TCD to 6500 TCD Sugarcane crushing and

installation of 50 KLPD Distillery. To improve the economic viability of the existing

sugar factory, the company is now proposing to expand its Sugar Unit capacity from

6500 TCD to 14000 TCD and Cogeneration Power Unit from 18.14 MW to 62.14 MW in

the same factory premises with no change in distillery production.

1.2 Purpose of Environmental Impact Assessment Report.

Industrial projects generally involve utilization of natural resources and generation of

waste and polluting substances. Depletion of natural resources and discharge of

pollutants are likely to affect the environment. However, the project is essential for

food, energy or other needs of mankind in addition to the up-liftment of farming

community and economic growth of the country. Consequently, there is a need for

harmonious developmental activities with the environmental concern. EIA is one of

the tools available with the planners to achieve the above goal. It is desirable to ensure

that the project activity is sustainable. Hence, the environmental consequence must be

characterized early in the project cycle and accounted for in the project design. The

objective of EIA is to foresee the potential environmental problems that would arise

out of the proposed development and address them in the project planning and

design stage. The present EIA report incorporates the environmental consequence of

the proposed project along with the measures to be adopted in the project for control

of pollution and enhancement of environmental quality.

The proposed industry is listed under EIA Notification dated 14 – 09-2006 and as

amended thereafter of Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF), Government of

India. As per this notification the industry is categorized under Schedule 1(d)

2

Category-B for 62.14 MW thermal Co-gen power plant and Schedule 5 (j) Category-B

for 14000 TCD sugar plant. As per the notification, prior clearance from MoEF is

mandatory before establishmentand (or) Expansion or Modernization of this industry.

Under Environmental Protection Act (EPA) 1986, before establishment and (or)

Expansion or Modernization of any project it is also mandatory for the project

proponents to obtain consent from State Pollution Control Board. EIA studies have to

be conducted and report is to be prepared for submission to the authorities along with

the prescribed application forms to secure environmental clearance for the proposed

project.

The current proposal was submitted for Environmental Clearance (EC) for proposed

expansion project to Karnataka State Environment Impact Assessment Authority

(SEIAA) dated 9th November 2016.

State Environment Appraisal Committee (SEAC) during their 174thmeeting

recommended to SEIAA for the issue of Standard ToR with Additional points to

conduct EIA Studies; the secretary of SEAC forwarded the proposal to SEIAA for

further action,accordingly we had started Baseline monitoring from the period of 15th

December 2016 to 15th March 2017.

The SEIAA during their 128thmeeting perused the recommendations of SEAC and

made the following observations:

The proposed expansion of crushing capacity of the sugar plant is over and

above the Environmental Clearance granted by the Ministry of Environment

and Forests, Government of India vide letter No. J- 11011/644/2007-IA II(I)

dated 02.09.2008 and amended vide letter dated 18thNovember 2014. Therefore

it is an integral part of activity covered under the Notification as A category.

Environmental impact of sugar factory alone cannot be assessed in

isolation of the existing distillery plant. Therefore this project needs to be

appraised at EAC level as expansion of category-A project for facilitating

cumulative impact assessment.

From the records submitted it is noted that the industrial unit is having a co-

generation component with generation capacity of 18.14 MW, which is

proposed to be expanded to 62.14 MW. As per Sl. No. 1(d) of the Schedule to

the EIA Notification, 2006 amended from time to time, the power plants of ≥ 15

MW with biomass as fuel require Environmental Clearance under the said

notification. The applications and the enclosures do not reveal any information

with regard to the Environmental Clearance obtained for cogeneration unit.

However, as the power generation unit is also an integral part of the industry

that has been considered by the Ministry of Environment and Forests,

Government of India for Environmental Clearance.

3

Therefore we have approachedand submitted the application to Ministry of Environment and Climate changeForests, Government of India for Environmental Clearance.

Our Proposal was submitted online for issue of ToR, dated 21stFebruary 2017, EAC

accepted proposal for ToR dated 16thMarch 2017.

EAC during their 21stEACmeeting dated 29th March 2017 noted:

Revised layout plan with 3 layers of trees to be submitted.(Enclosed as

Annexure-16)

Certified compliance report of existing EC to be submitted. (Enclosed as

Annexure-5).

Hence EAC deferred the project till the above information was submitted. We have

submitted the above information online on 27th April 2017. EAC reconsidered project

proposal in there 24thmeeting, dated 15th June 2017 and recommended to Issue ToR.

ToR from MoEF& CC is Issued, File No: J-11011/110/2017- IA. II (I) dated 19th July

2017Hence, Draft EIA report was prepared for submission to KSPCB, Bangalore to

conduct Public Hearing, now the final EIA Report has been prepared for further

processing of EC application and MoEF& CC, New Delhi.

Present status and permissions available are stated in Table 1.1.

Table 1.1: Present status and permissions available

Sl.

No. Item Detail

1 Company registration

M/s Nandi Sahakari Sakkare Karkhane

Niyamit is incorporated in the year 9th

December 1992

2 (IEM) with Govt of India

Industrial entrepreneur memoranda (IEM) are

filed. ( Enclosed as Annexure-2)

i. NO. 1868/SIA/IMO/2009 (White Cristal

sugar )

ii. NO. 1903/SIA/IMO/2011( Ethanol)

iii NO. 1313/SIA/IMO/2016( Electricity )

ivNO. 12047/SIA/IMO/2016( Manufacture of

Refined sugar)

3 Land purchase permission

From District Commissioner of Vijayapur for

purchase of land under section 109 of KLR Act.

(Land Acquisition certificate enclosed as

Annexure-3)

4. CFE & CFO obtained 2500 TCD

and 2.5 MW TG set (2 x 32 TPH Year 2002

4

1.3 Identification of Project

M/s Nandi Sahakari Sakkare Karkhane Niyamit, (NSSKN) have proposed for

expansion of Sugar Unit capacity from 6500 TCD to 14000 TCD and Cogeneration

Power Unit from 18.14 MW to 62.14 MW in an fully integrated industry complex at

Survey No 90 & 92Krishnanagar Village , Hosur Post, Vijayapur Taluk and District,

Karnataka State.

The proposed project is an integrated sugar industrial complex with facilities to

manufacture white sugar, co-gen power and alcohol. Sugar plant is based on

sugarcane which is an agriculture resource. Co-gen power plant mainly uses bagasse

as fuel and distillery is based on molasses as raw material. Bagasse and molasses are

the waste or by-products of sugar plant. The project is basically an agro based rural

industry.

Boiler)

5 CFE obtained 3500 TCD and

18.14 MW (105 TPH Boiler) Year 2003

6 CFO obtained 3500 TCD and

18.14 MW (105 TPH Boiler)

17 CAT/APC/NANDI/2004-05 Dated –

01/10/2004

7 State EC obtained 3500 TCD Dated 29/06/2003( Enclosed as Annexure-4)

8 State EC obtained 18.14 MW

(105 TPH Boiler) Dated 29/04/2003( Enclosed as Annexure-4)

9

EC obtained for expansion of

3500 TCD to 6500 TCD and

Installation of new 50 KLPD

Distillery unit

F. No.J-11011/644/2007- IA II(I) Dated

02/09/2008( Enclosed as Annexure-4)

10

Amendment to EC for 6500

TCD and 50 KLPD Distillery

unit

F. No.J-11011/644/2007- IA II(I) Dated

18/11/2014 ( Enclosed as Annexure-4)

11

Combined Consent order for

6500 TCD and 18.14 MW Boiler

and 50 KLPD Distillery

Combined consent order No AW-302311 dated

22/03/2017 ( Valid from period 07/06/2016 to

30/06/2021

Sl.

No.

Units Category Existing

Capacity

Addition

Capacity

After

expansion

Capacity

1 Sugar unit 5 (j) 6500 TCD 7500 TCD 14000 TCD

2 Co-gen power generation 1(d) 18.14 MW 44 MW 62.14 MW

3 Distillery 5 (g) 50KLPD No change No Change

5

1.4 Background of the Project Proponent:

NSSKN (Runs by Co-operative society) is an agro based company focused on the

manufacture of sugar and allied products like power, alcohol and bio-manure. They

have proposed to establish a fully integrated sugar industry consisting of 14000 TCD

sugar plant, 62.14 MW co-gen power plant with existing 50 KLPD distillery with no

change in production quantity at Krishnanagar, Hosur Village, Vijayapur Taluk and

District, Karnataka State.

NSSKN is managed by an elected body having 5 years term. The Name of the

Directors of the Board is as follows;

Sl. No Name Designation

1 Shri. K. C. Desai Chairman

2 Shri. D. C. Desai Director

3 Shri. S. B. Patil Director

4 Shri. U. A. Mallannavar Director

5 Shri. A. P Lenkennavar Director

6 Shri. H. S. Koraddi Director

7 Shri. G. K. Patil Director

8 Shri. G. K. Konappanavar Director

9 Shri. B. D. Patil Director

10 Shri. S. D. Sahukar Director

11 Shri. T. K. Patil Director

12 Shri. D. H. Devanal Director

13 Shri. P. R. Gadadan Director

14 Shri.B.H.Halagali Director

15 Shri.S.S.Biradar Director

16 Shri.P.B.Sarnaik Director

17 Shri.R.H.Bidanur Director

18 Shri.I.S.Koppad Director

19 Shri.R.H.Desai Director

20 Shri.R.T.Desai Managing Director

Names, Designation of the senior officers of the factory.

Sl.No Name Designation

1 Shri. R. T. Desai Managing Director

2 Shri. C. S. Hubballi General Manager

3 Shri. Sanjit Kumar General Manager(operation)

4 Shri. M. Dattatreya Dy. General Manager (Dist)

6

5 Shri. S. Y. Gotur Manager (Environmental)

1.5 Brief Description of Nature, Size, Location of the Project:

NSSKN is an agro based industry focused on manufacture of sugar and allied

products like power, alcohol and bio-manure. The Salient Features of the Project given

below in Table 1.2.

Table 1.2: Salient features of the project

Sl. no Particulars

1 Name of the Company M/s Nandi Sahakari Sakkare Karkhane Niyamit

2 Name Address for correspondence

Shri. R.T. Dasai, M/s Nandi Sahakari Sakkare Karkhane Niyamit , Survey No 90& 92, Krishnanagar Village, Hosur Post, Vijayapur Taluk and District, Karnataka State -586113.

3 Location of the proposed Unit

Survey No 90& 92, Krishnanagar Village, Hosur Post, Vijayapur Taluk and District, Karnataka State -586113.

4 Constitution of the Organization

Co-operative society

5 Capacity of the Project

Proposed Expansion of i. Sugar plant : 6500 TCD to 14000 TCD

ii. Cogeneration power 18.14 MW to 62.14 MW in the existing Sugar plant and Boiler.

iii. Distillery 50 KLPD (No change)

6 No. of Working Days Sugar : 180 Days Co-gen Power Plant : 210 Days

7 Man power

Existing : Sugar Co-Gen : 627 nos Distillery: 70 nos Total : 697 nos Proposed : Sugar & Co-Gen : 150 nos

8 Total Land, Acres ( After Expansion)

Sugar Plant 19.99Acres

General Buildings 13.5 Acres

Distillery Plant Area 4.23 Acres

Green Belt Area 84 Acres

Open Vacant land for future use

118.28 Acre

Total Land Available for

the Sugar Complex

240 Acres

9 Raw material Particular’s Existing Addition Total

7

requirement Sugar Unit

Sugarcane :

6500 TCD

Sugarcane :

7500 TCD

Sugarcane :

14000 TCD

Co-

Generation

(Boiler)

Bagasse:

1950 T/d

Bagasse:

2250 T/d

Bagasse:

4200 T/d

10 Products

Particular’s Existing Addition Total

White

sugar 780 T/d

900 T/d 1680 T/d

Co-

Generation

Power

18.14 MW 44.0 MW 62.14MW

Molasses 292.5 T/d 337.5 T/d 630.0 T/d

11

Fresh water Source

Permission has taken from Executive Engineer,

Karnataka Nigam Ltd – Biligi for lifting water from

Krishna river.

Fresh water requirement For Co-gen Sugar - 1132 m3/d after expansion, and

for Distillery 372 m3/day.

12 Co-Gen Power plant

Capacity

Existing Addition Total

Power 18.14 MW 44.0 MW 62.14MW

Boiler 105 TPH 240 TPH 345 TPH

13 Boiler Fuel for Co-Gen

plant

During

Season Boiler fired with Bagasse (Fuel)only.

During Off-

Season Boilerfired with saved Bagasse (Fuel).

14

Effluent treatment

facility

ETP consisting of bar screen, oil separator,

neutralizer, ASP with aeration & clarifier. Effluent is

treated to irrigation standards.

15

APC facility to boiler Co-gen sugar Boilers of 105 T/h & 240 T/h capacity

Stack of adequate height and ESP.

Diesel gen set of 1250 KVA existing and 1250 KVA proposed Stack of adequate height, anti-vibration pads & acoustic enclosures are provided and will be provided for proposed DG.

16 Solid waste source and

disposal

1. Bagasse: Used as fuel in boiler

2. Press mud: to farmers for as manure/soil nutrient

3. Molasses: used raw material in the captive

distillery

17 Investment for

pollution control Rs 500 Lakhs

8

Figure 1.1: Location map project site in Vijayapur District

1.6 Need for the expansion of sugar cane crushing capacity & Cogeneration & its

importance to the country & or region

facilities

NSSKN

9

The world's largest consumers of sugar are India, China, Brazil, USA, Russia, Mexico,

Pakistan, Indonesia, Germany and Egypt. Brazil & India are the largest sugar

producing countries followed by China, USA, Thailand, Australia, Mexico, Pakistan,

France and Germany.

Global sugar production increased from approximately 125.88 MMT (Million Metric

Tons) in 1995 - 1996 to 149.4 MMT in 2002-2003 and then declined to 143.7 MMT in

2003-2004, whereas consumption increased steadily from 118.1 MMT in 1995-1996 to

142.8 MMT in 2003-2004.

The world consumption is projected to grow to 160.7 MMT in 2010 and 176.1 MMT by

2015. India is predominantly an agro based economy. Sugarcane plays a very vital

role in this agro based economy by providing sugar, the main sweetener used in

India. With the growing demand for sugar, the emphasis has been on increasing sugar

production.

The Indian sugar industry is the country’s second largest agro-processing industry

with an annual production capacity of over 18 million tonnes of sugar. About 45

million farmers and their families depend directly on sugar industries. Only 2.5 % of

the area is under cultivation of sugar cane of total cultivated area in India.

In India the annual per capita consumption of white crystal sugar and that of non-

centrifugal sugar is 15 Kgs per annum and 23 Kgs per annum respectively. The annual

overall consumption of the centrifugal and non-centrifugal sugar in the country

comes to more than 25 million tonnes. Thus, there is vast untapped potential for

growth in the area of sugar production.

India is a vast country with greatly varying economic patterns and parameters

prevailing across the country. Such variations are highly pronounced, particularly

between urban areas and rural areas.

Income levels vary significantly. Almost 30% of the population is perceived to be in an

extremely low income group. The effective per capita consumption of white sugar

would work out to 24 kgs and of total sweeteners (including Gur and Khandasari) to

32 kgs, about one and half times the world average.

A higher net per capita state domestic product and also a higher proportion of urban

population, the consumption of sugar is significantly higher and compares favorably

with developed countries such as the USA and countries of the EU. In fact, in urban

areas of comparatively affluent Indian states like Punjab, Haryana etc., per capita

consumption of sugar is substantially higher than even in developed countries.

Due to the switching over from other sweetening agents to sugar, the effect of

population growth and increase in per capital consumption, the sugar consumption is

likely to increase. Hence, there is a lot of scope for increasing the Sugar Manufacturing

10

infra-Structure. Hence, further addition of sugar manufacturing infrastructure is

envisaged in India.

Further the economical size of the sugar plant is shifting from lower crushing capacity

to 14000 TCD considering mainly the cost of production & economical self-sufficient

downstream industries.

Considering the declining trend of world beet sugar production, more cane

juice/sugar diversion to ethanol, India’s larger agricultural base and irrigation

resources etc., India is definitely going to be a major player in world sugar

production.

Transport of the raw material for sugar factory i.e. sugar cane shall be done by trucks/

tractors / bullock carts and the finished product is transported by trucks / wagons.

Excess power shall be exported via grid.

The proposed expansion will result in the following resources optimization.

Proposed plant shall be situated in the available land.

Proximity to the availability of raw material area i.e. rich sugar cane area of

Vijayapur, Belagavi and Bagalkot district of Karnataka state, Sangli & Kolhapur

districts of Maharashtra state.

Availability of utilities such as transportation & water.

Ease of control over both sugar & cogeneration units by one management &

sharing common facilities like workshop etc.

1.7 Demand– Supply Gap of Power Sector in India

In India, the installed power plant capacity was approximately 1300 MW in 1947 and

it is about 120,000 MW in 2006. Power has a significant role to play in industry and

agriculture. Power demand increases continuously due to increase of the

industrialization and per capita power consumption. At present, the per capita power

consumption is about 600 KW/Hr. It is likely to increase to 1500 KW/Hr in 2017.

At present, the gap between the demand and supply is about 30% during the peak

hours. The Central Government has notified on 12-02-05 that the availability of the

power demand is to be fully met only by 2012. But to achieve, the country has to

install a capacity of 2,000,000 MW/hr. Per capita availability has to increase from the

present level of 600 KW/Hr to 1500 KW/Hr in 2017. Aggressive attitude of the

country to grow in the power field to meet the level of infrastructure demand is

required in the competitive international market.

11

1.8 Need for Bio Mass Based Power Plant.

The ever growing energy demand & the steep depletion of fossil fuels have directed

us to explore the possibility of developing other sources of energy particularly from

non-conventional renewable energy sources, which is also environmental

friendly.Further, it is an undisputed fact that the present level of generation of power

from Hydel, Thermal and nuclear sources could not meet the increasing demand due

to various problems.

In order to reduce the Green House Gas Emission, the Non-Conventional Energy is to

be utilized for the generation of electricity. One of the Non-Conventional renewable

Energy source is Bagasse. So the Ministry of Non – Conventional Energy, Government

of India encourages Sugar Mills for Bagasse based Co-Generation by increasing the

various subsidies.

We have to cross the hurdles such as lower growth rate i.e. around 5% against

expected 12 % every year, lower PLF in the range of 75 % on an average, T&D losses

varying in various states. In the above scenario the country has to necessarily to come

out with innovative options to encourage the energy conservation measures,

increasing the PLF, export of surplus power to the national purpose etc.

Government of India (GOI) has acknowledged the overall deficiency of power supply

and quality in the country. The importance of decentralized energy generation from

renewable sources of fuel, for complimenting centralized fossil fuel based power

generation, has been accepted way for improving the situation.

The Electricity Bill 2003 approved by the Lok Sabha and Rajya Sabha, provides for de-

licensing of power generation and distribution, throughout the country. The

renewable energy sources and power generation from renewable sources have been

focused in this bill and the states have been guided to increase their share up to

minimum 10%.

The fiscal incentives offered for renewable energy generation will continue in the

coming period. They primarily include accelerated depreciation, income tax holiday

(5 years tax holiday with 30% for next 5 years), customs duty concessions, exemption

of Central excise duty & Central sales tax.

The Central Electricity Regulatory Commission and State Electricity Regulatory

Commissions have come into force to establish tariffs and oversee the electricity

sector. The regulatory commissions fixed tariffs for the purchase of electricity by SEBs

from all sources including renewable, based on the guidelines from the Ministry of

Power and the MNRE, State policies and inputs from the public hearings. The

Government of India, through the Ministry of Non-Conventional Energy Sources

(MNRE), is encouraging all the existing and new sugar units to set up co-gen power

plants. In order to achieve the potential of about 5000 MW from sugar mill

cogeneration in India, the Ministry has been undertaking promotional efforts under

12

the National Program on Biomass / Cogeneration Power since1994-95. Apart from

providing guidelines to the States for purchase of exportable power from such

projects, the Ministry has been offering several promotional and fiscal incentives to

this sector.

The specific incentives from the Ministry include interest subsidy for commercial

projects from 1-3 % depending on the temperature and pressure configuration,

subsidy for preparation of detailed project reports and assistance in syndication of

loans, financial assistance for State Nodal Agencies, consultants, industry associations

for undertaking promotional efforts, etc.

1.9 Overview of power situation & sugar plant co-generation projects, in India

& in the state of Karnataka.

As of March 31, 2007, bagasse based co-gen projects have been commissioned in the

country with, cumulative exportable surplus of 615.83 MW from 74 projects.

Additional 104 projects, aggregating to 1212.27 MW, are under various stages of

construction. The Govt. of Karnataka adopted the MNRE guidelines since 1994-95 for

purchase of power from sugar mill co-gen projects. As of April 30, 2007, the

commissioned capacity in the State is 339 MW against a potential of 1000 MW (Source:

Progress report of KREDAL) Karnataka Electricity Regulatory Commission (KERC)

has issued a tariff order for purchase of exportable power from bagasse co-gen power

plants at sugar factories in January,2005.

1.10 Power Scenario in Karnataka.

Karnataka has been facing shortage of power in the recent years and the power

system is a mix of Thermal, Hydel, Gas, Co-generation, and contribution from

National Grid. Due to the continuous efforts of Karnataka Power Transmission

Corporation Limited (KPTCL), the transmission loss, which is about 62 % in some

states, is reduced to 25%. In spite of that there is power shortage.

The existing power shortages in peak demand & energy availability are quite higher,

compared to the nation. It is necessary for the State Government to tap every possible

alternate source of energy, from bio-mass or captive power. This is in view of the

projections for requirement of power for sustained economic development of the State

and shortages of funds for implementing conventional power projects. Government of

Karnataka has already acknowledged the grim situation and has decided to promote

captive and cogeneration projects in private, joint, public and cooperative sectors.

1.11 Cogeneration

Due to shortage in the power supply during peak hours and also due to the

Government policy of supplying power to the rural areas on priority, many industries

13

and commercial establishments have started installing captive power generation

facilities. Such captive power generation comes under three categories.

Category 1 is Cogeneration, which is the simultaneous generation of process

heat and electric power.

Category 2 is standby captive generation, mainly as a backup in the event of

utility power failure.

Category 3 is the captive generation, used for augmenting or even substituting

the utility power.

Cogeneration increases the overall efficiency of the system and is desirable from the

point of view of energy economy. It is estimated that such captive generation capacity

in the country is about 10% of the total installed utility generating capacity.

1.12 Bagasse Based Cogeneration in Sugar Industry

Indian Sugar Industry has to improve the revenue by value addition to the by

product. So by Cogeneration Indian sugar Industry can be benefited & the revenue

per ton of sugarcane can be enhanced. Sugar mills have the capacity to export about

100 KW/Hr power per ton cane. This will increase the revenue by Rs. 300 per ton

cane.

Cogeneration reduces the Green House Gas emission. This will reduce the global

warming. So by cogeneration, future generation will also be benefited.

All the Cane sugar plants have been using the cogeneration concept – dual use of

energy in Steam, for their own captive use. But the term “cogeneration” under the

present context is used to denote the export of the surplus power to the grid or for

selling to any other third party.

The cogeneration potential in the country in various industries, like petrochemical,

paper, sugar, textile, cement etc., is around 12000 MW. Out of this, it is estimated that

the potential in the cane sugar factories is around 4000 MW.

Bagasse based cogeneration has the following advantages.

The bagasse based cogeneration is eco-friendly as pollutants are negligible.

Bagasse based cogeneration conserves fossil fuels.

There is no need to transport the fuel to the generating station as the fuel i.e. bagasse

is available in the factory itself.

It does not increase any foreign exchange outflow, as all the plant and

equipment required for setting up the cogeneration plants are indigenously

available.

The setting up of the cogeneration plant has a lower gestation period compared

to the gestation period of the conventional thermal plants.

14

It has lower installation & operating costs compared to the conventional fossil

fuel thermal power plants.

As the plants will be located invariably in the rural areas, the transmission and

distribution losses are very much minimized. In addition, these plants increase

the voltage level of the power supplied to the rural areas.

Bagasse based cogeneration provides employment to rural folk.

The cogeneration plants also improve the financial position of the sugar

factories.

1.13 Sugar Cane as Energy Crop

Sugarcane is a tropical grass belonging to the same genes as sorghum and maize. It is

an energy crop and the maximum converter of solar energy into bio-mass. The trash

free millable sugarcane stalk contains about 73% water and 27% solids. Cane contains

about 14 % dissolved solids and about 13% fibre woody fibrous Solids. The woody

fibre of the cane with the unextracted solids and moisture is known as bagasse. It is a

residue of Sugar Milling Plant. It is about 30 to 32% of the sugarcane crushed. The

bagasse is used as fuel for the boilers in the sugar mills.

Calorific Value of the bagasse depends upon the moisture % in bagasse. It is about

2200 to 2400 kcals per kg of bagasse. With the selling of surplus power, it is possible to

install high pressure energy efficient boilers & energy efficient turbines. More power

per ton of cane crushed can be produced. Surplus power shall be exported.

Conventional sugar mills generate about 35 KW/Hr power per ton cane & consume

the entire generated power whereas the bagasse based cogeneration sugar mills

generate about 130 to 140 KW/Hr power, consume about 35 KW/Hr & export about

105 KW/Hr power per ton cane. Hence, bagasse based cogeneration increases the

profitability of the Sugar Mills.

Further, Cogeneration plants using bagasse as fuel are eco-friendly and have the

added advantages of relatively low capital cost as well as short gestation period. In

addition, the other added advantages are, reduction in the transportation of fuel &

reduction in transmission losses. Cogeneration in sugar industries also raises a

futuristic source in the way of India's self-reliance in the power sector particularly in

the rural areas. Keeping in view of the above, NSSKN proposes to expand the

sugarcane crushing capacity of sugar plant from 6500 TCD to 14000 TCD. Apart from

this, NSSKN shall increase the power generation capacity from 18.14 MW/hr to 62.14

MW/hr in the cogeneration plant.

1.14 Imports vs. Indigenous Production.

Of the world’s sugar production of 220 Million Metric Tons, India is expected to have

contributed 22 Million Metric Tons or a mere 10% of the world production.

15

1.15 Export Possibility.

Export possibility for sugar is totally dependent on government’s policies.

1.16 Domestic / Export Markets

Indians by nature have a sweet tooth and sugar is a prime requirement in every

household. Almost 75% of the sugar available in the open market is consumed by

bulk consumers like bakeries, candy makers, sweet makers and soft drink

manufacturers. Khandsari sugar is less refined and is typically consumed by sweet

makers. Gud/Jiggery, an unrefined form of lumpy brown sugar, is mostly consumed

in rural areas, with some quantities illegally diverted for alcohol production. Greater

urbanization & rising standard of living have sparked of a rising trend in usage of

Sugar. Industrial consumption for sugar is also growing rapidly particularly from the

food processing sector & sugar based bulk consumers such as soft drink and ice cream

manufacturers.

1.17 Employment Generation Due To the Project

The existing manpower in the industry is 697 no’s (Sugar Co-Gen and Distillery), 627

no’s all alone for Sugar Co-Gen. The additional direct man power to the industry after

expansion program will be 150 no’s.However, the commencement of this industry

will create direct and indirect employment opportunities to more than 2,000 people in

terms of factory employment, transportation, vehicle maintenance, petty shops etc. In

addition, about 2,000 workers will be indirectly benefitted through harvesting and

other sugarcane cultivation work.

1.18 Objective and Scope of EIA Studies

The overall objective of any EIA studies is to identify and assess the adverse and

beneficial impacts of the project in the planning stage itself, so that necessary

mitigation measures to prevent or minimize these adverse impacts could be planned

early and cost effectively. In view of this objective, the scope of EIA study broadly

includes:

Introduction along with scope of EIA studies (Chapter-1).

Preliminary details of project including type, need and location of project and

the magnitude of project activities (Chapter-2).

Project description including process, resource required and products formed

along with sources of pollution and built in mitigation measures with respect

to wastewater, gaseous emissions and solid wastes (Chapter-2).

Existing baseline status of the relevant environmental parameters in the

specified study area through primary and secondary source. The

environmental parameters include meteorology, air, water, land, soil, noise,

ecology and socio economics (Chapter-3).

16

Anticipated environmental impacts of the proposed project on environment

and measures for mitigation of the predicted adverse impacts, air pollution

dispersion modeling studies (Chapter-4).

Analysis of alternatives for the technology & site (Chapter-5)

Technical aspects of monitoring the effectiveness of mitigation measures. It

includes laboratory and other facilities monitoring facilities, environmental

parameters to be monitored, data to be analyzed and sampling location and

schedule. It also includes budgetary provision and procurement schedule for

the monitoring facilities (Chapter-6).

Additional studies relevant to the project such as public consultation, risk

assessment and social impact assessment with R.R. Action plan (Chapter-7).

Project benefits in terms of improvement in social and physical infrastructures

in the region of the proposed project (Chapter-8).

Environmental cost benefit analysis of the project (Chapter-9).

Administrative aspects of environmental management plan to ensure that the

mitigation measures implemented and their effectiveness monitored (Chapter-

10).

Summary and conclusions consisting of overall justification of project. It also

includes the summary of significant adverse effects along with the measures to

overcome the same (Chapter-11).

Preparation of EIA document as per MoEF guidelines. It includes all the above

Information of items from i to xii.

1.19 Methodology of EIA Studies

1.19.1 Existing Environmental Status

The environmental influence due to the project is analyzed covering a radial distance

of about 10 km around the factory premises. Therefore, the study area for monitoring

of environmental parameters covers 10 km distance from the project site.

The environmental parameters, which are likely to be affected by the activities of the

project, were identified. They include air, water, soil, land use, ecology, socio-

economics etc. The existing status of these environmental parameters for study area is

collected from both primary and secondary sources. Primary source data were

collected through environmental monitoring survey of representative locations of the

study area. Thereconnaissance survey was conducted and the sampling locations

were identified based on:

Existing topography and location of surface water bodies like ponds and

steams.

Meteorological conditions (predominant wind directions).

Location of towns, villages and other sensitive areas present in the vicinity of

the proposed project site.

17

Representative areas for baseline conditions

Accessibility, power availability and security to the monitoring equipment.

Secondary data were collected from various organizations to substantiate the primary

data. The data thus collected was compared with the standards prescribed for the

respective environmental parameters. The environmental parameters monitored and

the frequency of monitoring is given in Table: 1.3. The methodologies adopted for

studying individual components of environment are briefly described below.

A. Air environment

Micrometeorology

The existing status of these environmental parameters for study area is collected from

both primary and secondary sources. Secondary source data were collected from

Bijapur Agrometeorological Services, University of Agricultural Sciences, Dharwad.

The parameters like wind speed, maximum and minimum temperatures, relative

humidity and total rainfall were recorded on hourly basis continuously during 15th

December 2016 to 15th March 2017 period. The meteorological data collected by

primary source has been used for interpretation of the existing ambient air quality

status.

Ambient Air Quality

The status of the existing ambient air quality in the study region has been assessed

through a network of eight air sampling stations during the study period within a

radial distance of 10 km distance from the project site. The monitoring network was

so designed that a representative baseline scenario is obtained in upwind, downwind

and crosswind directions. These monitoring sites have been established keeping in

view the available data on predominant wind direction and wind speed of this

particular region. The existing ambient air quality status (AAQ) has been monitored

for PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOxand CO at each station on 24 hourly basis. The monitoring

was done as per the approved methods of Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB).

Maximum, minimum, average and 98 % values have been computed from the data

collected at all individual sampling stations to represent the ambient air quality status.

A. Noise environment

Noise monitoring has been carried out at different locations to identify the impact of

project activities on the surroundings in the study area. Noise levels were recorded

hourly interval for 24 hrsduring the day and night times to compute the day

equivalent, night equivalent and day-night equivalent level.

B. Water environment

The existing surface and ground water sources in and around the plant site were

monitored for assessment of their physico-chemical characteristics. Samples were

18

collected from different locations within an area of 10 km radius and analyzed. The

parameters thus analyzed were compared with BIS standards. The activities around

the source during sampling were taken into consideration in interpretation of the

water quality of the particular source.

C. Land environment

Representative soil samples were collected from different sampling locations within

an area of 10 km radius around the plant site. They were analyzed to assess their

physio-chemical characteristics. Standard procedures were followed for sampling and

analysis. The samples collected were assessed for their suitability for the growth of

plant species, crops.

D. Socio-economic environment

Data pertaining to geology, land use, demography, socio economics and ecology were

based on primary and secondary data collected from different sources such as census

reports, district gazetteer, government publications and scientific literature.

Table 1.3:Environmental attributes and frequency of monitoring

Sl.No Attribute Parameters Frequency of Monitoring

1. Ambient air

quality

PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx&CO

in 8 locations

24 hourly samples twice a

week for the project site

2. Meteorology Wind speed, direction

temperature, relative

humidity, rainfall

At project site continuous for 3

months hourly recording.

3. Water quality Physical, chemical &

bacteriological parameters

for 8 locations.

Grab samples have been

collected once during the

study period.

4. Ecology Terrestrial and aquatic

flora and fauna in the

region.

Primary and Secondary data.

5. Noise levels Noise levels in dB (A) in 8

locations

Recording at hourly interval

for 24 hrs, once a month per

location during study period.

6. Soil

characteristics

Parameters related to

agriculture potential at 8

locations.

Once during the study period.

7. Land use Trend of land usechange

for different categories.

Based on data published in

district census handbook and

based on satellite Imagery.

8. Socio – economic

aspects

Socio-economic

characteristics.

Based on the data collected

from the secondary source.

19

9. Geology Geological history Based on the data collected


10. Hydrology Drainage area and pattern

nature of streams. Aquifer

characteristics recharge

and discharge areas.

Based on the data collected


11. Risk assessment To identify areas where

disaster can occur due to

fire & explosives & release

of toxic substance.

Identification of possible risks

at the proposed project,

quantification of risk through

modeling.

1.20 Identification of Impacts and Mitigation Measures

The likely impacts of various activities of the proposed project on the environment

were identified. These impacts were assessed for their significance based on the

background environmental quality in the area and the magnitude of the impact. All

components of the environment were considered and wherever possible impacts were

evaluated in quantitative / qualitative terms. Estimated impacts have been

superimposed over the baseline (pre-project) status of environmental quality. The

resultant (post-project) quality of environmental parameters is reviewed with respect

to the permissible limits. Thereby, the preventive and mitigation measures were

formulated and incorporated in the environmental plan.

1.21 Terms of References (TOR) From MoEF and Their Compliances

Terms of References to conduct of EIA studies were issued by MOEF New Delhi &

updated in the MoEF website vide letter no. F.No: J-11011/110/2017- IA. II (I)

dated19thJuly 2017 in continuation to the 24thmeeting held on 15thJune, 2017. The EIA

studies were conducted based on these TOR and accordingly the EIA report is

prepared. The list of TOR and their compliances is appended in the table below. The

TOR copy that is been received from MOEF New Delhi is enclosed as Annexure-1

Table 1.4: Terms Of Reference (TOR)

Sl.

No.

TOR issued by MoEF Details

A Standard Terms of Reference

1. Executive summary. Enclosed as Annexure -18of EIA

Report.

2. Introduction. Detailed in Chapter 1 of EIA report

describes Introduction.

i Details of the EIA Consultant including

NABET accreditation.

Enclosed as Annexure- 14

ii Information about the project Given under Chapter 1 of EIA

20

proponent. report, under 1.4 sections.

iii Importance and benefits of the project Given under Chapter 8 of EIA

report.

3. Project Description Detailed in Chapter 2 of EIA report

i Cost of project and time of completion. Sighted under Chapter 2 of EIA

report, under 2.5 sections.

ii Products with capacities for the

proposed project.

Sighted under Chapter 2 of EIA


iii If expansion project, details of existing

products with capacities and whether

adequate land is available for

expansion, reference of earlier EC if

any.



iv List of raw materials required and their

source along with mode of

transportation.


report, under 2.4.6 section.

v Other chemicals and materials required

with quantities and storage capacities


report, under 2.4.6 section.

vi Details of Emission, effluents,

hazardous waste generation and their

management.



vii Requirement of water, power, with

source of supply, status of approval,

water balance diagram,man-power

requirement (regular and contract)



viii Process description along with major

equipment’s and machineries, process

flow sheet (quantative) from raw

material to products to be provided.



ix Hazard identification and details of

proposed safety systems.



x Expansion/modernization proposals: Sighted under Chapter 1 of EIA

report, under 1.3 sections and also

in Table 1.2.

a. Copy of all the Environmental

Clearance(s) including Amendments

thereto obtain forthe project from

MOEF/SEIAA shall be attached as an

Annexure. A certified copy of thelatest

Monitoring Report of the Regional

Office of the Ministry of Environment

Earlier Environmental Clearance’s

copy is enclosed as Annexure- 4.

Latest certified Compliance report

copy is enclosed as Annexure- 5.

Latest compliance of Consent to

21

and Forestsas per circular dated 30th

May, 2012 on the status of compliance

of conditions stipulatedin all the

existing environmental clearances

including Amendments shall be

provided. Inaddition, status of

compliance of Consent to Operate for

the ongoing existing operationof the

project from SPCB shall be attached

with the EIA-EMP report.

Operate for the ongoing existing

operation of the project from SPCB

is enclosed as Annexure- 6

b. In case the existing project has not

obtained environmental clearance,

reasons for nottaking EC under the

provisions of the EIA Notification 1994

and/or EIA Notification2006 shall be

provided. Copies of Consent to

Establish/No Objection Certificate and

Consent to Operate (in case of units

operating prior to EIA Notification

2006, CTE and CTO of FY 2005-2006)

obtained from the SPCB shall be

submitted. Further, compliance report

to the conditions of consents from the

SPCB shall be submitted.

The company stated its crushing

operation for commercial

production of sugar on 9th

December 1992.

The initial sugarcane crushing

capacity of the plant from the year

1992 till the year 2004 was 2500 TCD

with 2.5 MW TG set Co-gen facilities

(2 x 32 TPH Boiler). The plant was

further expanded to a crushing

capacity to 3500 TCD along with

Co-Gen capacity of 18.14 MW (105

TPH Boiler) in the year 2004, the

necessary approvals had been

obtained, isenclosed as Annexure- 4.

The company in the 2008 again

increased its capacity from 3500

TCD to 6500 TCD Sugarcane

crushing and installation of 50

KLPD Distillery, the latest EC copy

is enclosed as Annexure- 4.

4 Site Details Detailed in Chapter 2 of EIA report.

xiv Location of the project site covering

village, Taluka/Tehsil, District and

State, Justificationfor selecting the site,

whether other sites were considered



i A toposheet of the study area of radius

of 10km and site location on

1:50,000/1:25,000scale on an A3/A2

Given under Figure: 3.1 of EIA

report.

22

sheet. (including all eco-sensitive areas

and environmentally sensitiveplaces)

ii Details w.r.t. option analysis for

selection of site


report.

iii Co-ordinates (lat-long) of all four

corners of the site.


report, under Table 2.1.

iv Google map-Earth downloaded of the

project site.


report, under Figure 2.1 and 2.3.

v Layout maps indicating existing unit as

well as proposed unit indicating

storage area,plant area, greenbelt area,

utilities etc. If located within an

Industrial area/Estate/Complex,layout

of Industrial Area indicating location of

unit within the Industrial area/Estate.


report, Figure 2.3 and 2.4 and also

enclosed as Annexure- 16

vi Photographs of the proposed and

existing (if applicable) plant site. If

existing, showphotographs of

plantation/greenbelt, in particular.

Enclosed as Annexure- 15

vii Land use break-up of total land of the

project site (identified and acquired),

government/private - agricultural,

forest, wasteland, water bodies,

settlements, etc shall be included.

(not required for industrial area)


report, under 3.3.1 sections.

viii A list of major industries with name

and type within study area (10km

radius) shall beincorporated. Land use

details of the study area

There are no major industries that

are coming under the study area of

10 Kms, however the nearest

industries to the factory are sited in

Chapter 2 of EIA report, under

Table 2.1.

ix Geological features and Geo-

hydrological status of the study area

shall be included.


report, under 3.3.7 and 3.3.8

sections.

x Details of Drainage of the project up to

5km radius of study area. If the site is

within 1 kmradius of any major river,

peak and lean season river discharge as

well as flood occurrencefrequency

based on peak rainfall data of the past

30 years. Details of Flood Level of the

River Krishna is flowing at a

distance of 1.5 Km from West to

East, there is a proposal which has

got approved that the level of

Almati Dam to be increase from

519.6to 524.256 m.

23

project site and maximum Flood Level

of the river shall also be provided.

(Mega greenfield projects)

In this regard, A letter providing

about the MWL of Alamati

reservoir due to increase in FRL of

Dam to an Elevation of 524.256 m is

obtained from Executive Engineer of

Krishna Bhagya Jala Nigam Ltd,

states that all the FRL back water of

river Krishna locations are beyond

the 500 mts from the factory

boundary.

The letter obtained from Executive

Engineer of Krishna Bhagya Jala

Nigam Ltd is enclosed as Annexure-

8

xi Status of acquisition of land. If

acquisition is not complete, stage of the

acquisition processand expected time

of complete possession of the land.

The proposed project is an

expansion project in the existing

industrial premise. No additional

land required for the proposed

project, the existing land is in a

complete possession.

xii R&R details in respect of land in line

with state Government policy

The expansion project is proposed in

the existing industrial premise. No

procurement of any additional land

for the proposed project.

In view of the above, the proposed

expansion project does not involve

any displacement of persons and no

rehabilitation or resettlements are

necessary.

5 Forest and wildlife related issues (if

applicable):

The area of 10 kms radius around

the proposed project site is free from

ecologically sensitive areas hence

not applicable

i Permission and approval for the use of

forest land (forestry clearance), if any,

and recommendations of the State

Forest Department. (if applicable)

ii Land use map based on High

resolution satellite imagery (GPS) of the

proposed site delineating the forestland

24

(in case of projects involving forest land

more than 40 ha)

iii Status of Application submitted for

obtaining the stage I forestry clearance

along with latest status shall be

submitted.

iv The projects to be located within 10 km

of the National Parks, Sanctuaries,

Biosphere Reserves, Migratory

Corridors of Wild Animals, the project

proponent shall submit the map duly

authenticated by Chief Wildlife

Warden showing these features vis-à-

vis the project location and the

recommendations or comments of the

Chief Wildlife Warden-thereon

v Wildlife Conservation Plan duly

authenticated by the Chief Wildlife

Warden of the State Government for

conservation of Schedule I fauna, if any

exists in the study area

vi Copy of application submitted for

clearance under the Wildlife

(Protection) Act, 1972, to the Standing

Committee of the National Board for

Wildlife

6 Environmental Status Detailed in Chapter 3 of EIA report.

i Determination of atmospheric

inversion level at the project site and

site-specific micrometeorological data

using temperature, relative humidity,

hourly wind speed and directionand

rainfall.

Detailed in Chapter 3 of EIA report,

Sighted under 3.3.3 sections.

ii AAQ data (except monsoon) at 8

locations for PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOX,

CO and otherparameters relevant to the

project shall be collected. The

monitoring stations shall be

basedCPCB guidelines and take into

account the pre-dominant wind

direction, population zoneand sensitive



25

receptors including reserved forests.

iii Raw data of all AAQ measurement for

12 weeks of all stations as per

frequency given in theNAQM

Notification of Nov. 2009 along with -

min., max., average and 98% values for

each of the AAQ parameters from data

of all AAQ stations should be provided

as an annexureto the EIA Report.


Sighted under 3.3.3 sections,

Monitoring reports on AAQ of all

the parameters

withmonitoringlocations is enclosed

as Annexure- 9

iv Surface water quality of nearby River

(100m upstream and downstream of

discharge point)and other surface

drains at eight locations as per

CPCB/MoEF&CC guidelines.



Monitoring reports on surface water

quality along with monitoring

locations is enclosed as Annexure- 9

v Whether the site falls near to polluted

stretch of river identified by the

CPCB/MoEF&CC, ifyes give details.

No

vi Ground water monitoring at minimum

at 8 locations shall be included.



Monitoring reports on Ground

water quality along with monitoring

locations is enclosed as Annexure- 9

vii Noise levels monitoring at 8 locations

within the study area.



Ambient Noise quality along with

monitoring locations is enclosed as

Annexure- 9

viii Soil Characteristic as per CPCB

guidelines.


Sighted under 3.3.2 sections, results

of Soil Characteristic around the

project site is enclosed as Annexure-

9

ix Traffic study of the area, type of

vehicles, frequency of vehicles for

transportation of materials,additional

traffic due to proposed project, parking

arrangement etc.



x Detailed description of flora and fauna

(terrestrial and aquatic) existing in the

study areashall be given with special

reference to rare, endemic and



26

endangered species. If Schedule-I fauna

are found within the study area, a

Wildlife Conservation Plan shall be

prepared andfurnished.

xi Socio-economic status of the study

area.



7 Impact and Environment Management

Plan

Detailed in Chapter 4 of EIA report.

i Assessment of ground level

concentration of pollutants from the

stack emission based onsite-specific

meteorological features. In case the

project is located on a hilly terrain, the

AQIP Modeling shall be done using

inputs of the specific terrain

characteristics fordetermining the

potential impacts of the project on the

AAQ. Cumulative impact of all

sourcesof emissions (including

transportation) on the AAQ of the area

shall be assessed. Details ofthe model

used and the input data used for

modelling shall also be provided. The

air qualitycontours shall be plotted on a

location map showing the location of

project site, habitationnearby, sensitive

receptors, if any.


Sighted under 4.4 sections.

ii Water Quality modeling - in case of

discharge in water body

There are no water courses flowing

within the project area. There is no

discharge of any water/waste water

or effluent or treated water outside

the premises, the factory follows

zero discharges.

However a good storm water

management is practiced to arrest

the storm water and not letting out

of the premises.

iii Impact of the transport of the raw

materials and end products on the

surrounding environmentshall be

assessed and provided. In this regard,

Impact of the transport on Air,

water, Biological environment and

land is detailed in Chapter 4 of EIA

report.

27

options for transport of raw materials

andfinished products and wastes (large

quantities) by rail or rail-cum road

transport or conveyorcum-rail

transport shall be examined.

iv A note on treatment of wastewater

from different plant operations, extent

recycled and reusedfor different

purposes shall be included. Complete

scheme of effluent treatment.

Characteristicsof untreated and treated

effluent to meet the prescribed

standards of discharge under

E(P)Rules.

Source of wastewater,

Characteristics of wastewater,

Treatment procedure and

Specification of effluent treatment

units is detailed in Chapter 2 of EIA

Report under 2.7.1 Section and also

in Chapter 4 of EIA Report.

v Details of stack emission and action

plan for control of emissions to meet

standards.

Details of stack emissions and there

action plan to control emissions

detailed in Chapter 2 of EIA Report

under 2.7.2 Section and also in

Chapter 4 of EIA Report.

vi Measures for fugitive emission control Details of fugitive emission and

there action plan to control

emissions detailed in Chapter 2 of

EIA Report under 2.7.2 Section and

also in Chapter 4 of EIA Report.

vii Details of hazardous waste generation

and their storage, utilization and

management. Copiesof MOU regarding

utilization of solid and hazardous

waste in cement plant shall also

beincluded. EMP shall include the

concept of waste-minimization,

recycle/reuse/recovertechniques,

Energy conservation, and natural

resource conservation.



viii Proper utilization of fly ash shall be

ensured as per Fly Ash Notification,

2009. A detailedplan of action shall be

provided.



ix Action plan for the green belt

development plan in 33 % area i.e. land

with not less than1,500 trees per ha.

Action plan for the green belt

development is given under

Chapter 10 of EIA report, under 10.2

28

Giving details of species, width of

plantation, planning schedule etc. shall

be included. The green belt shall be

around the project boundary and a

scheme for greeningof the roads used

for the project shall also be

incorporated.

sections.

x Action plan for rainwater harvesting

measures at plant site shall be

submitted to harvestrainwater from the

roof tops and storm water drains to

recharge the ground water and also

touse for the various activities at the

project site to conserve fresh water and

reduce the waterrequirement from

other sources.



xi Total capital cost and recurring

cost/annum for environmental

pollution control measures shall be

included.



xii Action plan for post-project

environmental monitoring shall be

submitted.



xiii Onsite and Offsite Disaster (natural

and Man-made) Preparedness and

EmergencyManagement Plan including

Risk Assessment and damage control.

Disaster management plan should be

linked with District Disaster

Management Plan.

Detailed in Chapter 7 of EIA report.

8 Occupational health Detailed in Chapter 7 of EIA report.

i Plan and fund allocation to ensure the

occupational health & safety of all

contract and casualworkers

An amount of 5 Lakhs per year is

allotted as a part of EMP for

occupational health & safety for all

the workers (contract &

Permanente) who are working for

the company.

ii Details of exposure specific health

status evaluation of worker. If the

workers' health is beingevaluated by

pre designed format, chest x rays,


under 7.2 sections

29

Audiometry, Spirometry, Vision testing

(Far& Near vision, colour vision and

any other ocular defect) ECG, during

pre-placement andperiodical

examinations give the details of the

same. Details regarding last month

analyzeddata of above mentioned

parameters as per age, sex, duration of

exposure and department wise.

iii Details of existing Occupational &

Safety Hazards. What are the exposure

levels of hazardsand whether they are

within Permissible Exposure level

(PEL). If these are not within PEL,what

measures the company has adopted to

keep them within PEL so that health of

the workerscan be preserved,


under 7.2 sections

iv Annual report of health status of

workers with special reference to

Occupational Health andSafety.

Regular Health check-up is already

undertaken by us for all the workers

working in the factory. A full

timedoctoris made available for

staffround theclock at site, a doctor

certificate along with health status

report ofsome theworkersis

enclosed as Annexure -13

9 Corporate Environment Policy

i Does the company have a well laid

down Environment Policy approved by

its Board ofDirectors? If so, it may be

detailed in the EIA report.

The company have a well laid down

Environment Policy approved by its

Board of Directors, Detailed in

Chapter 8 of EIA report, under 8.2

sections

ii Does the Environment Policy prescribe

for standard operating process /

procedures to bringinto focus any

infringement / deviation / violation of

the environmental or forest norms

/conditions? If so, it may be detailed in

the EIA.

The company has a well laid down

Environment Policy approved by its

Board of Directors, Hierarchy

detailed in Chapter 8 of EIA report

under 8.2 sections, operating

procedures are detailed in Detailed

in Chapter 7 of EIA report.

iii What is the hierarchical system or

Administrative order of the company

to deal with theenvironmental issues

Detailed in Chapter 8 of EIA report

under 8.2 sections

30

and for ensuring compliance with the

environmental clearance conditions?

Details of this system may be given.

iv Does the company have system of

reporting of non-compliances /

violations of environmentalnorms to

the Board of Directors of the company

and / or shareholders or stakeholders

atlarge? This reporting mechanism

shall be detailed in the EIA report

In case of any non-compliances /

violations relating to Environment,

it will be reported to Environmental

Engineer, Environmental Engineer

shall report to Manager ETP and he

shall report to his higher official

General Manage and then to CEO of

the Industry.

10 Details regarding infrastructure

facilities such as sanitation, fuel,

restroom etc. to be provided to the

labor force during construction as well

as to the casual workers including

truck drivers duringoperation phase.

Detailed in Chapter 4 of EIA report

under 4.6.2 sections.

11 Enterprise Social Commitment (ESC) Detailed in Chapter 9 of EIA report.

i Adequate funds (at least 2.5 % of the

project cost) shall be earmarked

towards the Enterprise Social

Commitment based on Public Hearing

issues and item-wise details along with

time bound action plan shall be

included.Socio-economic development

activities need to be elaborated upon.

As a part of Enterprise Social

Commitment (ESC), the company

has allotted 1780 Lakhs(i. e 5 % of

the project cost) towards Socio-

economic development activities.

12 Any litigation pending against the

project and/or any direction/order

passed by any Court of Lawagainst the

project, if so, details thereof shall also

be included. Has the unit received any

noticeunder the Section 5 of

Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 or

relevant Sections of Air and Water

Acts? If so, details thereof and

compliance/ATR to the notice(s) and

present status of the case.

No there are no litigation pending

against the project and/or any

direction/order passed by any

Court of Law against the project

13 A tabular chart with index for point

wise compliance of above TOR.


under 1.21 section

B. Specific terms of reference for EIA studies for sugar Industry

1 Complete process flow diagram Technology and Process

31

describing each unit, its processes and

operations in production ofsugar, along

with material and energy inputs and

outputs (material and energy balance).

Description, along with flow

diagram and Material balances is

detailed in chapter 2 of EIA report,

under 2.6 sections.

2 Details on water balance including

quantity of effluent generated, recycled

& reused. Effort’stominimize effluent is

charge and to maintain quality of

receiving water body.

Details on water balance including

quantity of effluent generated,

recycled & reused is detailed in

chapter 2 of EIA report, under 2.6

and 2.7 sections

3 Details of effluent treatment plant, inlet

and treated water quality with specific

efficiency of eachtreatment unit in

reduction in respect to fall concerned /

regulated environmental parameters.

Details on effluent treatment plant

and there Specification of effluent

treatment units is detailed chapter 2

of EIA report, under 2.6 and 2.7

sections

4 Numberofworkingdaysof thesugar

productionunit.

The sugar unit will be working for

180 Days, and the Co-gen Power

Plant shall be working for 210 Days

5 Detailsoftheuseofsteamfromtheboiler. Details of the use of steam

generation and utilization along

with steam balance is given under

chapter 2 of EIA report, under 2.6.3

to 2.6.3 section

6 Detailsofproposedsource-

specificpollutioncontrol schemes and

equipment’s to meet the

nationalstandards.


under 2.7 section

7 Collection, storage, handling and

transportation of molasses.

The molasses that is obtained will be

transferred very carefully within the

plant premises and shall be used for

owncaptive for distillery production

for ethanol, an existing steel storage

tanks of 06 No’s, (3 no’s with Dia 20

and Area 628 Sq.m & 03 No’s with

Dia 24 and Area 754 Sq.m) is

available, now we have proposed 01

No of steel tank with Dia 24 and

Area 452 Sq.m. Theexcess molasses

generated will beoutsourced to the

surrounding distillery units, with an

MOU.

8 Collection, storage and handling of Detailed in Chapter 2 of EIA report,

32

bagasse and press mud. under 2.7.4 section

9 Fly ash management plan for coal

based and bagasse and action plan


under 2.7.4 section

10 Details on water quality

parameterssuchas Temperature,

Colour, pH, BOD, COD, Total

KjeldhalNitrogen, Phosphates, Oil &

Grease, Total Suspended Solids, Total

Coli form bacteria etc.


under 3.3.6 section

11 Details on existing ambient air quality

and expected, stack and fugitive

emissions for PM10, PM2.5,SO2*,

NOx*, etc., and evaluation of the

adequacy of the proposed pollution

control devices to meetstandards for

point sources and to meet AAQ

standards. (*-As applicable)


under 3.3.4 section

C Additional TOR

1 Zero Liquid Discharge system plan

shall be submitted.

Both the Domestic and Industrial

effluents fully taken care of making

zero discharge, Water use is

minimized, waste water treated and

recycled to plant and also used for

plantation. Domestic effluent

reasonably low in quantity and is

take to Sugar ETP for treatment.

There is no discharge to any surface

water, or any percolation to

groundwater.

2 A layout plan earmarking space for

development of Green belt of at least 10

m widthalong the periphery of the

plant with three layers of perennial

trees shall be submitted.

At least 33 % of the area shall be

developed as green area with trees.

Trees shall beselected as per CPCB

norms

More than 33 % is allotted for the

Greenery plantation, a three row

plantation all along the boundary of

the factory is maintained, Design

Plantation pattern of the same is

detailed in chapter 10 of EIA report

under 10.2

3 Enterprise Social Commitment (ESC)

plan shall be submitted with at least 5

As a part of Enterprise Social

Commitment (ESC), the company

33

% amountof the project cost. has allotted 1780 Lakhs(5 % of the

project cost) towards Socio-

economic development activities.

4 No ground water shall be used for the

proposed project.

There is no ground water tapping

for the project, majority of the water

requirement is met through water

available in cane, however the

freshwater requirement is met

through river water, for which

permission has been obtained from

Executive Engineer, Karnataka

Nigam Ltd – Biligi for lifting water

from Krishna river.

5 PP shall reduce the water requirement

of the project as proposed. PP shall

submit aplan for reduction in process

water consumption.

Revised Action plan is submitted

after EAC meeting for recycle, reuse

and for reduction in process water

consumption, detailed in Chapter 2

of EIA report, under 2.7.1 section

6 Public hearing has to be conducted as

per the provisions of EIA Notification,

2006

Public hearing was conducted as per

the provisions of EIA Notification,

2006, issues that are raisedis been

anticipated along with budgetary

allocation, which is detailed in

Chapter 7, under Table 7.1 of final

EIA Report.

34

Chapter – 2

Project Description

2.1 Type of Project

NSSKN have proposed for expansion of Sugar Unit and Cogeneration Power Unit

capacity in a fully integrated industry complex at Survey No 90 & 92, Krishnanagar

Village, Hosur Post, Vijayapur Taluk and District, Karnataka State. The project

consists of following units.

1. Existing 6500 TCD Sugar Unit now proposed expansion of its capacity from

6500 TCD to 14000 TCD.

2. Existing bagasse based Cogeneration Power Unit 18.14 MW, now proposed

expansion of its capacity from 18.14 MW to 62.14MW.

3. Existing 50 KLPD molasses based distillery unit.

The proposed project is an integrated sugar industrial complex with facilities to

manufacture white sugar, co-gen power and alcohol. Sugar plant is based on

sugarcane which is an agriculture resource. Co-gen power plant is based mainly on

bagasse as fuel and distillery is based on molasses as raw material. Bagasse and

molasses are the waste or by-products of sugar plant. The project is basically an agro

based rural industry.

2.2 Need for the Project

The main raw material required for manufacture of sugar is sugarcane which is

obtained from agricultural produce existing in the region of the proposed project site.

Sugar is an essential food product for mankind. Bagasse, press mud and molasses are

the by- products of sugar industry. Once thought to be unwanted waste products,

these by-products are now advantageously utilized as a valuable resource for

profitable applications.

Bagasse is used as fuel in the associated co-gen power plant. It is fired in the boiler for

production of high-pressure steam. The steam in turn is used in generation of captive

electric power. The surplus power from the co-gen plant after meeting its captive

needs in the industry will be exported to public power distribution system. The co-

gen power helps to overcome power shortage in the state. The bagasse is obtained

from renewable source and is a substitute to fossil fuels such as coal or petroleum.

Since the location of sugar mills are decentralized, the co-gen power plants become

decentralized bio-mass based power station.

Molasses is a raw material for production of ethyl alcohol which gains importance for

its use as fuel in admixture with petrol, as a main ingredient in beverages and as a

starting raw material for various organic chemicals. Molasses is a renewable resource

35

and dispense the use of petroleum for fuel and organic chemicals. Alcohol has

assumed very important place in the country’s economy. It is vital raw material for a

number of chemicals. It has been a source of large amount of revenue by way of

Excise Duty levied by State Government. Ethanol has a potentiality as fuel in the form

of “power alcohol” for blending with petrol in the ratio of 10:90. This trend is

continuing and will continue in view of the fact that potable liquor has larger revenue

generating potential for the Governments. The demand for alcohol will always be

there for industrial purposes. Further the use of alcohol in automobile fuel will

enhance the demand for alcohol. Other than the above mentioned major requirement,

alcohol is also being used in the production of many downstream chemicals including

drugs, polymers, plastic, etc.

Press mud contains organic and inorganic plant nutrients and therefore it is used as it

is or after composting as a bio-manure in agriculture.

The industry will be established in the rural, backward region of the State and has a

good scope for development of sugarcane with suitable climatic conditions and

assured source of underground and surface water. At present there are no sugar

industries in the region. Sugarcane cultivated in the region is presently transported

through 30 - 60 km and supplied to existing factories in Vijayapur, Belagavi or

Bagalkot district. As compared to other crops sugarcane cultivation gives higher

economical returns to the farmers. There is good potential to develop more than

20,000 hectares of sugarcane land in about 20 km distance from the proposed site.

Hence, with the proposed industry more agricultural land would be brought under

sugarcane cultivation and it benefits the farmers and the local region. The

establishment of the integrated sugar industry will thus meet the national interest of

economical power and food through sustainable development. Further it helps to

uplift the rural mass. Sugar cultivation gives higher economical returns to the

farmers.

The Government of Karnataka envisaged the policy to encourage integrated sugar

industries consisting of sugar, co-gen power and molasses based alcohol in the State

with various incentives including power purchase agreement. In the year 2015 - 2016,

the Agriculture Department had set a target of bringing 29,405 Acre additional land

for cultivation. Out of this sugarcane cultivation in 18,125 Acre are in Vijayapur &

11,280 Acre in Bagalkot.

The integrated sugar industry with sugar and alcohol as main products along with

exportable power and bio-manure as co-products has proved to be an economical

proposal. The establishment of the integrated sugar industry will thus meet the

national interest of economical power and food. Further it helps to uplift the rural

mass. The total direct employment potential of the proposed industry is about 150

people for the expansion alone. However, with the commencement of operation, this

36

industry will create direct and indirect employment opportunities to more than 2,000

persons in terms of factory employment, transportation, vehicle maintenance, petty

shops etc. in addition to about 2,000 workers in harvesting and other sugarcane

cultivation work.

2.3 Location of the Project

2.3.1 General Location

The industry is proposed to be located at Survey No 90 & 92, Krishnanagar Village,

Hosur Post, Vijayapur Taluk and District, Karnataka State. The site is located adjacent

to State Highway (SH 55) at west, the district headquarters is Vijayapur. the nearest

railway station is Basavana Bagevadi station which is 55 Kms towards East, nearest

City is Bagalkot and Vijayapur at a distance of 36 Kms South and 48 Kms North.

Nearest Airports are Hubli Airport at 130 Km Southwest & Belgaum Airport at 120

Km Southwest. The location features of site are given in Table 2.1. Google map of the

site is given in Figure 2.1 and 2.2. Project site layout plan and factory layout plan is

given under Figure 2.3 and 2.4 and also enclosed as Annexure-16. The latest project

site photograph of the existing industry and proposed area is enclosed as Annexure-

15

The area has dry tropical climate with hot summer and cold winter with scanty

rainfall. The surrounding area of the project site is rural agrarian. The maximum

recorded rainfall in the year 2011 was 73.3 mm in the month of September. River

Krishna, the perennial river flowing from West to East is located at a distance of about

1.5 kms from the site Rainwater streams are present in the region and they carry water

only during rainy days. The region is nearly a plain land sloping south towards river

Krishna. There are no hillocks or valleys in the region. There are no eco-sensitive

locations such as national park, wild life sanctuary, bio-sphere reserve or any

Archaeological Places in the vicinity of the proposed project site.

The site and its vicinity are generally barren with small patches of agricultural lands

growing rain fed crops such as jower, maize and groundnut. Few patches of

agricultural lands cultivated through lift irrigation also exist in the region. The site

and the surrounding region are devoid of forest or major trees except scanty bushes

and shrubs. Greenery is observed only on the banks of the river and streams.

Table 2.1: Location features of the project site

Sl. No.

Feature Particulars

1. Name of the Industry M/s Nandi Sahakari Sakkare Karkhane Niyamit

2. Location of the Industry Survey Nos. 90,92, Krishnanagar village, Hosur Post, Vijayapur Taluk and District, Karnataka State

37

3. Latitude / Longitude

Altitude

75O 28’ 46.05” East and 16O 27’ 00” North

537 m above MSL

4. Project site co-ordinates Direction Latitude Longitude

A 16O 27’ 45.96” 75O 28’ 6.34”

B 16O 27’ 43.66” 75O 28’ 12.26”

C 16O 26’ 56.73” 75O 28’ 15.00”

D 16O 26’ 51.65” 75O 28’ 30.20”

E 16O 27’ 48.46” 75O 28’ 45.52”

F 16O 27’ 10.81” 75O 28’ 44.29”

G 16O 27’ 11.34” 75O 28’ 34.10”

H 16O 27’ 24.68” 75O 28’ 34.30”

I 16O 27’ 26.50” 75O 28’ 27.37”

J 16O 27’ 12.46” 75O 28’ 28.75”

K 16O 27’ 13.63” 75O 28’ 10.04”

L 16O 27’ 58.49” 75O 28’ 6.74”

5. Toposheet 47 P/6, 47 P/7, 47 P/10, 47 P/11

6. Present use of land The Factory Site (Existing) is an industrial converted land surrounded by rain fed agriculture lands.

7. Daily average temp. in °C Min: 14.7 o C- 16.1o C during January.

Max. 31.8o C- 39.9oC during May

8. Relative humidity 72.8 %

9. Annual rain fall in mm 400 to 700 (Average 620.44mm)

10. Predominant wind & direction 3.98 m/s, predominantly from East to West.

11. Soil type Majority of the soil are Black soils, Red sandy soils and mixed soils , found in the region which are suitable for the cultivation of sugarcane crop.

12. Topography Moderately undulated topography with small hillocks.

13. Nearest highway SH 55 (W)

14. Nearest Railway station Basavana Bagevadi station - 55 KM (E)

15. Nearest Airport Belagavi - 120 KM (SW) &

Hubli - 130 Kms (SW)

16.

Nearest village Name of the village Distance & Direction

Hosur 2.2 (SE)

Girgaon 5.5 (E)

Sutagundi 2.3 (NE)

Shirabur 2.4 (N)

Chickhanchinal 6.0 (NW)

Chowdapur 5.2 (W)

Chikka-Galagali 3.9 (SW)

38

Jambagi 2.3 (S)

17. Nearest City Bagalkot - 36 Km (S) Vijayapura ( Bijapur) - 48 KM (N)

Nearest industry Name of the Industry Distance & Direction

Pabhulingeshwara

Sugars and Chemicals

Ltd, siddapur,

Jamakhandi

27 (NW)

Nirani Sugars Ltd, Kulali

Cross ,Mudhol

31 (SW)

Bilagi Sugar Mill Ltd.,

Badagandi, Bilagi.

36 (SE )

Jamakhandi Sugars Ltd,

Hirepadasalagi,

Jamakhandi

36 (NW)

18. Basaveshwar Sugars

Ltd., Karajol, Vijayapur

Road.

37 (N)

19. Nearest water body Krishna River– 1.5 Km (E); Flows from West to

East.

20. Environmentally sensitive locations such as Archaeological structures, Historical places, Protected forests, Sanctuaries, and Sensitive bio-spheres

None within 10 Kms

21. Seismic characteristics Seismic Zone-II as per Indian Seismological

Institute (relatively safe region)

39

Figure 2.1: Map showing project site location

Figure 2.2: Map showing project site location with 10 Kms Radius

A B

D C

E

F G

H

J

L

I

K

40

Figure 2.3: Project site layout Plan for 240 Acre

41

Figure 2.4: Factory layout Plan

42

2.3.2 Basis for Selecting the Site

The selection of site location for the industry depends mainly on the availability of

resources such as raw materials, fuel, power, water, manpower, connectivity for

transportation of man and materials, market for the product and more importantly

environmental compatibility and sustainability. The proposed expansion of sugar & co-

generation complex shall come up in an area available with the company. The area of 10

kms radius around the proposed project site is free from ecologically sensitive areas. The

choice of the land confers several advantages, which are summarized below.

1. The site is well connected by roadways SH 55 being adjacent to the site.

2. Water requirement is proposed to be met by Krishna river (Almatti dam) for which

permission has been obtained.

3. The main raw material viz. sugarcane is locally cultivated in that area. The location

has good scope for development of sugarcane with suitable climatic conditions and

assured source of underground and surface water. The entire project area is blessed

with adequate irrigation potential by virtue of location Almatti dam which is at a

distance of 20 km from the project site in the Eastern direction. Apart from this the

area has a good groundwater potential and its helps for bore-well irrigation at

farmers land. Also sugar cultivation gives higher economical returns to the farmers.

There is potential to develop 18,125 Acre are in Vijayapur & 11,280 Acre in

Bagalkot.

4. Vijayapur is located at a distance of 48 kms towards the northern direction. Nearest

railway station to the site is Basavana Bagevadi station located at a distance of 55

kms from the site towards eastern direction.

5. Exportable power will be stepped up to 110 kV (Power export: 46.14 MW (season &

Off-Season), sent to KPTCL sub-station at Shirabur, Vijayapur Taluk and District

located 4 kms away from the plant.

6. No incidence of cyclones, earthquake, floods or landslides in the region has been

reported.

7. There are no eco-sensitive locations such as national park, wild life sanctuary, bio-

sphere reserve within 10 km radius around the proposed project site.

2.4 Size and /Magnitude of Operation

The industry NSSKN is a large scale industrial unit with a Total capital investment on

expansion project will be Rs 35,500 Lakhs and the investment on Environmental

43

management plan will be Rs 500 Lakhs, Recurring cost on EMP will be about 75 Lakhs per

year.

2.4.1 Land Requirement

The land requirement for different applications for the proposed industry consisting of

sugar, power and distillery units are given in Table 2.2.

Table 2.2: Land utilization

Application of land Land Utilization, Acres

Present After expansion

Sugar Plant & Co-gen Plant 13.53 19.99

Distillery Plant Area 4.23 4.23

General Building 13.5 13.5

Green Belt Area 84 84

Open Vacant land for future use 124.74 118.28

Total land area 240 240

2.4.2 Manpower

A total of 697 employees including office staff, skilled & unskilled workers and contract

laborers are required to run the industry consisting of sugar, power and distillery units.

Out of 697 people, 627 employees are for co-gen sugar unit and 70 employees for distillery

unit. Additional Manpower requirement during operation to the industry after expansion

programme will be 150 no’s and during construction will be 200 no’s. Skilled and

unskilled laborers and supervisory staff are available within the vicinity of the industry.

Senior staffs experienced in co-gen sugar industry and distillery are available within the

state. The details of employees strength required in different departments are tabulated

below:

Sl. No. Department Permanent Seasonal Total

1 Admin 57 10 67

2 CDO 89 33 122

3 Civil 8 8 16

4 Engineering 141 34 175

5 Manufacturing 24 87 111

6 Store 18 5 23

7 Time office 7 1 8

8 Vehicle 7 17 24

9 Co-gen 70 11 81

10 Distillery 50 20 70

Grand Total 697

44

The company has a policy of providing residential accommodation on-site for the essential

employees.

2.4.3 Housing Facilities

NSKKN have already provided full-fledged quarters consisting 117 houses for the benefit

of the employees in an area consisting of 2.0 Ha, the housing colonies are located with a

distance of 0.5 Kms away from the factory premises.

These quarters will be provided with all the civic amenities.

No. of residential quarters : 117

Persons residing in quarters : 468

Residential facilities are provided only to the essential workers and staff, which includes

necessary infrastructure facilities such as primary health centers, schools, play gardens,

temple, auditorium, and metaled roads etc.

A full-fledged water supply and drainage system is already in place and waste water

generated from the quarters is treated in septic tank followed by soak pits. Most of the

workers come from nearby villages. However no Additional quarters are proposed for the

new expansion.

2.4.4 Civil Works during Construction Phase

1. Building & other construction: sugar plant, boiler house, turbine house, sugar

godowns and cooling tower.

2. Above ground building / structures: 6 to 25 m height for buildings/structures.

3. Excavations: 1 to 3 m excavations for foundations of machinery such as turbine,

mills and for water storage tanks.

4. Stack height: 65 m and 77 m for boilers & 8 m & 7 m for DGs are required in the

project.

5. Constructed floor area of buildings & other structures: 24,000 m2.

6. Construction material

Size stones : 19,800T

Sand : 51,000 T

Boulders : 1770 m3

Bricks : 20,400 T

Cement : 30,000 T

Steel : 12,000 T

45

2.4.5 Production and Related Activities during Operation

1. 14000 T/d sugarcane crushing to produce white sugar

2. Co-gen power plant with 105 TPH & 240 TPH boilers.

3. Power export: 46.14 MW during season & off season.

4. 50 KLPD molasses based existing distillery with 24 T/hr boilers and 2.5 MW

captive T.G.

5. Water treatment plant of 25 m3/hr capacity

6. Effluent Treatment plant of 1500 m3/d capacity

2.4.6 Resources Consumed

Co-gen Sugar:

Sl.

No.

Item Units Quantity Storage

facility

Transportation

Before After

Expansion

1 Raw Material

Sugarcane T/d 6500 14000 Cane yard Lorry, tractors

& bullock carts

2 Consumable chemicals

Lime T/d 13 28 Go-down Lorry

Sulphur T/d 3.2 7 Go-down

Caustic Soda

Flakes

T/d 0.25 0.5 Go-down Lorry

Sodium Hydro

Sulphate

T/d 0.02 0.04 50 kg

Carboys

Lorry

Bleaching Power T/d 0.008 0.018 Go-down Lorry

Boiler chemicals Kgs/d 0.008 0.018 Go-down Lorry

3 Oil, grease and

oil coolant

Kl/month 14 28 200 kg

drums

Lorry

4 Product, Sugar T/d 780 1680 Go-down,

50 kg bags

Lorry

5 By products

Bagasse, 50%

moisture

T/d 1950 4200 Yard Belt conveyor

Press mud, 75 %

moisture

T/d 260 560 Yard Tractors

46

Molasses, 20 %

moisture

T/d 292.5 630 M.S. tank Lorry tanker

Distillery:

Sl. No. Item Quantity, T/d Storage facility Transportation

1 Raw Material

Molasses 200 MS Tank Lorry tanker/ Pipe line

2 Nutrients/Consumables

DAP 20 KG 50 Kg Bags Lorry

Urea 40 KG 50 Kg Bags Lorry

Antifoam oil 100 Ltr 50 Kg Bags Lorry

3 Product/ By-product

Alcohol, KL/d 50000 ENA (RS/ENA)

MS/SS Tank Lorry tanker

Yeast sludge, dry 03-04 TON /D (Dry)

- Tractor

Boiler ash 40 T/d

Constructed Yard

Tractor

2.4.7 Sugarcane Cultivation Area

Sugarcane cultivation area is about 15,000 hectares spread in about 30 km distance from

the site.

2.4.8 Transportation

1. Personnel.

During construction period a maximum of about 200 people will be visiting the industry

including, construction works, suppliers of material and related activities. They use

company vehicle facilities, public transportation and own vehicles. Total of about 24

buses/cars and about 60 two-wheelers will be used for transportation of personnel.

Temporary sheds will be provided for accommodation of these workers during

construction period.

During operation phase a maximum of about 847 people (After expansion) are expected in

the industry including employees, farmers and other visitors. A total of about 157

buses/cars and two wheelers will be used for transportation of personnel.

47

2. Material

Maximum construction material transported per day will be about 60 loads gravel, 60

loads sand, 60 loads boulders/jelly/bricks and 3 load steel in addition to about 7 loads of

plant machinery.

During operation, a maximum of about 976 per day of lorry/tankers/tractor/carts are

moving to the industry to carry raw material sugarcane, products sugar, bio-manure,

alcohol and other material. In addition, about 10 lorries/tractors will be working in the

industry for internal movement of material.

2.4.9 Bulk Storage Facilities

Existing Bagasse Yard – 6000 Sq. m (100m x 60 m)

Proposed Bagasse Yard – 6000 Sq. m (100m x 60 m)

Lime and Sulphure go down – 300 Sq. m (12 m x 20 m)

Press mud – 600 T and

Boiler ash- 80 T

Sugars go down for storage:

- Existing 04 No’s 7744 Sq. m (88 m x 22 m).

- Existing 03 No’s 5280 Sq. m (88m x 20 m).

- Proposed 01 No’s 3872 Sq. m (88 x 44m )

Molasses storage tanks :

- Existing 06 No’s, (3 no’s with Dia 20 and Area 628 Sq.m & 02 No’s with Dia 24

and Area 754 Sq.m).

- Proposed 01 No’s with Dia 24 and Area 452 Sq.m

Water reservoir – 9000 m3/d capacity ( 3 reservoirs )

2.4.10 Waste Generation

Liquid, gaseous and solid wastes generated from co-gen sugar units and Distillery is listed

below. Management of these wastes is discussed in later chapters.

48

Co-Gen Sugar Unit:

1. Wastewater

Domestic wastewater

Industrial wastewater

Excess condensate water

2. Gaseous emissions

Boiler flue gases

Smoke from diesel generator

Fugitive emissions

3. Solid wastes

Bagasse

Press mud

Molasses

Boiler ash

Lime sludge

2.4.11 Project Investment

Sl.no. Particulars Amount, Rs. in Lakhs

1 Land 00.00

2 Buildings & civil works 992

3 Plant and machinery 30,979

4 Environmental management 500

5 Interest & finance charges 1,995

6 Miscellaneous fixed assets 958

7 Preliminary expenses 76

Total Project Cost 35,500

2.4.12 Employment Generation due to the Project

The existing manpower in the industry is 697 no’s (Sugar Co-Gen and Distillery), 627 no’s

all alone for Sugar Co-Gen. The additional direct man power to the industry after

expansion programme will be 150 no’s. However, the commencement of this industry will

create direct and indirect employment opportunities to more than 2,000 people in terms of

factory employment, transportation, vehicle maintenance, petty shops etc. In addition,

about 2,000 workers will be indirectly benefitted through harvesting and other sugarcane

cultivation work.

Distillery Unit:

1. Wastewater

Spent wash

Spent Lee

2. Gaseous emissions

Boiler flue gases

Smoke form diesel

generator.

Fermenter emissions.

3. Solid wastes

Yeast sludge.

Boiler ash.

49

2.5 Schedules for Approval and Implementation of the Project

Sl. No. Project activity Proposed time

1 Submission of EC application to SEIAA, Karnataka. November 2016

2 TOR deliberations and approval of scoping and ToR for

EIA studies from SEIAA, Karnataka December 2016

3 Conduct of EIA studies and preparation of Draft EIA as

per the recommendations that was made by State (SEAC) December 2016

4 Submission of EC application to MoEF, New Delhi. February 2017

5 TOR deliberations and approval of scoping and ToR for

EIA studies from MOEF GOI New Delhi July 2017

6 Conduct of public hearing September 2017

7 Expected for Submission of final EIA report and Public

hearing proceedings to MOEF GOI New Delhi October 2017

8 Expected EIA deliberations and grant of EC December 2017

9 Expected for Submission of CFE application to KSPCB

Bengaluru January 2018

10 Expected for Deliberation of the proposal and grant of

CFE to the industry. March 2018

11 Expected for Commencement of proposed project

construction May 2018

12 Expected for Completion of project construction and

submission of CFO application to KSPCB Bengaluru September 2018

13 Expected for Grant of CFO from KSPCB and the

Commencement of commissioning and production October 2018

2.6 Technology and Process Description

The proposed integrated sugar industrial complex consists of following associated

manufacturing units.

Sl. No. Units Existing Capacity

Addition Capacity

After expansion Capacity

1 Sugar unit 6500 TCD 7500 TCD 14000 TCD

2 Co-gen power generation 18.14 MW 44 MW 62.14 MW

3 Distillery 50KLPD No change No Change

50

2.6.1.1 Manufacturing Process for Co-Gen Sugar Unit

Sugarcane is the raw material for manufacture of sugar. Juice is extracted from sugarcane,

which is then processed to recover sugar. Bagasse, which is the left out fiber material after

extraction of juice from sugarcane, is used as fuel in boiler to produce steam. Steam is

used in sugar plant for evaporation of juice to recover sugar and in power plant for

generation of captive electric power. A flow diagram for production of sugar and a process

flow chart with material balance are given in Figure 2.5 and Figure 2.6, respectively.

Process Flow Chart for Co Gen Power Plant is given under Figure 2.7 and Process Flow

Chart for Distillery unit is given under Figure 2.8 Operating parameters of co-gen sugar

unit are given Table 2.3, Generation & utilization of power are given under Table 2.4 . A

brief description of the process is given below:

i. Crushing of sugarcane:

Sugarcane is harvested in the fields, dressed and bundled in small bundles, stacked in

Lorries, tractor trailers or bullock carts, supplied to factories weighed and crushed in a set

of mills. Crushing takes place mainly in two stages: first the preparation and then milling.

Sugarcane is prepared by passing through leveller, cutter and fibrizer. The prepared cane

is then crushed by passing through 4 sets of mills. Hot water is added in the course of

crushing as imbibitions water for better extraction of juice from sugarcane. After crushing,

the bagasse is sent to boiler as fuel and juice is sent for purification and recovery of sugar.

ii. Juice clarification and concentration:

The weighed quantity of juice is primarily heated to 70 0 C - 75 0 C in juice heaters. It

undergoes a process of lime treatment and sulphitation with the addition of lime and

sulphur dioxide, respectively. The juice is heated again to 105 0C in another set of juice

heaters. The hot juice with 15 % solids is decanted out from the clarifier and sent for

evaporation in a set of multiple effect evaporator bodies. In the evaporators the juice is

concentrated into syrup of 60 % solids. Sludge from clarifier is filtered to separate solid

impurities as press mud.

iii. Crystallization:

The syrup from evaporators is taken to pans for boiling where the syrup concentrates and

attains super saturation stage. In such a condition sugar grains are formed in the syrup.

The syrup mass with sugar particles is called massecuite. The massecuite is dropped in

crystallisers and cooled to complete the crystallization.

51

iv. Centrifuge:

Massecuite is taken into the high speed centrifuge. Sugar crystals are separated form

mother liquor in the centrifuge. Non crystallisable matter from the syrup, called molasses,

is drained out from the centrifuge. The molasses is weighed and sent to storage tank. The

wet sugar from centrifuge is sent to driers.

v. Drying, grading and bagging:

Sugar is dried in the vibrating tray drier and graded by passing though standard sieves.

The graded sugar is bagged, weighed, stitched, numbered and stacked in sugar godown.

vi. Steam generation:

The industry shall be provided with a high pressure boiler with a capacity 105 T/hr at 67

kg/cm2 pressure and 510 oC temperature and now proposed an additional boiler of

capacity 240 TPH at 87 kg/cm2 pressure and 510 oC. Steam is required for both power and

sugar plants. The boiler is designed to operate on bagasse, agro waste based bio mass and

coal. Bagasse is available from sugar plant as captive source. The flue gas from the boiler is

passed through ESP to free it from suspended particles and then vented through a stack of

adequate height. The boiler ash is quenched and is sent to bin through belt conveyor.

Bagasse from mills or storage yard is sent to boiler through mechanical conveyor. Process

Flow Chart for Co Gen Power Plant is shown under Figure 2.7

vii Electro Static Precipitator:

The boiler is equipped with high efficiency three fields Electro Static Precipitator, which

removes the suspended particles and ash particles from the flue gas. The efficiency of the

precipitator is around 99.0% and the dust concentration at the outlet of the ESP will be less

than 50.0 mg/Nm³.

viii Chimney:

A chimney of 65 m height is constructed to dissipate the flue gas and this height has been

considered taking only bagasse into account. An Addition of Chimney with 77 m height is

proposed for the expansion.

xi Electricity generation:

The high pressure steam from the boiler is passed through the double extraction cum

condensing type of turbine to generate 62.14 MW. The turbine is run by the high pressure

steam which in turn rotates alternator. The electric power produced is used to meet the

captive power requirement of the sugar industry and co-gen plant. Surplus power from

the industry is exported to power grid through distribution grid. Exportable power will be

52

stepped up to 110 kV (Power export: 46.14 MW (season & Off-Season), sent to KPTCL sub-

station at Shirabur, Vijayapur Taluk and District located 4 kms away from the plant. The

steam extracted at reduced pressure from turbine is used in sugar plant to meet its process

requirement.

The boiler and the turbo generator scheme meets the entire Sugar process steam and the

power requirement for the both Sugar & Cogen plants and results in surplus power for

export to Power Grid. Energy efficiency and the export of power to the grid are made

possible by the employment of high pressure and high temperature steam cycles.

53

Figure 2.5: Flow diagram of sugar manufacturing process

L.P. STEAM

H.P. STEAM

EVAPORATION

CANE

MILLING

MIXED JU ICE

JUICE HEATING

REACTION TANK

JUICE HEATING

BAGASSE BOILER

TURBINE

POWER

HOT WATER

CLARIFIER

MILK OF LIME

MUDDY JUICE

VACUUM FILTER

FILTER CAKE

STORAGE YARD

SYRUP

‘A’ PAN BOILING

‘A’ SUGAR A. H. MOLASSES

‘B’ PAN BOILING ‘B’ MOLASSES

‘C’ PAN BOILING FINAL MOLASSES

‘C’ SUGAR

‘B’ SUGAR

SUGAR WAREHOUSE

SO2

STORAGE TANK

54

Figure 2.6: Process flow chart with material balance for co-gen sugar unit

Sugar-1680

55

Figure 2.7: Process Flow Chart for Co Gen Power Plant

Steam

46.14 MW

(During Sugar Season)

(During Sugar

Season) Sugar: 10.0 MW

Co-gen: 6 MW

LP/HP Steam for Co-

gen Plant internal

operations

Steam

Steam Condensate

D.M. Plant DM Water

EXPORT TO

POWER GRID

IN-HOUSE

CONSUMPTION

62.14 MW - Cogeneration Power Scheme

ESP

CHIMNEY

Flue

Gas

62.14 MW/Hr

Turbine with

Alternator

Steam for Sugar Plant

BOILER FUELS

1. Prime Fuel – Bagasse (During Sugar Season) Bagasse (During Sugar Off-Season

based on Availability)

Raw Water

POWER

MULTI FUEL

BOILERS of

105 TPH & 240

TPH

56.14 MW

(During Off Season)

(During Off Season)

Co-gen: 6 MW

56

2.6.1.2 Manufacturing Process for Distillery Unit

Rectified Spirit production in the plant is based on continuous Fermentation Technology

with yeast recycle using yeast separators.

Production of Rectified spirit is mainly carried under the following three steps. Figure

provides the process flow diagram of Rectified Spirit production.

1. Dilution - Preparation of molasses for fermentation

2. Fermentation - Production of alcohol from fermentable sugars in molasses

solution

3. Distillation - Product Recovery

Each of the above steps of production is detailed below: Dilution Molasses available from sugar mills contains solid content between 76 - 90 % and sugar

content varies between 45 and 50 %.

The main dilution operation occurs in a diluter where the solid concentration is brought

down to 20 to 25o Brix. The bulk of this diluted molasses is fed to the fermentation tank

while a small quantity is further diluted to 10 – 15o Brix and used for preparation of the

final yeast inoculum. Propagation of yeast for the final inoculation is done in successive

stages in volumes of 10, 100, 1000 and 10,000 litres where in each stage 10 parts of diluted

molasses is inoculated with 1 part yeast culture.

Fermentation

Fermentation in the fermentation tank continues for about 15 to 20 hours after the final

inoculum is added to it. The basic reaction in the fermentation process is

C6H12O6 ----- 2 C2H5OH + 2 CO2 + 26 calories

Glucose Ethyl Alcohol + Carbon dioxide + Energy

Yeast Propagation

Yeast seed material is prepared in water-cooled yeast vessels by inoculating molasses with yeast. The contents of the yeast vessel are then transferred to the yeast activation vessel. The purpose of aerated yeast activation vessel is to allow time for the yeast cell multiplication.

57

Fermentation:

The purpose of fermentation is to convert the fermentable sugars into alcohol. During Fermentation, sugars are broken down into alcohol and Carbon dioxide. Significant heat release takes place during fermentation. Fermentation temperature is maintained at optimum level by forced recirculation heat exchangers. At the end of fermentation, the wash is fed through a yeast separator where the yeast cream is separated, acidified in the yeast treatment tank and returned to the yeast activation vessel for activation. Sludge is separated in a sludge decanter. The clear wash from both the yeast separator and sludge separator flows to the clarified wash tank. The wash is then pumped to distillation.

Distillation: Fermented wash is preheated in fermented wash preheater and fed to the analyzer column. The dilute alcohol water vapours from the analyzer top are fed to the Pre-Rectification column. An impure spirit draw of 3 % is drawn from this column. Bottom liquid from Pre-Rectified column is fed to the IS purification column. Draw from IS purification column is fed to purified column. The purification column is operated under atmospheric pressure and is heated by using steam. The bottom of this column is maintained at 20%v/v alcohol and is fed to the rectification/ Exhaust column. A small draw from the top of the column is fed to the IS Purification column. The purified rectified spirit is removed from the bottom of the purified column. The Lees from the Exhaust column bottom is used to pre heat the heat from the purified bottom to the Rectifier/ Dilution water. Lower side draws streams are taken from Rectified column to avoid fusel oil build up in the column. These streams are then taken to the IS Purification column.

58

Figure 2.8: Process Flow Distillery Unit

Table 2.3: Operation parameters of co-gen sugar industry

Parameter Season and ( Off-season based on Bagasse availability )

Boiler Capacity Parameter 105 T/h

of steam

240 T/h of

steam Total

Fuel Characteristics

Fuel Bagasse

GCV Kcal/kg 2270

Ash contact 2.0 %

59

Steam / fuel ratio 2.4 T/T

Sulphur content 0.01 %

Fuel utilization ( Season and off- season) 1050 T/d 2400 T/d 3450 T/d

Ash from Boiler 21 T/d 48 T/d 69 T/d

Table 2.4: Generation & utilization of power

Power Particulars Season and ( Off-season based on Bagasse availability )

Existing Addition Total

Stem generation at Boiler

105 TPH, 67 ATA ,

510 oC

240 TPH,87 ATA ,

510 oC --

Power Generation 18.14 MW 44 MW 62.14 MW

In house

power

utilization

Sugar 4 MW 6 MW 10 MW

Co-Gen 2 MW 4 MW 6 MW

Power Export 12.14 MW 34 MW 46.14 MW

2.6.2 Raw Materials and Products

The main raw material required for manufacture of sugar is sugarcane, which is obtained

from agricultural source existing in the region of the factory. Chemicals such as lime,

phosphoric acid etc. are used in the process for purification of sugarcane juice. Common

salt, hydrochloric acid and caustic soda are used in water treatment plant. Lubricating oil

and grease are also used as consumables in the industry. Chemicals and consumables are

locally available in the country. The details of raw materials and products are given in

Table 2.5.

Sugar is the main product in the industry. However, bagasse, molasses and press mud are

also produced as by-products in the process. Bagasse is used as fuel in the boiler for

production of high-pressure steam, which in turn is used in generation of captive electric

power. Major part of the bagasse produced in the industry is consumed as fuel in the

boiler. Other products viz., press mud and molasses, which once thought to be waste

products, are now advantageously utilized for profitable applications. Press mud is used

as manure in agriculture. Molasses is used as raw material for manufacture of ethanol and

other products.

60

Table 2.5 (a): Raw materials and products for co-gen sugar unit

Sl.

No.

Item Units Quantity Storage

facility

Transportation

Before After

Expansion

1 Raw Material

Sugarcane T/d 6500 14000 Cane yard Lorry, tractors

& bullock carts

2 Consumable chemicals

Lime T/d 13 28 Go-down Lorry

Sulphur T/d 3.2 7 Go-down

Caustic Soda

Flakes


Sodium Hydro

Sulphate

T/d 0.02 0.04 50 kg

Carboys

Lorry

Bleaching

Power


Boiler

chemicals

Kgs/d 0.008 0.018 Go-down Lorry

3 Oil, grease

and oil coolant

Kl/month 14 28 200 kg

drums

Lorry

4 Product, Sugar T/d 780 1680 Go-down,

50 kg bags

Lorry

5 By products

Bagasse, 50%

moisture

T/d 1950 4200 Yard Belt conveyor

Press mud, 75

% moisture

T/d 260 560 Yard Tractors

Molasses, 20 %

moisture

T/d 292.5 630 M.S. tank Lorry tanker

Table 2.5 (b): Raw materials and products for Distillery unit

Sl. No. Item Quantity, T/d Storage facility Transportation

1 Raw Material

Molasses 200 MS Tank Lorry tanker/

Pipe line

2 Nutrients/Consumables

DAP 20 KG 50 Kg Bags Lorry

61

Urea 40 KG 50 Kg Bags Lorry

Antifoam oil 100 Ltr 50 Kg Bags Lorry

3 Product/ By-product

Alcohol, KL/d 50000 ENA

(RS/ENA) MS/SS Tank Lorry tanker

Yeast sludge, dry 03-04 TON

/D (Dry) - Tractor

Boiler ash 40 T/d

Constructed

Yard Tractor

2.6.3 Power and Steam Requirement

1. Co-gen sugar unit

Total power requirement after expansion for the units will be 16.0 MW during crushing

season and 6.0 MW during off season. A high pressure boiler of 105 T/hr and 240 T/hr

will be provided to meet the steam requirement of co-gen power plant and sugar plant.

Co-gen power is supplied through a T.G. set of 18.14 MW and 44 MW capacities.

Power generation process is based on Rankin steam cycle. The steam generated in the

boiler when expanded through a turbine, turns the turbine shaft which is tandem coupled

to an electric power generator.

The exhaust steam coming out of the turbine is used for process (heating the juice heaters,

evaporators and pans) below figure 2.9 (a) and (b) gives the steam balance during season

and off-season.

62

Figure 2.9 (a): Steam Balance during Season for proposed Boiler

63

Figure 2.9 (b): Steam Balance during Off - Season for proposed Boiler

64

2. Diesel generator

To meet the emergency requirement of power during power failure, two diesel

generators of 1,250 kVA & 500 kVA is provided for existing Sugar-Cogen and Distillery

units, additionally a 1,250 kVA will be provided in the co-gen sugar unit. Diesel

generators will be used to run essential services only during the emergency of power

failure from the regular source. Gen set will be utilized for a maximum period of about

30 hours per month.

3. HESCOM Power

The industry has permission to draw 1500 KVA from HESCOM source. During shortage

or non-availability of power supply from captive power plant source, the power will be

drawn from HESCOM Power source. The industry has provided power receiving station

and transmitter to receive the power.

2.6.4 Source and Utilization of Water

Fresh water requirement to the industry will be met from the Krishna river/Almatti

reservoir, intake wells located is at a distance of 3.5 km from the site. The industry has

obtained permission for drawl of water from Krishna river/Almatti reservoir.

(Permission has taken from Executive Engineer, Karnataka Nigam Ltd – Biligi for lifting

water from Krishna River., Permission letter enclosed as Annexure- 8) Sugarcane utilized

as raw material in the sugar unit contains 70% of its weight as water. The water will be

recovered by evaporation of juice and reused in the process. The quantity of fresh water

is given in Table 2.6.

Table 2.6: Source and quantity of Fresh water, m3/d

Sl. No Utilization Fresh water Input from Krishna

river/Almatti reservoir

Existing After expansion

1 Domestic use 50 80

2 Laboratory 2 2

3 Water Treatment Plant 246 650

4

Process

Cooling & Spraying

Floor washing

352 400

Total 650 1132

65

2.6.5 Utilization of water in co-gen sugar unit

I. Water recovered from sugarcane

Sugarcane contains about 70% water. Sugarcane is crushed in mills to separate the juice

from bagasse). Juice is clarified and the impurities present in it are separated with the

filter cake (press mud). Clarified juice is evaporated and the vapours generated are

condensed. The vapour condensate is utilized in sugar plant to meet its process water

requirement. Fresh water requirement in the industry is therefore considerably reduced.

The quantitative details of water present in cane and its distribution (utilization) in the

system is given below.

Water in cane 70% on cane

Water loss with bagasse 15% on cane

Imbibition water added 30% on cane

Water vapour loss at mill 1% on cane

Water in raw juice 84% on cane

Filter wash water added 3.5% on cane

Lime water added 2.0% on cane

Water added with filter aid 3.5% on cane

Water vapour loss at clarifier 1% on cane

Water in clear juice 83.75% on cane

Water loss with press mud 3% on cane

Water loss with molasses 1% on cane

Water vapour loss at crystallizer & centrifuge 1% on cane

Water evaporated from juice and recovered as

vapour condensate 72.83 % on cane

The water present in cane juice is vaporized in evaporators and pans. At 70 % on cane,

for the sugar unit of 14000 TCD the water evaporated in the process amounts to 1280

m3/d. The vapours generated from evaporators and pans are condensed in evaporator

jackets, pan jackets and juice heaters. The condensate water thus generated is collected

and utilized to meet the process water requirement in the plant such as imbibition in

mill, washing in vacuum filter, pump gland cooling etc. Excess condensate will be let out

on land for irrigation. The quality of excess condensate water is given in Table 2.7.

66

Table 2.7: Characteristics of vapour condensate water

Parameters Value

Temperature 0C 40

pH 7.2

Dissolved solids, ppm 640

Suspended solids, ppm 60

BOD, ppm 80

COD, ppm 190

Oil, ppm Nil

The water vapours generated from last bodies of evaporator and pan is condensed in

sugar plant circulating cooling water (barometric condensers). The condensate water

collected in barometric condenser is utilized as makeup of cooling water. Excess water

from the cooling plant will be drained out as purge water. The utilization of condensate

water in the process is indicated in Table 2.8.

Table 2.8: Utilization of vapour condensate water, (m3/d)

Parameters Value

Mill imbibition 32% on Cane 4480

MOL preparation 2% On Cane 280

Vacuum filter 4 % On cane 560

Centrifugal 3 % On cane 420

Pan 2 % On cane 280

Total 6020

II. Fresh water requirement for co-gen sugar unit

Fresh water is required in the co-gen plant for boiler feed and condenser cooling water

make-up and in the sugar plant for process application, domestic use, and gardening.

The quantity of water required by the industry will be drawn from the river

Krishna/Almatti reservoir and pumped to the site (for which permission has been

obtained). The raw water will be stored in the reservoir located at the highest level of the

project site.

III. Water Treatment

The water has to be treated in a suitable water treatment plant. The extent of water

treatment required for different applications is given below.

Boiler feed : De-mineralized water

Cooling water : Soft water

67

Domestic use : Clarified, filtered and chlorinated.

Gardening : Recycled water/Raw water

Process in sugar plant & distillery : Soft water

Raw water from the source is pumped to the main water reservoir 1 and 2 of 2100 m3

capacity each and 3rd reservoir of 4800 m3 capacity. The reservoir is a rectangular tank

constructed of stone masonry/RCC. The water from reservoirs is pumped to chemical

mixer and then to mechanical clariflocculator. The clarified water is collected in a

clarified water treatment plant for further treatment.

The clarified water is passed through pressure filter and then water softening plant. The

soft water is collected in soft water storage tank for use in cooling water make up, sugar

plant and distillery applications. Part of the filter plant outlet water is directly taken to

demineralised plant for use in boiler feed water makeup.

Water requirement for domestic use is drawn from filter plant outlet and collected in an

overhead water storage tank. Chemicals such as lime, sodium carbonate, caustic soda,

bleaching powder, flocculants and hydrochloric acid are used in water treatment plant.

Figure 2.10: Schematic flow diagram of water treatment plant

Water reservoir

Almatti dam

Chemical mixer

Mechanical

clariflocculator

Clarified water tank

Pressure

filter

Water softening plant

Soft water storage tank

To cooling tower, sugar plant & distillery

De-mineralization plant

To boiler feed

make-up

Overhead storage tank

To domestic use

68

IV. Water balance

The major demand of process water in sugar plant is met by recovered vapour

condensate. The requirement of fresh water for different applications in the sugar

industry is given in water balance statement in Table 2.9.

Table 2.9 (a): Water balance for co-gen sugar unit, m3/d

Sl. No.

Particulars 6500 TCD & 18.14 MW Co-

gen

14000 TCD & 62.14 MW Co-

gen.

1. WATER INTO SYSTEM, m3/d

1A Source: Fresh water from river. 650 1132

Usage: Domestic use in factory. 50 80

Laboratory 2 2

Water treatment plant, Process, Cooling, spraying & floor washing etc.

598 1050

(WTP- 246, Cooling &

Spraying – 300, Floor washing –

52)

(WTP- 650, Cooling for Bearing at

Mill & Turbine, Cooling

tower, Spray pond – 400 )

Total 650 1132

1 B Water from sugar cane at 70 % on cane. 4550 9800

Total of 1A & 1B 5200 10932

2 WATER OUT OF SYSTEM, m3/d

2 A Effluent. 1238 1112

i) Domestic sewage (80 % of water used) 40 65

ii) Factory effluent including, Process, Cooling spraying, floor wash & laboratory waste water.

650 775

v) WTP drain 48 150

vi) Cooling tower blow down 452 116

vii) Boiler Blow down 48 6

2B Excess vapour condensate recycled back. 2210 6020

Mill imbibition 32% on Cane 1828 4480

MOL preparation 2% On Cane 130 280

Vacuum filter 4 % On cane

252

560

Centrifugal 3 % On cane 420

Pan 2 % On cane 280

2C LOSSES 1752 3800

Water going along with Bagasse 28% on cane 975 1960

69

with 50% moisture.

Water going along with press mud & molasses (Losses) 4% on cane

185 560

i) Vapour & drift loss from cooling tower 7.5 % On Cane

360 420

ii) Vapour & drift loss at bearing (mill & turbine) cooling water 1% On Cane

65 140

iii) Steam losses at traps & vent at 0.5 % to 1% On Cane

45 280

iv) Domestic water loss. 10 20

v) Vapour loss at crystallization & Centrifugation - 0.5 % to 1% On Cane

52 140

vi) Flash vapour loss at clarifier 0.5 % On Cane 30 140

vii) Vapour loss at mill – 0.5 % On Cane 30 140

Total of 2A, 2B, 2C 5200 10932

70

Water balance chart for co-gen sugar unit (14000 TCD & 62.14 MW Co-gen.)

71

Table 2.9(b): Water balance for Distillery unit, m3/d

Particulars Requirement Losses Waste water

Fermentation – Process make up ( water present in molasses at 20 % of 240 MT of Molasses )

500

142

Raw Spent wash Generation -400 Spent lees -85 Cooling blow down from Distillery -68

Fresh water for ENA Plant 228 --

Boiler makeup for Incineration Boiler 32 26 6 ( Blow down)

Cooling tower makeup for distillery plant unit

184 164 20( Blow down)

DM Plant Rejects 13 0 13

Floor and Equipment wash 20 5 15

Domestic 40 2 38

Total 1017

645

Recycled water from MEE (-)525 23

Recycle water from RO (-)120 10

Fresh water drawl from river 372 372

2.7 Sources of Pollution and Built In Mitigation Measures

Wastewater, gaseous emissions and solid wastes generated in the industry are likely

cause pollution to the environment. Reduce, recycle and reuse principles will be adopted

to control the generation of wastes in the industry. Further they have to be handled,

treated and disposed scientifically to avoid adverse impact on the environment. Sources

wastes and their management are presented below.

2.7.1 Wastewater Management in Co-Gen Sugar Unit

1. Source of wastewater

The wastewater generated in sugar factory is relatively less toxic and less hazardous.

Further the sugar processing does not involve any process water discharges. The

wastewater generated is mainly due to washing of floors and equipment’s in addition to

boiler and cooling water purge. The wastewater generated can therefore be substantially

reduced by good housekeeping. The details of source and quantity of wastewater from

sugar factory are enumerated below.

i. Spillage, leakage & floor washings:

In a sugar factory wastewater of high contamination is generated mainly due to leakage

and spillage of juice, syrup and molasses in different sections of the manufacturing plant.

72

Leakage occurs at pipe joints and pump glands. Spillage and splashing occur at different

equipment’s. The periodical washing of floor also contributes significant pollution load

to the wastewater. Cleaning of equipment’s such as evaporators, pans, juice heaters etc.

also produces wastewater. Though, these wastes are small in quantity, they contain high

BOD and low pH. Good housekeeping, effective maintenance and efficient plant

operation can considerably reduce the generation of this wastewater. Spillage and

washings can be collected in small sumps constructed at such locations and these can be

recycled to the process. If planned well the generation of such wastewater can be totally

avoided.

However at present the wastewater does generate. The effluent from mill plant contains

fibres, grease and oil. The effluent from lime preparation and clarifier house contains

high suspended solids.

Quantity of effluent due to spillage, leakage, washing of floor and process equipment:

775 m3/d

ii. Boiler blow-down:

Steam generation from boiler is 105 T/hr and 240 T/hr . Major part of the steam

produced is condensed in evaporators, pans and juice heaters and the condensate

collected is re-circulated as feed water into the boiler. A small quantity live steam is also

used in centrifuge, ejector and crystallizers. D.M. water with low dissolved solids (less

than 15 ppm) is used as make up feed water in the boiler. Auxiliary chemicals such as

caustic and phosphate are added to the feed water to prevent scale, corrosion and

carryover in the boiler. As the evaporation continues, concentration of dissolved solids in

boiler increases. Therefore, solids present in boiler continue to build up. Boiler blow

down of about 24% of the feed water is therefore maintained to control the concentration

of dissolved solids in the boiler water. The boiler blow down contains a maximum of 200

ppm dissolved solids and 5 ppm of hardness. The BOD and COD content in boiler blow-

down are almost nil.

The blow down allowed in the boiler is about 6m3/d. The quality of boiler blow down is

relatively of better quality and it may be advantageously added to the circulating cooling

water channel.

iii. Laboratory wastewater:

Wastewater is generated in the laboratory due to washing and rinsing of apparatus. The

chemicals and juice samples used in the laboratory are ultimately let out to drain along

with water as wastewater. The effluent is small in quantity and moderately

contaminated. Recycle of juice samples and chemicals to factory process will control the

quantity and quality of wastewater from the laboratory.

73

Laboratory wastewater : 2 m3/d

iv. Domestic wastewater:

Domestic wastewater is generated from factory and from residential quarters. A total of

847 persons will be working in the industry after expansion. A total of 117 residential

quarters are provided in the industry and 4 persons are expected to be residing in each

quarter. Fresh water is utilized for domestic needs in the factory at a rate of 50 L/d per

head. Fresh water consumed and wastewater generated due to domestic usage of water

in m3/d is given below:

Domestic water usage in the factory : 38

(at 45 L/d per head for 847 persons)

Domestic water usage in quarters : 42

(at 90 L/d per head for 468 persons)

Total domestic water usage : 80

Domestic wastewater from factory : 31

(at 80 % of the water utilized)

Domestic wastewater from residential quarters : 34

(at 90 % of the water utilized)

Total domestic wastewater : 65

v. Purge from barometric condenser:

The vapours from last effect evaporator and pan boiling are passed through steam ejector

and then sent to barometric condenser, wherein circulating cooling water is used to

scrub, condense and cool the vapours. The vapour condensate added into the circulation

water. The circulation water is lost as vapour and drift losses in cooling tower. In case of

overloading of pan and evaporators the vapours may become contaminated due to

entrainment. This circulation water is relatively more contaminated as compared to that

of boiler blow down and turbine cooling water purge. The quality of circulation water is

improved by its dilution with boiler blow down and turbine cooling water purge. Excess

water from cooling tower channel is drained out as purge.

vi. Hot Condensate:

Large quantities of steam condensates are obtained as hot water from the evaporators

and pan jacket bodies. The condensate is of good quality and therefore it is used in the

process for boiler feed, mill imbibition, lime preparation, juice dilution etc. Excess

74

condensate is let out as effluent. Though the condensate has high temperature it is cooled

during the passage in the gutter and mixing with other effluent.

vii. Purge from Mill Tower cooling water:

Large quantity of water is circulated for cooling of mill and turbine bearings. It is

necessary to purge some of the cooling water to maintain its quality. Evaporation and

drift loss in this case is small. Fresh water is used as make up water to compensate the

purge and also the vapour and drift losses.

vii. Purge from Turbine cooling water:

Large quantity of water is circulated through turbine surface condenser for condensation

of exhaust steam. Cooling water purge of this system is of relatively good quality, it is

sent to sugar plant cooling water system. Fresh water is used as make up water to

compensate the purge and also the vapour and drift losses.

ix. Cooling water from glands:

Cooling water is circulated through pump glands, centrifuge glands and Sulphur burners

etc. This water can also be totally re-circulated. However, in practice this water is drained

out due to its likely contamination with juice.

x. Water treatment plant washings:

Water treatment plant consists of clarifier, filter, softening and de-minerazation plants. A

total of 650 m3/d of fresh water is required for regeneration of these units. Chemicals

such as lime, sodium chloride, hydrochloric acid and caustic soda are used in

regeneration. The wash water obtained from regeneration contains high dissolved solids

but is almost free from BOD. This water may be utilized for quenching of boiler ash.

2. Isolation and segregation of wastewater

The effluent from sugar industry is relatively non-toxic and less-hazardous in nature.

Effluent from domestic source is received in septic tanks. It has low dissolved solids and

moderate BOD. The wastewaters generated at various sources in the sugar factory are

segregated into three streams based on their pollution load for the convenience off their

subsequent treatment and disposal. The details of waste water generated (after

expansion) Co-gen sugar industry is summarized below:

Sl. No Source Quantity m3/d

1 Stream A: Process effluent, (High BOD effluent) including WTP Drain

925

2 Stream B: Cooling and Boiler Blow down 122

75

3 Stream C: Domestic effluent 65

Total 1112

3. Characteristics of wastewater

The wastewater from sugar industry is relatively non-toxic and non-hazardous in nature.

In-plant measures are adopted in the factory as enumerated elsewhere to reduce the

quantity and contamination of wastewater. Oil taps are provided in the mill house to

minimise the contamination of oil & grease in the wastewater. Small sumps are provided

at suitable location in the factory to receive the leakages, juice and syrup, which may be

present at pumps and near some process equipment. The leakage of juice and syrup thus

collected is recycled to process. Floor cleaning is done by dry baggage to minimise the

quantity of wastewater. Further hot condensates obtained from evaporators are recycled

to the process to meet the requirement of imbibition etc. in the process, and also to meet

the makeup water requirement for cooling tower.

Waste from domestic source is received in septic tanks. It has low dissolved solids and

moderate BOD. The overflow from septic tank is sent to effluent treatment plant. The

wastewater generated at various sources in the sugar factory is segregated into three

streams based on their pollution load and the convenience of their subsequent treatment

and disposal. The characteristics of wastewater of different streams are given in Table

2.10. The performance report of the existing ETP is enclosed as Annexure- 12, the quality

of the treated water from the ETP performance/Analysis of the effluent treated water is

enclosed as Annexure - 11

Table 2.10: Characteristics of wastewater from the industry

Characteristics of wastewater from the Sugar industry;

Parameters Source A

(Process

Effluent)

Source B

(Cooling and Boiler

Blow down)

Source C

(Domestic

effluent)

Temperature 0C 38 40 34

pH 5.5 7.2 7.0

Dissolved solids, ppm 2450 440 360

Suspended solids, ppm 248 60 186

BOD, ppm 2100 80 230

COD, ppm 4450 190 482

Oil, ppm 34 Nil 10

76

Estimated Outlet Characteristics from Sugar ETP;

Tentative Percentage wise Reductions across each Stage of Treatment.

Details Flow

(m3/d)

COD

(mg/l)

BOD

(mg/l)

TSS

(mg/l)

O&G

(mg/l)

% Reduction in Oil & Grease Trap

- 5 5 25 80

At the outlet of Oil & Grease Trap

1000 2660 1596 563 10

% Reduction in Anaerobic Lagoons

- 50 65 50 15

Effluent Outflow from USBAR 1000 1330 558 282 9

% Reduction in CAT - 50 62 50 20

Effluent Outflow from CAT 1000 665 379 141 7

% Reduction in EAT - 70 92% 70 --

Effluent Outflow from EAT / Clarifier

1000 199 30 42.3 7

Final Treated Effluent 1000 ≤ 250 ≤ 30 ≤ 100 <10

Characteristics of wastewater of Distillery Condensate;

Parameters Distillery Condensate

Temperature 0C 30-35

pH 3.0-3.5

Dissolved solids, ppm 1500-2000

Suspended solids, ppm Nil

BOD, ppm 1800-2000

COD, ppm 4000-4500

Oil, ppm Nil

Estimated Outlet Characteristics from Distillery Condensate;

Tentative Percentage wise Reductions across each Stage of Treatment.

Details Flow (m3/d)

COD (mg/l)

BOD (mg/l)

TSS (mg/l)

O&G (mg/l)

Buffer Tank 610 4500 1500 Nil Nil

% Reduction in Buffer Tank 5 5 -- --

Anaerobic Lagoons 610 4000 1600 Nil Nil

% Reduction in Anaerobic 65 90 -- --

77

Lagoons

Effluent Outflow from USBAR 610 1400 160 Nil Nil

% Reduction in MBBR 70 90 Nil Nil

Effluent Outflow from MBBR 610 420 144

% Reduction in RO & UF Plant 90 90 Nil Nil

Outlet of UF & RO plant 610 42 14 Nil Nil

Final Treated Effluent 610 ≤250 ≤100 Nil Nil

The effluent treatment plant is designed for about 30% higher quantity of effluent to take

care of shock loads & any eventualities. The influent data of combined wastewater

assumed for design is given below.

i. Influent qualities of combined wastewater:

Sugar factory crushing capacity : 14000 TCD

Effluent flow rate, hourly maximum : 60 m3/d

Daily maximum : 1500 m3/d

Temperature : 30-40 OC

pH : 5.5

T.D.S : 2100 ppm

S.S : 250 ppm

B.O.D : 2200 ppm

C.O.D : 4000 - 4500 ppm

Oil : 20 ppm

ii. Quality of treated wastewater:

The treated effluent shall be discharged to agricultural land for irrigation. Prescribed

standards to be achieved for treated effluent are given below.

Temperature : 30 to 35 0C

pH : 7.0 - 7.8

T.D.S : less than 2000 ppm

S.S : less than 100 ppm

B.O.D : less than 100 ppm

C.O.D : less than 250 ppm

Oil : less than 5 ppm

78

4. Treatment procedure

The mill plant effluent contains oil and fibre in large concentration. This effluent is

therefore subjected to de-skimming operation in mill plant itself to free it from oil and

fiber and then mixed with other factory effluents. The combined effluents are subjected

to preliminary and secondary treatment as described below. The flow diagram of effluent

treatment plant is given in Figure 2.11. The excess vapour condensate which is let out

from the plant is collected separately in a storage tank. This is of relatively good quality

and is suitable for irrigation. It is tested for quality and then let out for gardening in

factory premises or to agriculture land for irrigation.

i. Preliminary treatment

Combined effluent in a common drainage is led to the effluent treatment premise. It is

passed through bar screen, grit chamber and oil separator and then received in a

neutraliser cum equalization tank of about 20 min hold-up capacity. Alkali is added into

the neutraliser to raise the effluent pH to about 7.5 - 8.0 and also to precipitate some of

the dissolved solids. The neutralised effluent is passed through the primary clarifier of

2.5 to 3.0 hr detention period. The sludge collected at the bottom is pumped to sludge

drying bed for dewatering. The clear overflow from the clarifier is passed to biological

treatment plant for further treatment. 70% of suspended solids, 20% of BOD and 30% of

dissolved solids present in effluent are expected to be removed in preliminary treatment.

ii. Secondary treatment

This consists of the two stage activated sludge process. One stage consists of diffuser

system (Bottom aeration) and another one is aeration tank with fixed surface aerators and

secondary clarifiers. The effluents containing suspended biomass are clarified in

respective secondary clarifiers. Biomass settled at the clarifiers is recycled to aeration

process to maintain the concentration of mixed liquor suspended solids (MLSS) in

Diffusor & aeration tank at the desired level. The excess bio-mass (sludge) from

secondary clarifier is passed to sludge drying beds. The clear effluent from last clarifier is

collected in a sump of about 8 hours capacity and then let out to agricultural land for

irrigation.

5. Action Plan for Reduction of fresh water consumption.

We could reduce our fresh water requirement quantity from 1400 m3/day to 1132

m3/day (i.e 268 m3 / day)

The quantity of condensate & other water details is as follows,

79

Boiler blow down water - 06 m3 / Day

Cooling tower blow down - 116 m3 / Day

WTP drain (Backwash only) - 150 m3 / Day

Second body evaporator condensate - 1200 m / Day

1472 m3/Day

The quantity of condensate & other water generated is 1472 m3/Day, by introducing a

proposing a Condensate Polishing Unit (CPU) for sugar & Co-gen unit of capacity 1500

m3/day we substantiately reduce the fresh water quantity and effluent quantity also,

hence the above mentioned condensate we will treat in CPU and recycle back to same

sections. Thus we propose a Condensate Polishing Unit (CPU) for our proposed

expansion.

Proposed Condensate Polishing Unit of Sugar & Co-gen Unit

Condensate

Inlet

Equalization Tank

Conventional Aeration Tank

(CAT)

Primary

Clarifier

Extended Aeration Tank

(EAT)

HRSCC

Tank

Polishing Pond or

Treated water

Tank

ACF MGF Recycle to plant

80

6. Specification of effluent treatment units

The specifications of the ETP are presented below.

i. Main gutter for combined effluent:

Main gutter is constructed of stone/brick masonry with the following sizes. It is covered with 75 mm thick R.C.C or stone slabs.

Flow rate : 60 m3/h

Velocity : 0.6 m/s

Gradient : 1:200

Width : 0.4 m

Height : 0.5 m

ii. Screen:

Coarse screen of 25 mm gap followed by the screen of 10 mm gap is provided in the main

gutter. Velocity through screen is 0.3 m/s at average flow and 0.6 m/s at peak load.

Head loss through screen at maximum flow is 0.15 m, the floating entrapped on the

screen are removed manually.

The bar screen are fabricated with 6 mm x 25 mm flats. The flats are suitably supported

on 10 mm x 10 mm cross bars. The bar screen is located at 300 inclination to the flow

direction.

Screen size : 0.6 m x 0.8 m

Screen chamber size : 0.6 m X 1.2 m X 0.55 m

iii. Oil separator (Oil and grease trap):

An oil separation tank of sufficient size is provided close to the screen chamber. Floating

scum consisting of oil, grease, fibre matter is periodically skimmed off. These tanks are

provided in duplicate with a common wall in between. Gates are provided on either side

of each tank for its independent operation.

Tank size (each) : 4.0 m x 1 5 m x 1.5 m

Detention period : 15 min

iv. Nutrient and culture vessels:

Plastic vessels are provided to prepare and store nutrients and culture solution. The

solution is fed along with influent to the aeration tank. The tanks are provided with

dosing arrangements.

Vessel capacity : 200 Litres each (2 no.)

v. Primary clarifier:

It is a circular type mechanical clarifier with central agitator and peripheral discharge arrangement. It is provided with continuous sludge removal facilities to sludge drying bed from bottom of the clarifier and is constructed of R.C.C structure.

81

Flow rate, max. : 60 m3/h

Diameter of tank : 7.5 m

Straight height : 3 m

Bottom gradient : 1:12

Volume : 133 m3

Detention period : 2 hour 20 Min

Outlet S. S : less than 200 ppm

Influent BOD : 2240 ppm

iv. Neutralizer/Buffer Tank ( Proposed):

Sump is constructed of stone/brick masonry. It is provided with mechanical agitator. The

neutralised effluent is pumped to anaerobic reactor. Buffer is act as homogeneous mixer.

Sump size : L : 10 m, B : 10 m, D : 3.5 m.

Free board : 0.3 m

Retention period : 6 hours

Capacity : 350 m3


Outlet BOD : less than 2100 ppm

v. Anaerobic reactor (Proposed):

Flow rate, max. : 60 m3/h

Diameter of tank : 21 m

Height : 7.0 m

Volume : 2100 m3

Detention period : 35 hour

Outlet S. S : less than 150 ppm


Outlet BOD : 600 ppm.

Total BOD load : 3150 kg / Day.

BOD reduction : 70-75% reduction

vi. Aeration tank –1(Diffuser system or Bottom aeration)

It is rectangular tank constructed of stone masonry and tank interior is suitably plastered.

The tank is provided with 560 Nos of fine bubble diffusers of discharge 4m3/hr oxygen

discharge each. 02 Nos of air blower is installed of capacity 2000 m3/hr. The sludge from

secondary clarifier - 2 is also recycled to the aeration tank no – 02 to maintain the desired

M.L.S.S.

82

Influent flow rate : 60 m3/d


Total BOD load : 900 kg/d

Food to MLSS ratio : 0.10 kg BOD/(d,kg. MLSS)

MLSS : 3500 ppm

Detention period : 36 h

Sludge return : 50 %

BOD reduction : 20%


Total oxygen required : 1800 kg

Oxygenation capacity of each diffuser : 4 m3 /hr

H.P of surface aerator : 10 (3 No.)

Size of tank : 20 m x 36 m x 3.6 m

Free board : 0.6 m

Effective volume of tank : 2160 m3

The mixing capacity of the surface aerator is sufficient to keep the MLSS in suspension.

vii. Aeration tank –2:

The aeration tank is rectangular in section. It is constructed of stone masonry and R.C.C.

structure. Aeration tank is provided with 04 Nos mechanical surface aerators, each of 15

HP capacity. Aerators are supported on R.C.C platform. The sludge from secondary

clarifier is recycled to the aeration tank

Flow rate of influent : 1500 m3/d


Total BOD load : 720 kg/d

Food to MLSS ratio : 0.23 kg BOD/kg.. MLSS /day

MLSS : 2500 ppm

Detention period : 19 hr

Sludge return : 50%

BOD reduction : 20%


Total oxygen required : 1400 kg/d

Oxygenation capacity of surface aerators: 1.50 kg O2/(hp .hr)

Hp of surface aerators : 15 Hp (04 nos.)

Size of tank : 19 m x 20 m x 3 m

Free board : 0.4 m

Effective volume of tank : 1140 m3

The mixing capacity of surface aerators is sufficient to keep the sludge in suspension.

83

viii. Secondary clarifier:

It is circular type mechanical clarifier with central agitator and peripheral discharge

arrangement. It is also provided with continues sludge discharge facilities. It is

constructed of R.C.C structure.

Flow rate : 60 m3/h

Sludge return : 50%

Diameter of tank (I.D) : 7.5 m

Straight height : 3 m

Bottom gradient : 1.12

Effective volume : 134 m3

Effluent S.S : less than 50 ppm

Detention period : 2 hour 20 min.

ix. Sludge drying beds:

The tank is constructed of stone masonry and they are filled with graded sand and

pebbles to a height of 0.6m.

Size of sludge bed : 3 m x 3 m x 3 m, 4 Nos.

Free board : 0.3 m

Drying cycles : 10 days

Capacity of each bed : 8.0 m3

x. Pumps:

Pumps are of C.I. non-clogging type with self-priming arrangement

i. Effluent feed Pump

Flow rate : 60 m3

Head : Suction 5 m, Discharge : 10 m

S.S. in efficient : 1000 ppm

Density : 1.01 gm/ml

Nos. of pumps : 2

ii. Sludge pump

Flow rate : 10 m3/h

Head : Suction : 5 m, Discharge : 10 m

S.S. in efficient : 10,000 ppm

Density : 1.1 gm/ml

xi. Flow meter:

Instrument type of flow measuring device with type flow indicator is provided to

indicate the flow rate of treated effluent in the gutter.

84

xii. Treated effluent sump:

The tank is rectangular in section and constructed of SSM work. The tank interior is

plastered and smooth finished.

Flow rate : 1500 m3/d

Tank size : 12.5 m x 12.5 m x 2.6 m

Free board : 0.3 m

Detention period : 3 hr

Figure 2.11 (a): Flow diagram of proposed Effluent Treatment plant – sugar unit

Sugar Effluent

Bar Screen

Oil & Grease Trap

“V” Notch Chamber

Primary Clarifier

Monthly Washing Tank/ Anaerobic Lagoon No-01

Anaerobic Lagoon / Equalization No-02

Conventional Aeration System

Extended Aeration System

Secondary Clarifier

Polishing Pond/ Treated Water Storage Tank

Disposal to Irrigation

Buffer Tank

Anaerobic Reactor

85

Figure 2.11 (b): Flow diagram of proposed Effluent Treatment plant – Distillery unit

The waste water generated Distillery unit is summarized below

Spent

wash

Spent wash (400m3/day) is concentrated from 16 % to 60 % in multi-effect evaporator.

Concentrated Spent will be used in the Incineration Boiler as fuel

Spent

Lee

Spent lees (85m3/day) generated is minimal, the same is sent to CPU of Distillery Unit for further treatment.

Process Condensate from MEE (Multiple Effect Evaporation)

Equalization Tank

Buffer Tank

MBBR (Mixed Bed Bio-film reactor)

Anaerobic reactor

Tube settler

MGF Feed Tank

Ultra Filter (UF)

Reverse Osmosis

Recycle to Distillery Unit (Fermentation & Cooling tower section)

86

2.7.2 Gaseous Emissions and Air Pollution Control Measures

1. Flue Gases from Boilers and Diesel Generators

Gaseous emissions in the industry will be mainly the flue gases from boilers and diesel

generators. Diesel generators will be used to meet only the emergency requirement of

power. Other emissions include fugitive emissions due to bagasse, ash and movement of

vehicles.

1. Flue gases from boilers and diesel generators

2. Fugitive emissions due to bagasse, ash and movement of vehicles

1. Flue gases from boilers and diesel generators:

The sources of flue gases from the industry will be,

i. Existing 105 T/hr boiler and proposed 240 T/hr boiler in co-gen sugar unit.

During crushing season and during off season, the boiler is operated on

bagasse, the latest stack monitoring reports for the existing boilers is enclosed

as Annexure- 10

ii. 24 T/hr boiler in distillery unit. The boiler will be operated (330 days) on

mixed fuel consisting of bio-mass, coal and CSW.

iii. Existing DG sets of capacity 1250 KVA for sugar unit and 500 KVA of Distillery

units, proposed 1250 KVA of DG for sugar unit.

The characteristics of fuel are given in Table 2.11.

Table 2.11: Characteristics of fuels

Sl.

No.

Parameter Fuel

Bagasse Coal CSW Diesel

1 Heat value, GCV, kcal/kg 2200 5000 1600 10700

2 S content, kg/T 0.1 10 10 1

3 Ash, kg/T 10 100 20 -

4 Steam / fuel ratio, kg/kg 2.4 5.5 1.6 -

The information on stack and sources of emissions are given in Table 2.12.

Table 2.12: Sources of flue gases and APC

Sl. No.

Air pollution source Fuel consumption Stack height APC measure

1 Existing 105 TPH boiler, (co-gen sugar unit) During season and Off season

Bagasse: 1050T/d

65 m ht, AGL

ESP

87

Additional 240 T/h boiler (co-

gen sugar unit) During season

and Off season

Bagasse: 2400T/d

77 m, AGL ESP

24 TPH boiler, (Distillery unit)

Coal and CSW

60 m, AGL ESP

2 Existing D.G. sets :

1250 kVA ( Sugar Co-gen)

500 kVA ( Distillery ) Proposed D.G. sets:

1250 kVA

Diesel, 150 kg/h 67 kg/h

150 kg/h

8 m, ARL

7 ARL

Proposed : 8 m, ARL

Acoustic enclosure

Stack height calculation for proposed 240 T/h boiler and 1250 kVA DG set :

a. 240 TPH boiler :

During season and off season:

Fuel used – Bagasse = 112.1 Kg/ H

Relation for stack height

H = 74 (Q) 0.27

Where, H = Height of Stack in m & Q = Ash produced in TPH

As per KSPCB norms, for agro based fuels ash produced per ton of fuel burnt = 6.5 kg

However assuming ash produced per ton of fuel burnt = 10 kg

Ash produced = 112.1 x 10 = 1121.2 kg/hr = 1.12 TPH

Therefore Q = 1.12 TPH

Hence, H = 74 (1.12)0.27 = 74 (1.03) m = 76.22 m

Or say 77 m AGL (Proposed for 240 TPH Boiler)

Proposed Height of Stack

Height of stack to be provided : 77 m AGL

b. 1250 kVA DG :

Fuel used – Diesel: 150 kg/h

Relation for stack height

88

H = 14(Q) 0.3

Where, H = Height of stack in m

Q = SO2 emissions in kg/h

Sulfur content in coal = 0.1% Specific gravity of sulfur = 2.046

Therefore, Q = 150 x 0.1/100 x 2.046 = 0.30kg/Hr

Hence, H = 14 (0.30)0.3 = 8.4 m

Proposed Height of Stack

Height of stack to be provided : 8.0 m ARL

Technical specifications of air pollution control equipment’s

Electrostatic Precipitator

89

2. Process Emissions:

Carbon dioxide generated in the fermenters carries traces of alcohol vapors. The vapors

are scrubbed with water and then vented to atmosphere through a stack of 3 m height

above roof level. The scrubbed solution is returned to the fermenter.

MAKE: M/s. BHARAT HEAVY ELECTRICALS LTD.

SUPPLIER: M/s. FIVES CAIL KCP LTD.

Design details

Sl. No Description Details

1 No of Field 3 Field

2 Gas flow rate 52 m3 / s

3 Dust load at exit 50 mg/ nm3

4 Inlet dust concentration 6 mgs / nm3

5 Flue gas moisture percentage 23% & 28%

6 Un-burnt carbon in fly ash 35%

7 Gas velocity through ESP less than 1M/s Material details

Sl. No Description Qty

1 Collecting Electrode 315 No's

2 Emitting Electrode 600 No's

3 Outlet GD screen plate 13 No's

4 Inlet GD screen plate 32 No's

5 Collecting Rapping Sys 3 No's

6 Collecting Rapping Hammer 63 No's

7 Emitting Rapping Sys 3 No's

8 Emitting Rapping Hammer 72 No's

9 GD Rapping Sys 1 No

10 GD Rapping hammer 16 No's

11 Shaft Insulator 3 No's

12 Support Insulator 12 No's

13 Inspection Door (723x523) 5 No's

14 Hopper Door(460x410) 3 No's

15 Collecting & GD Rapping Motor 0.33 HP, 1.1 RPM 4 No's

16 Emitting Rapping Motor 0.33 HP, 2.5RPM 3 No's

17 Knif edge gate valve 3 No's

18 Expnsion Joint Size: 2310x2810 2 No's

19 Heating Elements S.S 51 No's

20 Thermostat for hopper 4 No's

90

3. Fly Ash Management:

a. For preventing spreading of fly ash particles, the boiler dust should be transported in

transport vehicles covered with a lid. Fly ash is being collected in wet conditions only

and transported in vehicles covered with a proper lid & water sprinklers are provided

keep the fly ash in wet condition.

b. Boiler ashes and press mud shall not be stored in factory premises. Boiler ash and

press mud is being issued to local former community on day to day basis.

2. 7.3 Noise Pollution & Control Measures

Noise is described as an unwanted sound. Exposure to noise affects the human beings in

many ways depending upon the intensity of noise, its frequency and exposure duration.

Exposure to excessive noise produces varying degree of damage to human hearing

system, which is initially reversible.

WHO has recommended 75 dB as exposure limit to industrial noise. The BIS

recommended the acceptable noise level in an industrial area between 45 and 60 dB. The

threshold limit value (TLV) under occupational safety and health is 85 dB for 8 hours, 90

dB for 4 hours, 95 dB for 2 hours and 100 dB for 1 hour and 110 dB for 15 minutes per

day. Sound beyond 80 dB harms hearing system and it can be regarded as pollution. The

largest noise a man hears without discomfort is thus 80 dB.

The source and quality of noise inside the industry are given bellow.

i. Steam turbines : 85-90 dB (A)

ii. Diesel Generators : 75-80 dB (A)

iii. Fans, blowers and compressors : 80-85 dB (A)

iv. Sugar graders : 85-90 dB (A)

v. Centrifuges : 80-85 dB (A)

The sound intensity appears to be at moderate level in co-gen power and distillery

plants. In general at the locations of turbines, compressors, fans etc., the sound intensity

generally exceeds the limit. Control measures will be adopted to reduce noise level

within the permissible limits at the source itself. These machineries are installed on

vibration proof foundation and base. Steam turbine and diesel generators are located in

isolated and acoustic building. The workers engaged in such locations are provided with

earmuffs to have additional safety against noise nuisance. These units will be

manufactured to meet the noise levels as per MOEF/ CPCB guidelines.

DG sets will be provided with in-built acoustics measures. Also ambient noise levels will

be ensured within the ambient standards by inbuilt design of mechanical equipment and

91

building apart from vegetation (tree plantations) along the periphery and at various

locations within the industry premises.

2.7.4 Solid Waste Management

The solid wastes or by-products produced in sugar industry such as bagasse, press mud

and molasses are made use as valuable resources as discussed below. Other solid wastes

in the industry are boiler ash, lime/ETP sludge. Spent lubricating and cooling oils

produced in the industry are specified as hazardous wastes and these are disposed as per

the prescribed guidelines.

a. Bagasse

Bagasse is the fibre material left out after extraction of the treated sugarcane juice. The

average bagasse content in sugarcane is 30%. Major quantity of the bagasse produced

will be utilized in the plant itself as a boiler fuel. A small quantity of bagasse will also be

used as filter aid in the plant. The saved bagasse will be stored on the storage yard for

use in off season.

The requirement of Bagasse after expansion 3450 T/d.

Captive generation of Bagasse after expansion 4200 T/d.

Excess Bagasse generation of 750 T/d is expected, the Co-gen boiler will be run for a month in a

non-crushing season for the utilization of excess bagasse and remaining bagasse will be used as

saved bagasse for the next crushing season.

b. Molasses

A total of 630 T/d of Molasses (including Existing and proposed Expansion) will be

produced in the industry at average of 4.5 % on sugarcane crushed. It contains large

percentage of non-crystallisable sugar and is a valuable source of raw material for

manufacture of ethyl alcohol or other products such as oxalic acid, lactic acid etc.

Molasses is also used as nutritive additive in manufacture of cattle feed. In the present

industry the molasses is used in own distillery for production of ethanol.

Collection, storage, handling and transportation of molasses. The molasses that is obtained will be transferred very carefully within the plant premises

and shall be used for own captive for distillery for production of ethanol, an existing steel

storage tanks of 06 No’s, (3 no’s with Dia 20 and Area 628 Sq.m & 03 No’s with Dia 24

92

and Area 754 Sq.m) is available, now we have proposed 01 No of steel tank with Dia 24

and Area 452 Sq.m. for storage of Molasses.

Sl. No.

Description of by-

products / Solid Waste

Quantity per day in T/d

Incremental increase in

T/d

Mode of Disposal

Existing After Expansion

01 Molasses

295.5 630 334.5 200 T/d of molasses is required as a raw material for manufacturing of Ethanol in the existing distillery of 50 KLD capacities.

The requirement of molasses is 200 T/d for and 50KLPD existing Distillery i.e. for 330 days

66,000 T/annum.

Captive generation of Molasses 295.5 T/d i.e for 180 days 53,190 T/annum. (66,000 minus

53,190 =12,810 T/Annum) molasses will be met from own captive.

Remaining 47,400 T of molasses shall be sold to other distilleries with and MOU for

manufacturing of Rectified Spirit/Absolute Alcohol or Ethanol.

c. Press mud

A total of 560 T/d of press mud is produced in the industry at an average 4 % on cane

crushed in the sugar plant including Existing and proposed Expansion. It contains

fibrous material and crop nutrients such as phosphorous and potassium and therefore it

is issued to farmers for use in agricultural land. The press mud will also supply to

required distillery for composting.

d. Boiler ash

Boiler ash is un-burnt matter left out in the furnace after complete burning of bagasse in

the boiler. Ash produced from bagasse will be 2.0 % on wet basis. Bagasse consumption

in boiler is about 2450 T/d (Existing and Expansion). The ash contains silica, and other

metal oxides. It is a non-toxic material. It can be used as soil conditioner in agriculture

land or in road formation. It can also be composted along with press mud to produce bio-

manure.

93

e. ETP & lime sludge

Small quantity of sludge is produced from primary and secondary clarifiers in the

industry. Major quantity of the sludge from secondary clarifiers is re-circulated to the

aeration tank. Excess of sludge from clarifiers is dewatered and partially dried in sludge

drying beds. The sludge with an average moisture content of 70% produced from ETP

will be 300 kg/d and will be utilized as manure to tree plantation.

Lime with higher CaO% is used in the plant for purification of juice and therefore, the

quantity of lime sludge produced from the plant is small. The sludge with an average

moisture content of 70% will be produced from lime plant. A maximum of about 0.6

T/d of sludge will be produced from lime plant.

The quantities of various solid wastes produced from the sugar industry of 14000 TCD

are summarized in Table 2.13.

Table 2.13: Solid wastes from co-gen sugar unit

Parameters Bagasse Press mud Molasses Boiler Ash Lime sludge

i. Moister content % 50 75 20 - 50

ii. % of cane 30 4 4.5 2.0 -

iii. Quantity, T/d 4200 560 630 69 0.6

Storage Closed

yard

Prepared

yard

Steel Storage

Tanks

Prepared

yard Prepared

yard

Utilization As fuel

in boiler

As manure

preparation

or as soil

nutrients

As raw

material in

distillery

Cane

growers

use as

manure.

In road

preparation

or as soil

nutrients

Spent Oil and Grease.

Spent oil and grease will be generated from the lubricating systems such as D. G. set and

gear units. An average of 0.4 T/year of spent oil will be produced in the industry. This is

stored in M.S drums and disposed to the authorized agencies for their reprocessing and

reuse.

Municipal Solids Waste

Municipal solid waste is generated in residential quarters, factory office and store. The

quantity will be about 473 kg per day. The solid waste collected will be segregated to

separate glass, Plastic metal and other recyclable matter from bio-degradable matter. Bio-

94

degradable matter, 250kg/ d will be composted with agro mass such as press mud. The

composted manure thus produced will be used in greenery development.

2.8 Pollution Mitigation Measures

The main objective of mitigation measures is to conserve the resources, minimise the

waste generation, treatment of wastes, recovery of by-products and recycling of material.

It also incorporates greenery and landscape development of open area and the post

project monitoring of environmental quality. The measures under mitigation plan are

classified as

Measures built in the process

Measures during construction phase

Measures during operation phase

The main objective is to follow environment friendly process, with efficient utilisation of

resources, minimum waste generation, built in waste treatment and operation safety. The

measures adopted are

Built In Pollution Control Mitigation Measures

1. Recovery and reuse of inherent water present in sugarcane.

2. Complete recycle of vapour condensate water with cooling water.

3. Use of hydrated lime instead of lime to avoid lime sludge.

4. Treatment and reuse of vapour condensate for reuse as boiler feed.

5. ESP and stack for air pollution.

6. Dust control in sugar grader unit.

7. Spent oil and grease recovery in mill plant.

8. Use of hot vapour-condensate for imbibition in mill.

9. Use of mechanical seals in pumps to avoid liquid leakages and noise.

2.9 Assessment of New & Untested Technology for the Risk of Technological Failure

The project is for expansion of existing sugar industry from 6500 TCD to 14000 TCD

sugar plant, 18.14 MW to 62.14MW co-gen power plant with no change to Distillery plant

of capacity 50 KLPD. The manufacturing process is a tried & tested method & therefore

there is no risk of technological failure.

95

Chapter – 3

Description of the Environment

3.1 Introduction

The baseline environmental quality is assessed through field studies within the

impact zone for various components of the environment, viz. air, noise, water, land

socio-economic, land use and biological components. The baseline environmental

quality has been assessed during 15th December 2016 to 15th March 2017 in a study

area of 10 km radial distance from the project site.

Knowledge of baseline environmental status of the study area is useful for

Assessment Process of assessing and predicting the environmental consequences

of the significant actions. Significant action depicts direct adverse changes caused by

the action and its effect on the health of the biota including flora, fauna and human

being, socio-economic conditions, current use of land and resources, physical and

cultural heritage properties and biophysical surroundings. Baseline data generation

of the following environmental attributes is essential in EIA studies.

1. Physical Environment

The components of physical environment discussed in this section includes,

Land Environment

Climate and Meteorology

Ambient air quality

Ambient Noise levels

Geology, Minerals and Hydrology

Surface and Ground water quality, and

2. Biological Environment.

3. Social environment.

3.2 Establishment of Impact Zone

Deciding whether a proposed action is likely to cause significant adverse

environmental effects is central to the concept and practice of EIA. Before proceeding

for baseline data generation, it is important to know the boundary limits and

framework, so that the data generated can be effectively utilized for impact

assessment.

In this context, delineate of impact zone plays an important role. Generally the

impact zone for industrial actions is classified into three parts; core zone, buffer zone

and unaffected zone, as illustrated below. The area of impact zone invariably changes

from project to project and depends on the nature and magnitude of activities.

Core Zone (host and proximate area where the proposed activities is completed) - This

96

area is closest to the activity where the background quality of environmental and

human health is always at high risk. This involves risks due to steady state, transient

and accidental release of pollutants, noise, increased traffic congestion and social

stress. The immediate vicinity of the plant that is around 3 km radius is factual core

zone in this case. Figure 3.1 shows the impact zone on the toposheet.

Buffer zone (moderately affected area) - Being a little away from the activity, the

discharge pollutants need time lag to be transported to this area and gets

attenuated/diluted to a considerable extent. However, the associated risk shall be real

during brake-down, failure or upset conditions, and simultaneously with adverse

meteorological and hydrological factors. Distance from 3 km to 10 km around the

project site in the factual buffer zone in this case. This is based on the mathematical

modeling study and air pollution dispersion pattern.

Unaffected Zone - This area shall not be at risk of serious damage to life, health and

property. Here the impact becomes small enough to become imperceptible and/or

inconsequent and/or insignificant and normal life activities shall prevail without any

disturbances due to the activity. Distance away from the 10km buffer zone is the

factually unaffected zone in this case.

While generating the baseline status of physical and biological environment of the

study area, the concept of impact zone has been considered. The Impact zone selection

is based on preliminary screening and modeling studies. For demography and socio-

economics, block wise data has been collected and used for the assessment of impacts.

3.3 Baseline Data

Primary data collected for various environmental aspects, Secondary data were

collected from published sources and Government agencies such as Survey of India,

Census department, Forest department, IMD, etc., the details of the base line data that

were collected is given under Table 3.1 and Table 3.2 gives the Environmental

Attributes and Frequency of Monitoring of Baseline data.

97

Figure 3.1: Toposheet showing impact zones

Table 3.1: Baseline data collection

Environmental

Parameters

Locations for proposed data collection

Source

Air Quality 8 locations Primary

Meteorology 1 location Primary (site specific) Water (Ground water) 8 locations Primary

(Surface water) 4 locations Primary

Soil 8 locations Primary

Noise 8 locations Primary

Ecology Study Area Primary and Secondary

Geology and Hydrology Study Area Primary and Secondary

Land use Study area Primary and Secondary

Socio-Economic Study Area Primary and Secondary

High Impact Zone Medium Impact Zone

N

5 Kms 5 Kms

98

Table 3.2: Environmental Attributes and Frequency of Monitoring

Sl. No Attribute Parameters Frequency of Monitoring

Physical environment

1 Land use Trend of land use change

Satellite imagery of the study.

2 Soil Physico chemical parameters

Once during the study period at Eight locations.

3 Meteorology Relative Humidity (%), Temperature (°C), Rainfall (mm), Wind Direction (Deg), Wind Speed (km/hr) and atmospheric pressure (mb) and mixing height (m)

The meteorological data for Bijapur District was obtained from two sources namely.

Bijapur Agrometeorological Services, University of Agricultural Sciences, Dharwad (primary source)

Modeling studies carried out using U.S. EPA AERMOD dispersion model, 1996 – 2012 Lakes Environmental Software, version 6.2.0. (secondary source)

4 Ambient Air quality

As per NAAQ Standards, 2009

24 hourly samples twice a week for three month at eight locations.

5 Noise levels Leq Day time & Leq Night time

Continuous recording per hour interval for 24 hours per location at eight stations.

6 Water quality Physical, Chemical and Bacteriological.

Once during the study period at eight locations.

7 Geology Geological history. Based on field studies in the study area

8 Hydrology Drainage area and pattern, nature of streams, aquifer characteristics of the area.

Based on field studies in the study area

Biological Environment

9 Ecology Flora, Fauna, Avi-fauna

Through field visits during the Study period and substantiated by secondary sources (Forest Department).

Social Environment

10 Socio- aspects Socio- economic Based on primary data collected from socio economic survey carried out in the study area and secondary data collected from official websites and also from District Census Handbook, Vijayapur.

99

3.3.1 Land Environment

The district of Vijayapura is situated entirely on the Northern maidan area having

extensively undulating Plateau forming the northern part of the State and receives an

annual rainfall between 350 - 650 mm. It falls in the northern maidan region, between

15° 50´- 17° 28´ north latitudes and 74° 59´- 76°28´ east longitudes and lies between

two major rivers namely the Krishna and the Bhima. The district is bounded on the

north by Sholapur district of Maharashtra State, on the west by Belgaum district,

on the east by Gulbarga district and on the south by Bagalkot district of Karnataka.

Vijayapura district is land locked district and is accessible both by rail and road. The

broad gauge line of SW Railway connecting Hubli - Sholapur passes through the

district. The NH 13 Bangalore to Sholapur and NH-213 of Hubli-Sholapur pass

through the district. Vijayapura district is connected with other district headquarters

through state highways. An area covering 10 km radius, with project site as center, is

considered as the study area

Land use

The study has made use of various primary and secondary data. These include

Survey of India (SOI) topographic sheets of 47 P/7 of 1:50,000 scale and satellite

image IRS LISS III (PAN merged) geocoded data of 1:10,000 scale for the year 2013.

The Indian Remote Sensing Satellite (IRS) data was visually and digitally interpreted

by using the image interpretation elements (such as tone, texture, shape, pattern,

association etc.) and Arc GIS software was used for processing, analysis and

integration of spatial data to reach the objectives of the study. Adequate field checks

were made before finalization of the thematic maps. A digital elevation model (DEM)

is a digital model or 3D representation of a terrain's surface. It has been carried out

using Arc GIS software. Figure 3.2 shows the Land use/ Land cover map of the study

area, Figure 3.3 gives the Satellite Imagery of the study area and Figure 3.4 gives the

Digital elevation map of the study area, Figure 3.5 gives the contour map of the study

area.

Approach and Methods

High resolution satellite imageries from Karnataka State Remote Sensing Center

(KSRSC) Bangalore and then prepared land use maps for 10-km radius showing crop

land, forest, settlements, water bodies, vegetation etc. Geocoded False Colour

Composite scene of IRS-IC LISS III with PAN merged data on 1:10,000 scale

coinciding with Survey of India (SOI) Toposheet is used to prepare various thematic

maps and land use and land cover map of the present study.

For the purpose of study of land use/land cover ARC GIS 9.2 and ERDAS

IMAGINE9.1 are used for extracting the land use, land cover layers, from SOI

toposheets and satellite imageries. The land use/land cover classes include

http://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Northern_Maidan&action=edit&redlink=1

http://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=Northern_Maidan&action=edit&redlink=1

100

agriculture land forest, wetlands, settlements, built-up land etc. This classification and

methodology is performed based on the standard methodology. The feature classes

were identified based on the visual interpretation of the satellite imagery coupled

with field observations. These datasets were digitized and analyzed to obtain land

use/land cover statistics for the areas under each of these categories.

The study has made use of various primary and secondary data. These include

Survey of India (SOI) topographic sheets and satellite image IRS P6 LISS III (PAN

merged) geocoded data of 1:10,000 scale for the year 2016. The Indian Remote Sensing

Satellite (IRS) data was visually and digitally interpreted by using the image

interpretation elements (such as tone, texture, shape, pattern, association etc.) and Arc

GIS software was used for processing, analysis and integration of spatial data to reach

the objectives of the study. Adequate field checks were made before finalization of the

thematic maps.

All these thematic layers were scanned and vectorized using Geographical

Information System (GIS). The coverage created is edited to remove any possible

errors. All the features in the GIS coverage’s are assigned the attributes and GIS data

base is created as per the required objectives and the information needed to meet

them. The coverage’s are projected to polyconic projection. The coverage’s created

will have digitizer units for its tics. These values should be projected to real world

using latitude and longitude information.

101

Figure 3.2 :Land use/ Land cover map of the study area

102

Figure 3.3 : Satellite Imagery map of the study area

103

Figure 3.4 : Digital Elevation Map of the study area

104

Figure 3.5: Contour map of the study area

105

Inference

Majority of the project buffer area is crop land followed by scrub forest and built-

up area. The 10-km radius buffer area doesn’t have protected area or eco-sensitive

area. The Krishna River is flowing from West to east at 1.5 km distance from the

proposed project site. The land use of core zone reveals that majority of the area is

crop land (54.63%) followed by Fallow land (23.69 %). Land use/ land cover of the

study area are given below:

Table 3.3: Details of the land use pattern of study area

Sl No LULC Area(Km2) %

1 Agricultural Land 19107.33 54.63

2 Current Fallow Land 8286.48 23.69

3 Open Scrub 2562.99 7.33

4 Water body 956.15 2.73

5 Vegetation 1895.66 5.42

6 Open Waste Land 1435.34 4.1

7 Built-up Land 733.78 2.1 Total 34977.73 100

3.3.2 Soil Environment

Soil characteristics, erosion aspects, soil fertility etc., have direct bearing on the

environment. Knowledge of soil parameters is essential for the planning and

implementation of green-belt. Soil is the resultant product of rock materials and

climatic condition. It consists of mineral matter decaying organic matters and

microorganisms. Soil is one of the important natural resources of nature. This

provides bread and butter to human beings for survival. There is a relationship

between soil and vegetation, soil and climate, soil and slope and even climate and

slope, but all these factors co-operate in the production of the actual soil. No life

without soil and no soil without life they have evolved together. Millions of people

and plants life depends on the soil resources. It is one of the important factors for the

study of its varieties, properties and characteristics to the planners to know the spatial

variation in its distribution and its contribution in supporting above ground

vegetation and associated life farms.

Approach & Methods

Composite sampling technique is adopted for soil collection from the proposed

project area. A technique that combines a number of discrete samples collected from

a body of material into a single homogenized sample for the purpose of analysis. The

objective of composite soil sampling is to represent the average conditions in the

sampled body of material. Three samples in each direction of buffer zone were

collected then pooled into one composite sample. The same method followed for three

composite samples for core area. Soils types on the grounds were verified using soil

106

series classification adopted by National Bureau of Soil Survey and Land Use

Planning (NBSSLP) and soils maps of India developed by Maps of India. Soil physical

and chemical Characteristics were analyzed using the test methods of IS, USEPA and

Methods Manual for soil Testing, DAC- MOA, GOI, the test methods of the soil

parameters are given under Table 3.4.

Table 3.4: Test methods for Soil Analysis

Sl. No Parameter Test Methods

1 Colour -

2 Bulk Density IS:2720 ( Pat 3): 1980

3 pH IS:2720 ( Pat 26): 1987

4 Electrical Conductivity IS:14767-2000

5 Moisture Content IS:2720 ( Pat 2): 1973

6 Organic Matter IS:2720 ( Pat 22): 1972

7 Total Organic Carbon IS:2720 ( Pat 22): 1972

8 Cation Exchange Capacity USEPA SW846 9080

9 Water Holding Capacity ASTB- T7367-07

10 Sodium Adsorption Ration (SAR) UT/LQMS/SOP/S26

Dissolved Analytes

11 Calcium as Ca IS:3025 ( Pat 40): 1991

12 Magnesium as Mg IS:3025 ( Pat 46): 1994

13 Sodium as Na IS:3025 ( Pat 45): 1993

14 Potassium as K IS:3025 ( Pat 45): 1993

15 Sulphates as SO4 2- IS:3025 ( Pat 24): 1986

16 Chlorides as Cl- IS:3025 ( Pat 40): 1991

Exchangeable Cations

17 Exchangeable Calcium as Ca IS:3025 ( Pat 40): 1991

18 Exchangeable Magnesium as Mg IS:3025 ( Pat 46): 1994

19 Exchangeable Sodium as Na IS:3025 ( Pat 45): 1993

20 Exchangeable Potassium as K IS:3025 ( Pat 45): 1993

Available Nutrients

21 Available Nitrogen as N Methods Manual for soil Testing, DAC- MOA, GOI

22 Available Phosphorous as P2O5 Methods Manual for soil Testing, DAC- MOA, GOI

23 Available Potassium as K2O Methods Manual for soil Testing, DAC- MOA, GOI

Total Metals

24 Cadmium as Cd USEPA SW846 7130

25 Chromium as Cr USEPA SW846 7190

26 Copper as Cu USEPA SW846 7210

27 Cobalt as Co USEPA SW846 7200

28 Nickel as Ni USEPA SW846 7520

29 Lead as Pb USEPA SW846 7420

30 Manganese as Mn USEPA SW846 7460

31 Zinc as Zn USEPA SW846 7950

32 Iron Fe USEPA SW846 7380

107

A total of eight samples were collected during the study period, below mentioned

Table 3.5 are the sampling locations, one kg of top soil samples were collected by

means of augur and core cutter in polythene bags and sent to the laboratory for

analysis on the same day. Soil sampling locations are shown in the map appended as

Figure 3.6. Soil samples that were analyzed for physical and chemical parameters the

results of which are given in Table 3.6. Figure 3.7 shows the sampling of the

photographs of the Soil sampling.

Table 3.5: Details of Soil sampling location

Sl. No

Location Land Use Distance Direction

SQ1 Project area. Barren land Near Distillery Excise

office

- -

SQ2 Chikka - Hanchinal village

Agriculture Farm

Mr. Kaasar

Agriculture Farm

3.5 Kms NNW

SQ3 Kanabur village Agriculture Farm

Mr. Venkengowda

Patil Agriculture

Farm

1.8 Kms W

SQ4 Chikka-Galagali village

Agriculture Farm

Mr. Sainabji Mulla

Agriculture Farm

2.5 Kms SW

SQ5 Jambagi village Agriculture Farm

Mr. Koreadi

Agriculture Farm

3.0 Kms S

SQ6 Badgi village Agriculture Farm

Mr. Bassappa

Agriculture Farm

3.5 Kms ESE

SQ7 Girgaon village. Agriculture Farm

Mr. Walikar

Agriculture Farm

5.5 Kms E

SQ8 Sutagundi village

Agriculture Farm

Mr. Ashoke Alwade

Agriculture Farm

2.8 Kms ENE

108

Figure 3.6: Locations of Soil Sampling Stations

Figure 3.7: Photographs showing Soil sampling in the study area

SQ1

SQ6 SQ5

SQ4

SQ3

SQ2

SQ7

SQ8

N

109

Table 3.6: Soil Quality Analyses Sl. No Parameter Project

Site

Chikka - Hanchinal

Village

Kanabur

Village

Chikka-Galagali

Village

Jambagi

Village

Badgi

Village

Girgaon

Village

Sutagundi

Village

Unit

1 Colour Brown Brown Brown Brown Brown Brown Brown Brown -

2 Bulk Density 1070 1087 1077 1012 1026 1188 1104 1048 kg/m3

3 pH 7.8 8.5 8.2 8.2 8.1 8.4 8.3 7.8 --

4 Electrical Conductivity 0.984 0.234 0.426 0.119 0.222 0.492 0.778 0.576 mS/cm

5 Moisture Content 6.5 8.6 8.2 7.0 8.3 7.9 7 5.4 %

6 Organic Matter 0.9 1.6 0.8 2.0 1.6 0.9 7.8 1.8 %

7 Total Organic Carbon 0.5 0.9 0.4 1.1 0.9 0.5 1.0 1.0 %

8 Cation Exchange Capacity 14 21.6 14 20.7 12 18.7 23.4 23.3 meq/100g

9 Water Holding Capacity 51.6 60.1 55.6 68.5 54 59 55.5 47.4 %

10 Sodium Adsorption Ration (SAR) 2.7 3.8 3.3 3.6 1.9 5 1.5 1.6 (meq/kg)0.5

Dissolved Analytes

11 Calcium as Ca 364 127 95 48 79 111 143 190 mg/kg

12 Magnesium as Mg 115 67 48 19 67 29 87 125 mg/kg

13 Sodium as Na 137 213 156 116 97 230 89 117 mg/kg

14 Potassium as K 9 13 7 8 8 6 10 10 mg/kg

15 Sulphates as SO42- 253 376 436 469 124 442 28 173 mg/kg

16 Chlorides as Cl- 282 253 146 78 97 107 194 233 mg/kg

Exchangeable Cations

17 Exchangeable Calcium as Ca 0.051 0.446 0.023 0.438 0.016 0.209 0.565 0.561 mol/kg

18 Exchangeable Magnesium as Mg 0.028 0.107 0.019 0.035 0.016 0.134 0.146 0.111 mol/kg

19 Exchangeable Sodium as Na BDL 0.022 BDL 0.009 BDL 0.02 0.039 0.017 mol/kg

20 Exchangeable Potassium as K BDL 0.011 BDL 0.008 BDL 0.011 0.021 0.007 mol/kg

Available Nutrients

21 Available Nitrogen as N 109 142 205 174 116 247 227 65 kg/ha

22 Available Phosphorous as P2O5 106 339 227 160 230 222 125 70 kg/ha

23 Available Potassium as K2O 292 554 460 209 315 641 640 204 kg/ha

Total Metals

24 Cadmium as Cd BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL mg/kg

25 Chromium as Cr 61 47 BDL 97 BDL 84 34 96 mg/kg

26 Copper as Cu 45 103 42 66 1 72 153 2 mg/kg

27 Cobalt as Co 7 7 8 19 4 12 30 2 mg/kg

28 Nickel as Ni 28 28 14 38 38 56 82 24 mg/kg

29 Lead as Pb BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 65 BDL mg/kg

30 Manganese as Mn 428 376 392 417 500 461 465 265 mg/kg

31 Zinc as Zn 49 42 48 53 15 60 180 14 mg/kg

32 Iron Fe 20433 41062 37690 20849 59600 30927 41851 6781 mg/kg

110

Inference:

The analytical results of the soil samples collected during the study period are

summarized below.

The pH values in the study area are varying from 7.8 to 8.5 indicating that the soils are falling in normal to saline class.

The electrical conductivity in the study area is varying from 0.222 to 0.984 mS/cm indicating that soils falling under Normal category.

The organic carbon in the study area is varying from 0.4 to 1.1 %,

The Available Nutrients, Nitrogen as N value in the study area is varying from 65 kg/ha to 247 kg/ha indicating that it requires addition of nitrates for proper growth. In the study area Phosphorus as P2O5 is varying from 70 kg/ha to 339 kg/ha. The Available Potassium as K2O in the study area is varying between 204 kg/ha to 641 kg/ha.

The overall analytical results show that the nature of the soil is neutral. Test Reports

of soil analysis are enclosed as Annexure – 9.

3.3.3 Meteorology

The meteorological data recorded during the monitoring period is a useful tool for the

interpretation of the baseline condition as well as for the input, to predictive models

for air quality modeling and dispersion studies. Historical data on meteorological

parameters also plays an important role in identifying the general meteorological

status of the region.

The meteorological data for Bijapur District was obtained from two sources as stated

below, for Temperature, Relative Humidity, Rainfall, Wind speed and Wind direction

etc.

Bijapur Agrometeorological Services, University of Agricultural Sciences, Dharwad (primary source)

Modeling studies carried out using U.S. EPA AERMOD dispersion model, 1996 – 2012 Lakes Environmental Software, version 6.2.0. (Secondary source)

111

Table 3.7: Meteorological data of Bijapur Agro meteorological Services, University

of Agricultural Sciences, Dharwad (Monthly Mean values of the Year 2016)

Month Temperature

(0C)

Relative

humidity

(%)

Total

rainfall

(mm)

Rainy

days

Sunshine

duration

(hrs)

Wind

speed

(kmph)

Pan

evaporation

(mm/day)

Min Max AM PM

2016

Mar 19.0 37.1 47 23 1.52 0 9.4 4.9 8.8

Apr 23.1 38.0 65 29 67.5 2 7.5 7.0 8.6

May 23.5 39.0 81 40 7.8 1 8.1 12.7 10.5

June 22.6 35.1 86 57 26.0 3 7.5 16.4 8.0

July 22.1 31.8 84 57 72.4 4 4.0 16.9 6.0

Aug 21.4 31.5 86 55 60.0 4 5.1 15.9 5.4

Sept 20.7 31.1 87 54 73.3 7 5.1 11.0 4.6

Oct 20.8 32.1 82 50 70.8 4 6.9 5.6 4.7

Nov 16.1 30.9 73 38 0.0 0 8.2 5.1 4.5

Dec 14.9 31.4 77 35 0.0 0 7.7 3.2 4.1

2017

Jan 14.3 30.8 66 29 0.0 0 9.1 4.2 4.5

Feb 16.7 33.9 51 23 0.0 0 9.8 4.9 6.3

Mar 18.4 35.1 45 24 0.0 0 8.9 5.2 8.3

Meteorological data monitored at site for the study period

The meteorological factors affect a range of atmospheric characteristics and dispersal

of pollutants. These factors and their frequent changes control the gravity and

intensity of air pollution in an area and cause seasonal variations in horizontal as well

as vertical distribution and fate of respective pollutants. The essential meteorological

parameters are wind speed, wind direction, ambient air temperature, relative

humidity, rainfall, atmospheric pressure and mixing height. Meteorological

monitoring was carried out at project site during December 2016 to March 2017 for

parameters of Relative Humidity (%), Temperature (°C), Rainfall (mm), Wind

Direction (Deg), Wind Speed (km/hr) and atmospheric pressure (mb) and mixing

height (m).

112

Table 3.8: Site Specific Micro Meteorological data for the expansion project site for the period March 2016 to March 2017

Month Temperature 0C Relative

humidity %

Precipitat

ion rate

(mm/hr)

Atmospheric

Pressure (mb)

Wind

speed

(m/s)

Predominant

wind

direction

(blowing

from)

Inversion /

mixing height

(m)

Cloud cover

(tenths)

Min Max Min Max Max Min Max Max Day Night Min Max

2016

Mar 15.2 33.5 20 45 1.52 939 948 5.7 E 2842 757 2 10

Apr 19.2 35.2 18 67 2.79 938 949 7.7 NW 3500 1084 2 3

May 19.2 36.5 16 79 1.52 937 945 8.2 NW 3551 1212 2 3

June 19.5 33.2 32 84 3.05 936 943 9.8 W & SW 2879 1543 2 10

July 20.2 32.4 42 86 10.16 934 944 10.8 SW & W 2680 1735 3 10

Aug 19.5 32.5 40 81 6.86 937 944 10.8 W & SW 2673 1728 3 10

Sept 17.2 31.8 25 85 4.32 935 946 10.8 SW 2716 1796 2 10

Oct 20.1 33 28 70 2.29 940 947 6.7 NE & SE 2928 901 2 5

Nov 16.9 29.9 28 72 0.76 942 949 7.2 E & NE 2448 1032 2 8

Dec 13.5 29.8 27 79 0 942 949 7.7 E & SE 2140 1052 2 10

2017

Jan 13.8 27.8 17 68 0.51 941 950 5.7 NE 2269 719 2 10

Feb 15.9 31.2 25 49 1.02 939 949 6.2 SE 2802 732 2 10

Mar 14.9 33.0 18 48 1.21 938 949 4.9 E & SE 2872 809 2 10

113

Temperature

Temperature varies from season to season. Highest mean temperature in the month,

recorded in May, was 36.5°C. From November to January, both day and night

temperatures begin to decrease rapidly. December is generally the coldest month,

with mean temperature 13.5 °C. During the Study season, the lowest temperatures

remain between 13.5 ºC to 15.9 ºC and highest temperature being 27.8 ºC to 33.0 ºC.

Relative Humidity (RH)

Most humid conditions are found in the monsoon season. Thereafter, it decreases

gradually during post monsoon, winter and summer season in that order. Mornings

are more humid than evenings and humidity ranges from high of 84-86% in monsoon

mornings to low of 16 - 18% in summer. During study season, morning humidity

remains between 68 - 79%. Values are appended in Table 3.8

Rainfall

The monsoon in this region usually occurs twice in a year i.e. from June to September

and from October to November. The maximum annual rate of precipitation over this

region ranges between 0 to 10.16 mm/hr. Values are appended in Table 3.8

Atmospheric pressure

The maximum and the minimum atmospheric pressures are recorded during all

seasons. In the summer season, the mean maximum and minimum pressure values

are observed to be 949 mb in the month of April and 937 mb in the month of May

respectively. During monsoon season, the maximum pressure is 944 mb and

minimum 934 mb both in the month of July. During the Post monsoon season the

minimum and maximum atmospheric pressure is 935 mb and 946 mb in the month of

September. The maximum pressure during the study season is observed to be 950 mb

in January. Values are appended in Table 3.8.

Inversion height

The maximum inversion heights at the project site during the day time & night time

for all the months of the year is as given in the Table 3.8. The maximum mixing height

of 3551 m is observed during the month of May during the day time and 1796 m

during the month of September during the night time. During the study period the

minimum inversion heights are 2872 m during the day in March & 1052 m during the

night in the month of December.

Cloud cover

The minimum cover measured in the unit of tenths is 2 and the maximum observed

cloud cover is 10.

114

Wind

The data on wind patterns are pictorially represented by means of wind rose

diagrams, for the study period majority of the wind is blowing from east direction at

an average wind speed of 3.98 m/s. The wind rose diagram of the study season is

represented in Figure: 3.8

Figure 3.8: Wind rose Diagram for the Period 15th December 2016 – 15th March 2017

3.3.4 Ambient Air Quality

The study area includes residential and agricultural environment. Ambient Air

Quality Monitoring was carried out at eight locations within 10 Kms radius study

area including Project site, Up-wing and downwind direction. The results are

tabulated below. The National Ambient Air Quality standard is given in the following

table.

This section describes the selection of sampling locations, methodology adopted for

sampling, analytical techniques and frequency of sampling.

Table 3.9: Test methods adopted for ambient air quality monitoring

Sl.

No

Parameters Techniques Technical

Protocol

Minimum

detectable limits

as provided by lab

1 Sulphur Dioxide (SO2) West & Gaeke IS:5182 (P2) 4 mcg

2 Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2) Jacob & Hochheiser IS:5182 (P6) 1 mcg

115

3 Particulate Matter PM10 Gravimetric IS:5182 (P15) 5 mcg

4 Particulate Matter PM2.5 Gravimetric - 5 mcg

5 Carbon monoxide as CO NDIR IS: 5182 (P-10) 10 mcg

Selection of Sampling Stations

The baseline status of the ambient air quality has been assessed through a

scientifically designed ambient air quality-monitoring network. The design of

monitoring network in the air quality surveillance program has been based on the

following considerations:

Meteorological conditions on synoptic scale.

Topography of the study area.

Representatives of regional background air quality for obtaining baseline status.

Representatives of likely impact areas.

Overall planning and network designing of complete ambient monitoring program was carried through field planning.

The budget, minimum monitoring requirements, and its objective adequacy criteria was first established during monitoring network-planning stage.

Principal factors governing the selection of locations of the sampling stations were depending on the objectives of air quality monitoring i.e for EIA studies, the particular method of instrument used for sampling, resources availability, physical access and security against loss and tampering.

Recommended Criteria for Siting Monitoring Stations as per: IS: 5182 (Part 14), 2000 was followed.

The stations were selected at a place where interferences are not present or anticipated.

Height of the inlet was maintained at 3 ± 0.5 m above the ground.

The sampler was kept more than 20 m away from trees.

There was unrestricted airflow in three of four quadrants.

There was no nearby furnace or incinerator fumes.

The sampling stations selected were away from major pollution sources, and

The site was available for a long period of time.

In order to establish the baseline air quality status in a study area, about 8 ambient air

quality stations were selected in and around the 10 Kms radius study area of the

proposed expansion project site including Project site, Up-wing and downwind

direction. These stations were selected on the basis of even distribution over the study

area taking in to consideration various factors like topography of the region,

proximity of sensitive establishment and human settlements, industrial activities

in the area and its proximity, down wind direction etc. The details of these Ambient

Air quality-sampling stations are given below.

116

Table 3.10: Details of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Locations

Sl. No Location Distance Wind Direction

AAQ1 Project area. Near Entrance gate -- -- --

AAQ2 Chikka-Hanchinal

village

Near Eshwara Temple 3.5 Kms Downwind

direction

NW

AAQ3 Kanabur village Near Mr.R.T Patils’s

house

1.8 Kms Downwind

direction

W

AAQ4 Chikka-Galagali

village

Near Babu Gowda

Nidoni House

2.5 Kms Downwind

direction

SW

AAQ5 Yadahalli Village Near Mr. K.V Patil

Farm house

5.5 Kms Downwind

direction

SSW

AAQ6 Badgi village Near Government

School

3.5 Kms Upwind

direction

ESE

AAQ7 Girgaon village Near Temple 5.5 Kms Upwind

direction

E

AAQ8 Sutagundi village Near Mr. Rudrappa

Galagali house

2.8 Kms Upwind

direction

ENE

117

Figure 3.9: Location of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring Stations

Methodology adopted for Air Quality Survey

The baseline data of air environment is generated for all the parameters as per NAAQ,

2009

Duration of Sampling: The duration of sampling is on 24 hourly basis for all the parameters except Carbon monoxide which is monitored for 1 hourly basis. This is to allow a comparison with the present revised standards mentioned in the latest Gazette notification of the Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) (JULY 20, 2002).

Method of Analysis: The air samples are analyzed as per standard methods specified by Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB), Indian Standards: 5184 and American Public Health Organization (APHA).

Sampling and Analytical Techniques The analysis techniques used in the

laboratory is as per NAAQ, 2009

AAQ1

AAQ2

AAQ3

AAQ4

AAQ5

AAQ6

AAQ7

AAQ8

N

118

Figure 3.10: Photographs showing Ambient Air Monitoring stations

Figure: 3.11: Flow Chart showing AAQM Methodology

Results of Ambient Air Quality Monitoring done in a radius of 10 Kms is sited in

Table 3.11, Test Reports of Ambient Air Quality are enclosed as Annexure– 9.

Table 3.11: Ambient Air Quality status

Particulars PM10 PM2.5 SO2 NOX CO

Permissible NAAQS Limit

100

(µg/m3) 60

(µg/m3)

80

(µg/m3)

80

(µg/m3)

4

(mg/m3)

AAQ1 Average 86 35 16 24 1.4

Min. 81 31 11 15 1.2

Max. 92 42 21 31 1.7

98 % Value 92 42 21 31 1.7

AAQ2

Average 75 32 23 30 1.0

Min. 71 25 19 23 0.8

119

Max. 85 38 27 36 1.1

98 % Value 85 38 27 36 1.1 AAQ3 Average 84 34 21 28 1.1

Min. 78 26 18 21 1.0

Max. 92 42 25 32 1.2

98 % Value 90 41 25 32 1.2

AAQ4 Average 86 40 21 29 0.6

Min. 79 32 18 24 0.5

Max. 95 48 29 32 0.7

98 % Value 95 48 27 32 0.7

AAQ5 Average 88 33 15 23 0.8

Min. 85 28 11 19 0.6

Max. 94 38 21 29 1.1


Min. 59 25 11 16 0.5

Max. 78 36 15 25 0.9


Min. 68 25 10 15 0.5

Max. 87 38 17 23 0.9

98 % Value 85 38 17 23 0.9

AAQ8 Average 72 21 17 24 0.7

Min. 59 15 15 21 0.5

Max. 81 28 21 29 0.9

98 % Value 81 27 21 29 0.9

a. Particulate Matter <2.5µ & <10µ

The NAAQ standards fixed for PM10 is 100 µg/m3and PM2.5 is 60 µg/m3. Excessive

exposure to PM can cause lung problems, breathing difficulties.The minimum and

maximum level of Particulate Matter < 2.5µ recorded within the study area were in

the range of 15 to 48 µg/m 3. The minimum and maximum level of Particulate Matter

< 10µ recorded within the study area were in the range of 59 to 95 µg/m 3. The 24

hourly average values of Particulate Matter <2.5µ & Particulate Matter <10µ were

compared with the national ambient air quality standards and found that all

sampling stations recorded values within the applicable limits of residential and rural

area limits for all locations in study area.

b. Sulphur dioxide

Sulfur dioxide is capable of producing illness and lung injury. Further it can

combine with water in the air to form toxic acid aerosols that can corrode metal

surfaces, fabrics and the leaves of plants. Sulfur dioxide is irritating to the eyes and

respiratory system. Excessive exposure to sulfur dioxide causes bronchial asthma and

other breathing related diseases as it affects the lungs. The minimum and maximum

120

level of SO2 recorded within the study area was in the range of 10 µg/m 3 to 29

µg/m 3. The 24 hourly average values of SO2 were compared with the national

ambient air quality standards and it was found that all sampling stations recorded

values much lower than the applicable limit of 80 µg/m 3for industrial, residential

and rural areas.

c. Oxides of Nitrogen

Oxides of Nitrogen are also an inorganic gaseous pollutant like Sulfur dioxide. Oxides

of Nitrogen emissions are expected to be emitted wherever combustion at high

temperatures takes place. Nitrous oxide and nitric acid mist are the other important

pollutants in the inorganic nitrogen group.

In general some of the important sources of oxides of nitrogen are boilers (Utilities) in

any industry and Auto exhaust. NOx in the presence of sunlight will undergo

reactions with a number of organic compounds to produce all the effects associated

with photochemical smog. NOx has inherent ability to produce deleterious effects by

themselves like toxicity. It acts as an asphyxiate when in concentrations great enough

to reduce the normal oxygen supply from the air. The minimum and maximum level

of NOx recorded within the study area was in the range of 15 µg/m 3 to 36 µg/m 3.

The 24 hourly average values of NOx were compared with the national ambient air

quality standards and it was found that all the sampling stations recorded values

much lower than the applicable limit of 80 µg/m 3.

d. Carbon Monoxide

Carbon monoxide is a colorless, odorless, and tasteless gas that is slightly lighter than

air. It can be toxic to humans and animals when encountered in higher concentrations,

although it is also produced in normal animal metabolism in low quantities, and is

thought to have some normal biological functions. In the atmosphere however, it is

short lived and spatially variable, since it combines with oxygen to form carbon

dioxide and for industrial, residential and rural areas.

Carbon monoxide is formed due to partial oxidation of carbon- containing

compounds; it forms when there is not enough oxygen to produce carbon dioxide

(CO2), such as when operating a stove or an internal combustion engine in an

enclosed space. In the presence of oxygen, carbon monoxide burns with a blue flame.

Worldwide, the largest source of carbon monoxide is natural in origin is due to

photochemical reactions in the troposphere. Other natural sources of CO include

volcanoes, forest fires, and other forms of combustion. The major man made source is

mobile sources (Vehicles on road) and non-road sources are gasoline and diesel

powered vehicles, engines, and equipment used for construction, agriculture,

recreation, and many other purposes.

The minimum and maximum level of CO recorded within the study area was in

the range of 0.5 µg/m 3 to 1.7 µg/m 3.

121

Traffic Study:

Transportation due to the Proposed Project

Personnel

During construction period a maximum of about 200 people will be visiting the

industry including, construction works, suppliers of material and related activities.

They use company vehicle facilities, public transportation and own vehicles. Total of

about 24 buses/cars and about 60 two-wheelers will be used for transportation of

personnel. Temporary sheds will be provided for accommodation of these workers

during construction period.

During operation phase a maximum of about 847 people (After expansion) are

expected in the industry including employees, farmers and other visitors. A total of

about 157 buses/cars and two wheelers will be used for transportation of personnel.

Material

Maximum construction material transported per day will be about 60 loads gravel, 60

loads sand, 60 loads boulders/jelly/bricks and 3 load steel in addition to about 7

loads of plant machinery.

During operation, a maximum of about 976 per day of lorry/tankers/tractor/carts are

moving to the industry to carry raw material sugarcane, products sugar, bio-manure,

alcohol and other material. In addition, about 10 lorries/tractors will be working in

the industry for internal movement of material.

A detail Traffic Analysis report is enclosed as Annexure- 19

3.3.5 Noise Levels

Various noise scales have been introduced to describe, in a single number, the

response of an average human being to a complex sound made up of various

frequencies at different loudness levels. The most common and heavily favored of

these scales is the A weighted decibel dB (A). The scale has been designed to weigh

various components of noise according to the response of a human ear.

The impact of noise sources on surrounding community depends on:

Characteristics of noise sources (instantaneous, intermittent or continuous in

nature). It is well known that a steady noise is not as annoying as one, that is

continuously varying in loudness;

The time of day at which noise occurs, for example loud noise levels at

night in residential areas are not acceptable because of sleep disturbance;

The location of the noise sources, with respect to noise sensitive land use,

which determines the loudness and period of noise exposure.

The environmental impact assessment of noise for the proposed expansion project

was carried out by taking various factors into consideration like potential

122

physiological responses, annoyance and general community responses and also the

existing status of noise levels within the study area. Existing noise levels have been

monitored at different places within the study area. Following criteria was followed

for selection of sampling locations within the study area.

Google map or aerial view of the study area covering 10 Km radius was

prepared.

Apart from the project site, 7 locations were selected, which also covered

Residential/Commercial/ Industrial or any other important areas where the

noise reading were required.

For every one hour interval the readings were obtained continuously for 24

hours (Day and Night).

Ambient Noise Level Monitoring conducted at 8 locations in and around the

proposed project site within 10 Kms radius study area for parameters like Leq Day dB

(A) and Leq Night dB(A). A sound level meter was used for measuring the noise

level at one-hour interval continuously for 24 hrs at 1.5 m above ground level, about 3

m from walls, buildings or other sound reflecting sources. Details of the monitoring

locations are given under Table 3.12. Noise Monitoring locations are shown in the

map appended as Figure 3.12; Figure 3.13 shows the Monitoring photographs of

Noise.

Table 3.12: Details of Noise Monitoring Locations

Sl. No. Location Distance Direction

ANQ1 Project area Near Entrance gate

- -

ANQ2 Chikka-Hanchinal village

Near Eshwara Temple 3.5 Kms NW

ANQ3 Kanabur village Near Mr.R.T Patils’s

house 1.8 Kms W

ANQ4 Chikka-Galagali village

Near Babu Gowda

Nidoni House 2.5 Kms SW

ANQ5 Yadahalli village Near Mr. K.V Patil Farm

house 5.5 Kms SSW

ANQ6 Badgi village Near Government School

3.5 Kms ESE

ANQ7 Girgaon village Near Temple

5.5 Kms E

ANQ8 Sutagundi village Near Mr. Rudrappa

Galagali house 2.8 Kms ENE

123

ANQ1

ANQ6

ANQ7

ANQ8

ANQ4

ANQ3

ANQ2

ANQ5

Figure 3.12: Location of Ambient Noise Level Monitoring Stations

Figure 3.13: Ambient Noise monitoring Photographs

N

124

Methodology for noise measurement

For Noise levels measured over a given period of time, it is possible to describe

important features of noise using statistical quantities. This is calculated using the

percent of time as certain noise levels exceed accordingly in the specified time

interval. The notations for the statistical quantities of noise levels are given below:

L10 is the noise level exceeded in 10% of time.

L50 is the noise level exceeded in 50% of the time and

L90 is the noise level exceeded in 90% of the time.

Equivalent Sound Pressure Level (Leq ):

The Leq is the equivalent continuous sound level, which is equivalent to the same

sound energy as the actual fluctuating sound measured in the same period. This is

necessary because sound from noise sources often fluctuates widely during a given

period of time.

This is calculated from the following equation

Leq =L50 + (L10 –L90 )2/60

Lday is defined as the equivalent noise level measured over a period of time during

day time (6 am to 10 pm). Lnight is defined as the equivalent noise level measured

over a period of time during night time (10 pm to 6 am).

A noise rating developed by US Environment Protection Agency, for specification of

community noise from all the sources is Day-Night Sound Level, (Ldn ).

Hourly noise recorded data and Lday values (15 hours) Lnight (9 hours) and Ldn

(24 hours) are computed and tabulated.

Day–Night Sound levels (Ldn ):

The noise rating developed for community noise from all sources is the Day-

Night Sound Level, (Ldn ). It is similar to a 24 hour equivalent sound level except

that during night time (10 pm to 6 am), a 10 dB (A) weighting penalty is added to the

instantaneous sound level before computing the 24 hour average.

This time penalty is added to account for the fact that noise during night when

people usually sleep is judged as more annoying than the same noise during the

daytime.

The Ldn for a given location in a community may be calculated from the hourly

Leq , by the following equation

Ldn = 10 log {1/24 [15(10 Ld/10) + 9 (10 (Ln + 10) /10)]}

Where Ld is the equivalent sound level during the day time (6 am to 10 pm) and

Ln is the equivalent sound level during the night time (10 pm to 6 am).

125

The measurements were carried out in such a way that the monitoring locations were 1

m away from the sources and 1 m away from the edge of the roads. The average noise

levels of Day time (Leq) and Night Time (Leq ) are presented in Table 3.13 and the

limits as per Environmental Protection Rules, 1986 for both industrial, commercial &

residential areas are presented in table 3.14 as under. Test Reports of Ambient Noise

Quality are enclosed as Annexure–9.

Table 3.13: Ambient Noise Level Monitoring Results

Locations ANQ1 ANQ2 ANQ3 ANQ4 ANQ5 ANQ6 ANQ7 ANQ8

Day time Ld(dB(A))

64.3 54.8 54.7 54.9 54.0 54.1 52.5 52.9

Night Time Ln(dB(A))

52.6 42.1 44.5 42.8 42.8 43.1 43.6 43.4

Table 3.14: Limits as per Environmental Protection Rules

Limits as per Env. Protection Rules, 1986 in dB(A)Leq

Industrial area Commercial area Residential area

Day Night Day Night Day Night

75 70 65 55 55 45

Inference

The baseline noise levels have been monitored at different locations as indicated in the

table above. The noise levels in the study area vary between 52.5 – 64.3 dB (A) during

Day and at night 42.1 -52.6 dB (A). It has been observed that the maximum noise levels

at all the locations are within the limits specified for industrial/residential areas.

3.3.6 Water Environment

Water sources in the study area

The impact has been assessed on randomly selected surface and ground water sources

falling within the impact zone.

In order to assess the existing water quality, the water samples were collected from

eight different locations within the study area (Figure 3.16) and analyzed as per the

procedure specified in standard methods for examination of water and wastewater

published by American Public Health Association and Bureau of Indian Standards

(APHA/BIS). Samples for the analysis were collected in polyethylene containers.

Samples collected for metal content were acidified with 1 ml HNO3. Samples for

biological analysis were collected in sterilized glass bottles. Selected physico-chemical

and biological parameters have been analyzed for projecting the existing water quality

126

status in the study area. Parameters like temperature, Dissolved Oxygen (DO), and

pH were analyzed at the time of sample collection. Name of the locations, orientation

with respect to the project site are listed in the table 3.15 along with the type of source.

The analytical data for water quality with respect to surface and Ground water quality

has been tabulated in table 3.18 & 3.17.

Sources of water pollution in the study area

No major source found except from villages due to improper discharge of sewage as

majority of the households in all the villages were inadequate with sanitation

facilities. Outside defecation practiced. The same can be traced on the banks of river.

Few residential settlements observed with Septic Tank and Soak pit. Since agriculture

being the major occupation, usage of fertilizers and its applications on fields in excess

can be anticipated for pollution of surface source. Considering all these, water

quality has been examined to ascertain the existing baseline data.

About eight groundwater (Bore well water) samples were collected from the study

area and have been analyzed for various physical, chemical, & bacteriological

parameters. This assessment may also serve as a baseline to compare with

the post establishment data for taking necessary corrective measures;.

Methodology for collection of samples

Composite surface and ground water samples were collected at each location by

following CPCB guidelines. Climate influenced physical parameters such as

Temperature and pH were recorded at site itself. Ground water samples from the

production tube wells were collected after running the well for about 5 minutes.

Adequate parameter wise preservatives were added to the samples and collected

samples were brought to the laboratory by maintaining 4°C in the insulated ice boxes.

Separate sterilized bottles were used for collection of water samples for microbial

analysis.

Figure 3.14 : Surface Water sampling photographs

127

Figure: 3.15 Ground Water sampling photographs

Surface and Ground water quality

Status of Surface Water quality in the study area

The major fresh water source within the study zone is Krishna river. The water

requirement for the proposed integrated sugar complex will be sourced from Almatti

dam/Krishna River. The supply of water to the industry will be metered for its

quantification. The quality of the river water was analyzed; the results of the analysis

of surface water samples are appended as table 3.18

Regarding ground water, the baseline water quality sampling network was

established for 8 locations (bore well).

The details of the sampling locations for Surface and groundwater are as follows;

Criteria for selection of sampling locations

Following criteria were followed for selection of sampling stations;

Land use/ topography of the area.

Nearby probable effluent disposal sources from industrial areas & households.

Accessibility to the sampling station with undisturbed flow of water/ stagnant

water.

Protocol for analysis of ground water quality and Surface water is given under Table

3.15

128

Table 3.15: Details of Water Quality Sampling Stations

Sl. No. Location Distance Direction Source Field Observations

GWQ1 Project area - - Borewell Water near Guest House

Not being used

GWQ2 Chikka-Hanchinal village

3.5 Kms NNW Borewell Water near Temple

This water being used for domestic applications including for drinking by the villagers.

GWQ3 Kanabur village

1.8 Kms W Borewell Water near Temple

The water being used for domestic applications including for drinking by the villagers.

GWQ4 Chikka-Galagali village

2.5 Kms SW Borewell Water near School


GWQ5 Jambagi village

3.0 Kms S Borewell Water near Koreddy House


GWQ6 Badgi village

3.5 Kms ESE Borewell water at Agriculture Farm


GWQ7 Girgaon village

5.5 Kms E Borewell water near Temple


GWQ8 Sutagundi vilage

2.8 Kms ENE Borewell water at Agriculture Farm


SWQ1 Krishna river, Near Chowdapur village. (Upstream)

2.4 Kms W River Water This water being used for domestic applications including for drinking by the villagers and Irrigation purpose.

129

SWQ2 Krishna river, Near Galagali village. (Down Stream)

3.5 Kms SSW River Water This water being used for domestic applications including for drinking by the villagers and Irrigation purpose.

SWQ3 Krishna river, Near Jambagi village. (Down Stream)

3.0 Kms S River Water This water being used for domestic applications including for drinking by the villagers and Irrigation purpose.

SWQ4 Krishna river/ Alamatti reservoir back water, near Sutagundi village

3.5 Kms E River Water This water being used for domestic applications including for drinking by the villagers and Irrigation purpose.

Selected water quality parameters of ground water resources within 10 km radius of

the study area has been studied for assessing the water environment and evaluate

anticipated impact of the proposed project.

Understanding the water quality is essential in preparation of Environmental

Impact Assessment and to identify critical issues with a view to suggest

appropriate mitigation measures for implementation. The purpose of this study is to:

Assess the water quality characteristics.

Evaluate the impacts on agriculture productivity, habitat conditions,

recreational resources and aesthetics in the vicinity.

Predict impact on water quality due to this project and related activities.

Reconnaissance survey was undertaken and monitoring locations were finalized

based on Location of watercourses.

Location of residential areas representing different activity/ likely impact areas.

Likely areas that can represent baseline conditions.

130

SWQ1

SWQ3

SWQ4

SWQ2

GWQ1

GWQ2

GWQ3

GWQ4 GWQ5 GWQ6

GWQ7

GWQ8

Figure 3.16: Locations of Water Quality Sampling Stations

Table 3.16 (a): Protocol for ground water quality analysis

Sl. No. Test Parameter Test Method Unit

1 Color IS 3025 (Part 04) 1983 Hazen

2 Odor lS 3025 (Part 05) I983 -

3 Temperature IS 3025 (Part 09) 1984 0C

4 pH IS 3025 (Part 11) 1983 -

5 Electrical Conductivity IS 3025 (Part 14) : 1984 uS/cm

6 Total Dissolved Solids IS 3025 (Part 16):1984 mg/L

7 Total Alkalinity IS 3025 (Part 23):1986 mg/L

8 Total Hardness IS 3025 (Part 21):2009 mg/L

9 Amonical Nitrogen IS 3025 (Part 34):1988 mg/L

10 Nitrite Nitrogen as NO3 -N lS 3025 (Pa(t 34) 1988 mg/L

11 Nitrate Nitrogen as NO2 -N lS 3025 (Pa(t 34) 1988 mg/L

N

131

12 Total Phosphates as P043- IS 3025 (Part 31) 1988 mg/L

13 Potassium as K IS 3025 (Part 45) 1993 mg/L

14 Sodium as Na IS 3025 (Part 45) 1993 mg/L

15 Calcium as Ca lS 3025 (Part40 ) I991 mg/L

16 Magnesium as Mg IS 3025 (Part 46)1994 mg/L

17 Carbonate as Col_ IS 3025 (Part 51] : 2001 mg/L

18 Bicarbonate as HC03 IS 3025 (Part 51) : 2001 mg/L

19 Chloride as Cl- lS 3025 (Part 32) : 1988 mg/L

20 Sulphate as So42- lS 3025 (Part 24) 1986 mg/L

21 Silica as Sio2 lS 3025 (Part 35) 1988

22 Fluoride as F- IS 3025 (Part 60):2008 mg/L

23 Boron as B APHA, 22"d Ed.. 2012, 4500-BB

mg/L

Table 3.16 (b): Protocol for surface water quality analysis

Sl. No. Test Parameter Test Method Unit

1 Color IS 3025 (Part 04) 1983 Hazen

2 Odor lS 3025 (Part 05) I983 -

3 Temperature IS 3025 (Part 09) 1984 0C

4 pH IS 3025 (Part 11) 1983 -

5 Electrical Conductivity IS 3025 (Part 14) : 1984 uS/cm

6 Dissolved 0xygen IS 3025 (Part 16) : 1989 mg/L

7 Total Hardness IS 3025 (Part 21) : 2009 mg/L

8 Turbidity lS 3025 (Part 10) 1984 NTU

9 Total Dissolved solids IS 3025 (Part 16):1984 mg/L

10 Ammonical Nitrogen as NH+N lS 3025 (Pa(t 34) 1988 mg/L

11 Nitrite Nitrogen as N0, -N IS 3025 (Part 34) 1988 mg/L

12 Nitrate Nitrogen as NOr -N lS 3025 (Pa(t 34) 1988 mg/L

13 Total Phosphates as P0a3 IS 3025 (Part 31) 1988 mg/L

14 Biochemical oxygen Demand (270C. 3Davs)

IS 3025 (Part 44) : 1993 mg/L

15 Chemical oxygen Demand IS 3025 (Part 5B) :2006 mg/L

16 Potassium as K IS 3025 (Part 45) 1993 mg/L

17 Sodium as Na IS 3025 (Part 45) 1993 mg/L

18 Calcium as Ca lS 3025 (Part40 : I991 mg/L

19 Magnesium as Mg IS 3025 (Part 46):1994 mg/L

20 Carbonate as Col_ IS 3025 (Part 51] : 2001 mg/L

21 Bicarbonate as HC03 IS 3025 (Part 51) : 2001 mg/L

22 Chloride as Cl lS 3025 (Part 32) : 1988 mg/L

132

23 Sulphate as So42- lS 3025 (Part 24) 1986 mg/L

24 Fluoride as ( IS 3025 (Part 60):2008 mg/L

25 Boron as B APHA, 22"d Ed. 2012, 4500-8 B

mg/L

26 Total coliform Bacteria lS 1622 : 1981 MPN/100 ml

27 Fecal coliform lS 1622 : 1981 MPN/100 ml

28 E Coli lS 1622 : 1981 MPN/100 ml

133

Table 3.17: Results of Ground Water quality

Sr. No. Parameter GWQ1 GWQ2 GWQ3 GWQ4 GWQ5 GWQ6 GWQ7 GWQ8 Detection Limit Unit

A. General 1 Colour BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 5 Hazen

2 Odour Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable - -

3 Temperature 26.9 27.8 27.3 27.1 27.5 27.3 27.0 27.5 0.1 0C

4 pH* 7.7 7.7 7.6 7.7 7.7 7.8 7.7 7.8 0.1 -

5 Electrical Conductivity* 1129 2224 3043 757 834 649 1842 1351 2 µS/cm

6 Turbidity 1.2 2.1 1.9 1.2 2.1 2.3 2.4 2.4 0.1 NTU

7 Total Hardness as CaCO3* 395 886 1125 308 325 229 703 516 1 mg/L

8 Total Alkalinity as CaCO3* 145 361 451 286 286 128 317 290 1 mg/L

9 Total Dissolved Solids* 734 1452 1978 564 542 422 1248 878 5 mg/L

B. Nutrients

10 Nitrate Nitrogen as NO3--N 3.31 6.12 9.25 1.82 2.32 BDL 7.12 5.25 0.1 mg/L

11 Nitrite Nitrogen as NO2--N 0.009 BDL BDL 0.012 BDL BDL 0.007 0.008 0.001

12 Total Phosphate as PO4-3 0.21 BDL 0.04 0.12 0.09 0.09 0.06 0.17 0.03 mg/L

C. Major Ions

13 Potassium as K 4.8 15.4 8.4 4.1 3.5 3.9 8.1 6.3 0.1 mg/L

14 Sodium as Na 84.6 154.8 241.5 48.9 55.6 47.9 124.5 102.3 0.1 mg/L

15 Calcium as Ca* 90 242 284 73 57 38 158 125 1 mg/L

16 Magnesium as Mg* 42 69 101 30 45 32 75 50 1 mg/L

17 Carbonates as CO3-2 BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL 1 mg/L

18 Bicarbonates as HCO3- 145 361 451 286 286 128 317 290 1# mg/L

19 Chlorides as Cl-* 123 262 342 80 82 80 211 153 1 mg/L

20 Sulphates as SO4-2 271 480 658 71 99 115 368 240 1 mg/L

D. Other Inorganics

21 Fluoride as F- 0.52 0.68 0.48 0.56 0.48 0.47 0.68 0.38 0.05 mg/L

22 Boron as B 0.3 0.3 0.2 0.3 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.1 mg/L

134

Table 3.18: Results of Surface Water quality Sr. No. Parameter SWQ1 SWQ2 SWQ3 SWQ4 Detection Limit Unit A. General

1 Colour BDL BDL BDL BDL 5 Hazen

2 Odour Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable Agreeable - -

3 Temperature 26.5 26.8 26.5 26.3 0.1 0C

4 pH* 7.5 7.7 7.7 7.7 0.1 -

5 Electrical Conductivity* 1674 575 532 517 2 µS/cm

6 Dissolved Oxygen* 5.6 5.7 5.9 5.8 0.1 mg/L

7 Turbidity 2.6 2.6 1.9 2.2 0.1 NTU

8 Total Hardness as CaCO3* 466 191 177 185 1 mg/L

9 Total Alkalinity as CaCO3* 361 119 143 114 1 mg/L

10 Total Dissolved Solids* 1088 374 346 336 5 mg/L

B. Nutrients

11 Nitrate Nitrogen as NO3--N 4.1 BDL BDL 0.52 0.1 mg/L

12 Nitrite Nitrogen as NO2--N 0.012 0.017 BDL 0.005 0.001

13 Total Phosphate as PO4-3 0.46 0.2 BDL 0.05 0.03 mg/L

C. Organic Matter

14 Biochemical Oxygen Demand @ 27 0C, 3 days 2.8 2.4 2.3 2.5 2 mg/L

15 Chemical Oxygen Demand* 20 18 16 20 2 mg/L

D. Major Ions

16 Potassium as K 4.8 15.4 8.4 2.9 0.1 mg/L

17 Sodium as Na 84.6 154.8 241.5 35.4 0.1 mg/L

18 Calcium as Ca* 90 242 284 37 1 mg/L

19 Magnesium as Mg* 42 69 101 23 1 mg/L

20 Carbonates as CO3-2 BDL BDL BDL BDL 1# mg/L

21 Bicarbonates as HCO3- 145 361 451 114 1 mg/L

22 Chlorides as Cl-* 123 262 342 59 1 mg/L

23 Sulphates as SO4-2 271 480 658 86 1 mg/L

E. Other Inorganics

24 Fluoride as F- 0.52 0.43 0.36 0.42 0.05 mg/L

25 Boron as B 0.29 0.34 0.27 0.24 0.1 mg/L

F. Microbiological

26 E. Coli Absent Absent Absent Absent Absent -

27 F. Coli 50 17 13 30 2 MPN/100 mL

28 Total Coliform 220 170 140 240 2 MPN/100 mL

135

Inference

Protocol adopted for testing were as specified under APHA, 22nd Edition, various IS

methods and USEPA. The measured results/values of the samples tested were

compared with IS 10500:2012 (Second Revision) standards for all the samples

including the surface water samples in view of the absence of latest Tolerance

limits for inland surface subject to pollution as currently IS 2296 is inactive for its

use as per BIS. Test Reports of Surface and Ground water Quality are enclosed as

Annexure– 9.

Table 3.19: Inference drawn for water quality

Sl. No Location Source Field Observations

GWQ1 Project area Bore well Water near Guest House

The measured values for the parameters for those standards have been specified were observed to be within the said standards.

The quality of water is potable to meet the quality requirement for human use.

GWQ2 Chikka - Hanchinal village Bore well Water near Temple

GWQ3 Kanabur village Bore well Water near Temple

GWQ4 Chikka-Galagali village Bore well Water near School

GWQ5 Jambagi village Bore well Water near Koreddi House

GWQ6 Badgi village Bore well Water at Agriculture Farm

GWQ7 Girgaon village Bore well Water near Temple

GWQ8 Sutagundi village Bore well Water at Agriculture Farm

SWQ1 Krishna river, Near Chowdapur Village

River water (Upstream)

The analysis of samples collected from rivers & canals for various parameters reveals that the quality of water is fairly potable to meet the quality requirement for human after conventional treatment and disinfection, the water can be used for irrigation, Industrial Cooling, Controlled Waste disposal as per CPCB Classes

SWQ2 Krishna river, Near Galagali Village.

River water ( Down Steam)

SWQ3 Krishna river, Near Jambagi Village

River water ( Down Steam)

SWQ4 Krishna river/ Alamatti reservoir back water, near Sutagundi village

River water (Back water)

136

3.3.7 Geology

The study area is underlain mainly by the Undefined Basaltic flows the flows over

which the lavas were poured as uneven. More than 90% of the taluk is occupied with

basalts of Eocene to upper Cretaceous. In between the flows of Traps are found

sedimentary intercalations showing evidence of having been deposited in inland

lakes. This area recognized as Inter Trappeans. Successive layers of Deccan Traps are

separated by thin layer of ash, breccias and green earth made up of chert and remains

of plants and animals. Infra- Trappean beds occur as thin sediments below the

Deccan Traps and overlying the sediments of Bhima group containing Sandy

calcareous bed, red ferruginous clay, green calcareous and silty clay. Deccan

Traps in the study area is a gently rolling country presenting a monotonous

landscape, bare of vegetation. Deccan Trap flows dip at very low angles hardly

recognisable by the naked eye. Variation in thickness has been explained as due to

differences in Pre- Trappean topography. A southerly plunging anticline has been

identified pointing to the migration of volcanic activity from north to south as the

Indian plate moved northward.

Bands of Quartzites occurring in isolated patches are seen with the super crustal and

range from pure quartz to varieties showing various proportions of fuchsite

conglomerate. Laterites of Pleistocene age form the capping of Deccan Traps. Laterites

and river alluvium (Recent) occur as insignificant formation along the banks of the

rivers and nala courses as stray patches.

Mineral wealth

Deccan Trap flows are excellent building stone and used in variety of ways. The

largest use is as a road metal and railway ballast. The amygdular fillings of

Charcodony, agate of various shades and color make excellent semi pervious stones.

Deccan Traps host a large variety of Zeolites of extraordinary combination of colour

and form and extremely pretty to look.

3.3.8 Hydrology Profile

The groundwater occurs under water table and semi-confined to confined conditions

in weathered, fracture zones in basalts, limestones, shales, orthoqurtzites, sandstones,

granites and gneisses. The vesicular portion of different flows varies in thickness and

has the primary porosity. The nature and the density of vesicles, their distribution and

interconnection, depth of weathering and topography of the area are decisive factors

for occurrence and movement of ground water in these units. The weathered and

fractured basalts occurring in topographic lows are the main water bearing formations

in the district.

The Deccan traps / basalts are the major litho-unit of the Bijapur taluk. The basaltic

lava flows are mostly horizontal to gently dipping. The contrasting water bearing

137

properties of different lava flows control groundwater occurrence in them. The

topography, nature and the extent of weathering, jointing and fracture pattern,

thickness, depth of occurrence of vesicular basalt and occurrence of red bole bed are

the important factors, which play a major role in the occurrence and the movement of

ground water in these rocks. Deccan basalts usually have medium to low permeability

depending upon the presence of primary and secondary porosity. The weathered

residuum serves as an effective ground water repository in this region.

The massive portions of the basaltic flows are devoid of water but when it is

weathered, fractured, jointed, thus forming a weaker zone, then the ground waters

occurs in it. The massive basalt showing spheroidal weathering and exfoliation have

more groundwater carrying capacity than the unweathered massive trap. However,

the water carrying capacity of the massive trap is not homogenous as it is completely

depends upon the presence of fractures and joints, their nature, distribution and

interconnection.

The depth to water level is a subdued replica of the topography of the area. Besides

the topography, geological features- fractures and joints control the water level. The

depth to water level is highly variable. Shallow water level conditions are commonly

observed in valley areas, topographic lows and flat terrain, whereas, the deeper water

table conditions noticed near water divides and the topographic highs. The ground

water flow is towards the Krishna River in the south, towards Don River in the

middle of the area and towards north and northeast in the Bhima River.

The depth to water levels under unconfined conditions mainly dependent on the

thickness of the weathered zone, permeability, topographic set up, the nature of

aquifer material and are the functions of recharge and discharge components in space

and time. The groundwater table is deepest just prior to the onset of the predominant

monsoon and reaches a peak a little before the cessation of monsoon. There after the

groundwater table shows a declining trend with recession limb having two significant

segments.

The depth to water levels during the pre-monsoon period varies from 1.75 (Almatti) to

24.15 mbgl (Bijapur). The deepest is recorded at Bijapur (Fig.4) because of elevated

area. The depth to water level < 5.00 mbgl covers an area of about 10% and is recorded

at Almatti, Hullur and Almel. About 70% of the area of the district falls 5.00-to 10.00

mbgl category. And the rest of the areas, where the depth to water levels of more than

10.0 m are observed at Honwad, Tikota, Jigjiwangi, Rugi, Indi, Tangadi and at Jumnal.

The depth to water levels during post monsoon period varies from 0.75 at Almatti to

18.87 mbgl at Bijapur. The distribution of post-monsoon depth to water levels is

shown in fig.5. Depth to water level of < 5.0 mbgl observed in 30% of the area and is

observed at Kannur, Alipur, Aliabad and Shivanagi. About 10% of the area recorded

depth to water levels > 10.00 mbgl. And the rest of the area has the depth to water

levels of 5.00 to 10.00 mbgl.

138

In the study area, groundwater occurs in the Basaltic flows in the interconnected

interstices of different flows. Ground Water occurs under water table condition in

phreatic zone and semi-confined to confined conditions in the fractures at depth.

Water levels will be shallow in most of the wells both in Dug wells and Bore wells.

Water level data monitored over a period of more than 20 years show, water levels

vary from less than 2 m below ground level to less than 6 m below ground level. Both

the observation wells show decline in water levels. The phenomenon of shallow

water of less than 3 m indicates seepage of canal water to ground water is evident. In

such cases there will not be any conservation structures for recharge to ground water

body. Withdrawal of ground water should be encouraged so as to restrict rise of

ground water levels and avoid water logging conditions. Figure 3.17 gives the

drainage map of the study area.

139

Figure 3.17: Drainage map of the study area

140

3.3.9 Biological Environment

The project is located at Krishnanagar village, Hosur Post, Vijayapura Taluk & District

in Karnataka. The project intend to produce white crystalline sugar using Sugar Cane

and by make use of the left out bagasse Co-gen power plant will be operated. The

area around the proposed Sugar mill has excellent irrigation facilities from the

Krishna River.

Description of the Study Area

The M/s Nandi Sahakari Sakkare Karkhane Niyamit is located at an area where cane

cultivation is predominant and the lands are mostly irrigated by lifts wells & canals.

The climate, soil, rain are favorable for Sugar cane growth & Sugar cane yield.

Forests of Vijayapura district

Vijayapura district has total forest area of 1066.48 Ha of forests contributing 0.1% of

the total geographical area of the district. The study area encounters Hirekallagutti

R.F and Hunshikatti R.F, which are 5.5 Km towards South and 9.2 Km towards North

West directions respectively from project site. These forests are open jungle with

thorny scrub, Prosopis juliflora (Jaali) invaded the entire area however as per the

forest working plan natural regeneration of Neem and Sandal are more. Commonly

found trees in the area are Tugli (Albizzia amara), Honnambari (Cassia auriculata), Kare

(Randia dumetorum) and Mashwal (Chloroxylon swetenia). There are no national parks,

wildlife sanctuaries, ecologically sensitive areas, tiger reserves, migratory corridors

found within the study area.

Methodology

In order to assess the prevailing status of flora and fauna in the project region,

baseline ecological surveys were conducted during the study period. The baseline

ecological status in the project area has been established through the following

methods;

Information on flora, fauna and fisheries for the study area are collected from

the primary source by conducting an extensive field survey in the study area and

as well as from secondary sources like forest department, wildlife institutes and

published literature. All plant species found in the study area are recorded and

IUCN, Red Data Books of the Botanical Survey of India and other local literature

was verified to know their present conservation status.

Various groups of animal species found in the study area were collected by both

direct and indirect methods. Based on the biological classification, transact and

opportunistic observation method was used to record different faunal groups in

the study area along with discussion with local people. Later, by using IUCN Red

List/ Schedule 1, 2 animals the faunal species were identified for their

conservation status.

141

Results & Discussion

Flora

In the study area, most of the land within 1.5 Km radius is dry and agriculture and

and 44 tree species belongs to18 family, and 35 species of shrubs & herbs belongs to 23

family were recorded. As per IUCN status, trees found in the study area are common

and no rare, threatened and endangered plant species found in the study are a except

Santalum album and Chloroxylon swetenia which is Vulnerable.

Table 3.20: List of plant species observed in the study area

Sl.No

Local Name

Botanical Name

Family

IUCN

Conservation

Status 2015-4 Trees 1. Akashmallige Millingtoniahortensis Bignoniaceae Not assessed 2. Ala Ficusbengalensis Moraceae Not assessed 3. Anjan Hardwickiabinata Fabaceae Not assessed 4. Ankole Alangiumlamarkii Cornaceae Not assessed

5. Baage Albizialebbeck Fabaceae Not assessed 6. Babul Acacia arabica Fabaceae Not assessed 7. Banni Acacia suma Fabaceae Not assessed 8. Basavanapada Bauhinia recemosa Fabaceae Not assessed 9. Bela Feroniaelephantum Rutaceae Not assessed 10. Bevu Azadirachtaindica Meliaceae Not assessed 11. Bilijali Acacia leucophloea Fabaceae Not assessed 12. Bilkumbi Albiziaodoratissima Fabaceae Not assessed 13. Bilpatri Aeglemarmelos Rutaceae Not assessed 14. Dandoshi Dalbergiapaniculata Fabaceae Not assessed 15. Dindal Gardenia lucida Rubiaceae Not assessed 16. Gajaga Caesalptinebonducella Caesalpinaceae Not assessed

17. Gensin Stereosperumumxyloc

arpum

Bignoniaceae Not assessed 18. Ghatbor Zizyphusxylopyra Rhamnaceae Not assessed 19. Godambekai Anacardiumoccidental

e

Anacardiaceae Not assessed 20. Gorvi Ixoraparviflora Rubiaceae Not assessed 21. Hanmanki· Flacourtiaramontchi Salicaceae Not assessed 22. Hebbevu Ailanthusexcelsa Simaroubaceae Not assessed 23. Hirejali Acacia latronum Fabaceae Not assessed 24. Honge Pongamiaglabra Fabaceae Least Concern 25. Hunse Tamarindusindica Fabaceae Not assessed 26. Kalagonda Diospyrosmontana Ebenaceae Not assessed 27. Kari Randiadumetorum Rubiaceae Not assessed 28. Karihannu Canthiumparviflorum Rubiaceae Not assessed 29. Karijaali Acacia nilotica Fabaceae Not assessed

30. Kasod Cassia siamia Fabaceae Not assessed 31. Khair Acacia catechu Fabaceae Not assessed 32. Karegannehambu Celastruspaniculatus Celastraceae Not assessed 33. Tengu Coccusnucifera Arecaceae Not assessed 34. Shisham Dalbergiasisso Fabaceae Not assessed

142

35. Gobbara Gliricidiasepium Fabaceae Not assessed 36. Silver oak Grevillearobusta Proteaceae Not assessed 37. Anjan Hardwickiabinata Fabaceae Not assessed 38. Tapasi Holopteleaintegrifolia Ulmaceae Not assessed 39. Subabul Leucaenalatilisiqua Fabaceae Not assessed 40. Channangi Lagerstroemia

parviflora

Lythraceae Not assessed 41. Oddi Dolichandronefalcata Bignoniaceae Not assessed 42. Parivala Erythrinaindica Fabaceae Not assessed 43. Ganda Santalumalbum Santalaceae Vulnerable 44 bittulla,Bilva patra Chloroxylonswetenia Rutaceae Vulnerable

Shrubs

1. Bandaraki Dodonaeaviscosa Fabaceae Not assessed

2. Chaduranga Lantana camara Ebenaceae Not assessed

3. Henkal Gymonsporiamontana Rubiaceae Not assessed

4. Honnambri Cassia auriculata Rubiaceae Not assessed

5. Jaali Prosopisjuliflora Fabaceae Not assessed

6. Kalli Euphorbia tirukalli Euphorbiaceae Not assessed

7. Lakki Vitexnigundo Lamiaceae Not assessed

8. Menbandti Munduliasuberosa Fabaceae Not assessed

9. Pargi Toddaliaauriculata Rutaceae Not assessed

10. Torani Zizyphusrugosa Rhamnaceae Not assessed

11. Ekka Calotropisprocera Asclepiadaceae Not assessed

12. Hooli Kirganeliareticulata Euphorbiaceae Not assessed

13. Papaskalli Opuntiadillenii Cactaceae Not assessed

14. Kare Randiadumetorum Rubiaceae Not assessed

15. Lakki Vitexnegundo Verbanaceae Not assessed

Herbs and Climbers

1. Nachikemullu Mimosa pudica Fabaceae Least Concern

2. Anantmullu Hemidesmusindicus Apocynaceae Not assessed

3. Gulaganji Abrusprecatorius Fabaceae Not assessed

4. Mallige Jasminum sp. Oleaceae Not assessed

5. Bondwell Litseaelliptica Lauraceae Not assessed

6. Avarike Casssiatora Caesulpinaceae Not assessed

7. Pettige Abutilonindicum Malvaceae Not assessed

8. Uttarani Achyranthesaspera Amaranthaceae Not assessed

9. Nelabevu Andrographispanicula

ta

Acanthaceae Not assessed

10. Mullarive Amaranthusspinosus Amaranthaceae Not assessed

11. Naribala Andropogonpumilus Poaceae Not assessed

12. ArishinaDatturi Argemonemexicana Papaveraceae Not assessed

13. Mangaraballi Cissusquadrangularis Vitaceae Not assessed

14. -- Crotalaria paniculata Fabaceae Not assessed

15. Kadumenasu Croton sparsiflorus Euphorbiaceae Not assessed

16. Datturi Daturametel Solanaceae Not assessed

17. Garike Cynodondactylon Poaceae Not assessed

18. Achhegida Euphorbia hirta Euphorbiaceae Not assessed

19. Morning glory Ipomoea purpurea Convolvulaceae Not assessed

143

20. Tulasi Ocimum sanctum Lamiaceae Not assessed

Fauna

As per working plan, movement of wildlife is restricted in and around Hirekallagutti

R.F and Hunshikatti R.F area and negligible. As per direct observations and

discussion with local people, following animals were recorded during the study are

given below.

Table 3.21: List of animal species observed in the study area

Sl.

No

Local Name Scientific Name WL(P)

Act,

Schedule

IUCN Conservation

Status 2015-4

1 Indian monitor

lizard

Varanusbengalensis Schedule-I Least Concern 2 Commonmongoose Herpestesedwardsii Schedule- IV Least Concern 3 Wild pig Susscrofa Schedule-II Least Concern 4 Cobra Najanaja Schedule-II Not assessed 5 Rat snake Plyasmucosus Schedule-II Not assessed 6 Viper Viper ruseelli Schedule-II Not assessed

Note: # Karnataka Forest Department records and discussion with local villagers

Table 3.22: List of Avien species observed in the study area

Sl. No

Local Name Scientific Name WL(P) Act, Schedule

IUCN Conservation Status 2015-4

1. Barbet Megalaimavirens Schedule-IV Least Concern 2. Weaver bird Ploceuspillippinus Schedule-IV Not assessed 3. Black drongo Dicrurusmacrocercus Schedule-IV Least Concern 4. Red whiskered

bulbul Pycnonotusjocusus Schedule-IV Not assessed

5. Cattleegret Bubulcus ibis Schedule-IV Least Concern 6. Common Myna Arcidotherestristis Schedule-IV Not assessed 7. Cuckoo Cuculuslaborous Schedule-IV Not assessed 8. House sparrow Passer domesticus Schedule-IV Least Concern 9. King fisher Alcedines Schedule-IV Not assessed 10. Koel Eudynamysscolopacea Schedule-IV Least Concern 11. Parakeet Psittalulakrameria Schedule-IV Not assessed 12. Pigeon Columbia livia Schedule-IV Not assessed 13. Red wattled

lapwing Vanellusindicus Schedule-IV Least Concern

14. Sun bird Nectariniidae Schedule-IV Least Concern 15. Tailor Bird Orthomussutorius Schedule-IV Not assessed 16. Chestnut

Shouldered Petronia sparrow

Petroniaxanthocollis Schedule-IV Least Concern

17. Indian roller Coraciasbenghalensis Schedule-IV Least Concern 18. Small minivet Pericrocotuscinnamomeu

s Schedule-IV Least Concern

19. Indian robin Saxicoloidesfulicata Schedule-IV Least Concern 20. Bustard qualis Aredeostisnigriceps Schedule-IV Not assessed

144

Note: # Karnataka Forest Department records and discussion with local villagers

Fisheries

Detailed Fisheries investigations carried-out in the Krishna river, in and around the

project site, indicated ‘Optimum’ features to support and sustain the aquatic

biodiversity of the system. This lotic water body, as the data indicates, is free from

pollution influence.

The microscopic fish food organisms – the Plankton, Phyto – and the Zooplankton

constituents presented ‘low’ values, by numbers, species – wise and by percentage

composition. Scores of planktivore piscine fauna recorded subsists on the food

available which is likely to improve during the post – monsoon period due to the

influx of nutrients as they play a vital role in the over – all biological productivity.

The littoral fauna represented ‘poor’ concentrations. The Molluscus –Castropods and

Bivalves – had a very ‘good’ representation. This food item, is being under – utilised

as there is no molliscicidal fish present in the said river.

The present study showed five groups of phytoplanktonic population as

Chlorophyceae, Bacillariophyceae, Cyanophyceae, Hydrocharitaceae and

Desmidiceae. Comparatively, Chlorophyceae was dominating with 22 species in it.

Next to Chloro-phyceae, family Bacillariophyceae included eleven species whereas

Cyanophyceae showed ten diversified species in the selected area. Hydrocharitaceae

and Desmidiaceae showed only one species from each family. Family wise diversity

in the selected aquatic body was as follows:

i) Chlorophyceae: Family Chlorophyceae showed 22 species which included,

Spirogyra, Chlorella, Ankistrodesmus, Pediastrum simplex, tetraspora, Scemedesmus,

Nitella, Microspora, Zygnema, Ulothrix, Mougeotia, Coelastrum, Cosmarium,

Tetrahedron, Treubaria, Micractinium, Pochycladon, Anthrodesmus, Volvex,

Sphaerocystis, Gonatozygon , Gonatozygon and Netrium.

ii) Bacillariophyceae: Bacillariophyceae showed 11 species and was found to be

maximum in post monsoon season and minimum in monsoon period. They included

Synedra, Suriella, Tabellaria, Stauroneis, Navicula, Amphore, Diatoma, Fradilaria,

Asterionella, Cyclotella, Cymbella.

iii) Cyanophyceae: Cyanophyceae has 10 species: Gomphosphaeria, Anacystis,

Geotrichum, Botryococcus, Phormidi, Oscillate, Rivularia, Gloeotrichia,

Synechocystis, and Chroccoccus.

iv) Desmidiaceae: Desmidiaceae showed least dominancy with one species:

Closterium among phytoplanktonic families.

145

v) Hydrocharitaceae: Similar to Desmidiaceae, Hydrocharitaceae also showed only

one species, that is, Hydrilla.

Zooplankton analysis The major group of zooplankton observed during study period

was Cladocera, Rotifera, Protozoa, Nematoda, Aostraca, Schizopyrenida and

Copepoda .Quantified data related to species diversity showed two species of

Cladocera, eight species of Protozoa, nine species of Rotifera, three species of

Copepoda and only one species of Nematode, Aostraca and Schizopyrenida in

assessment area. Quantified data was as follows:

i) Rotifera: Rotifers, these are tiny wheel animals, considered as natural water

purifiers because they perform clean up service in the slow moving aquatic bodies. In

the study, Rotiferans were found dominant with 9 species, that is, Cocconeis,

Ascomorpha, Diacranophorus, Branchionus Caudatus, Branchionus falcatus, Keratella

quadrata, Philodina, Pterodina, Sinantheria.

ii) Protozoa: Protozoans are the smallest and first aquatic organisms in the form of

zooplanktons. They are second dominant group with eight diversified species in the

present investigation as Chillodenella, Bursaria, Tetrahynema, Prorodon, Metapus,

Verticella, Spirostomum, Slentor.

iii) Copepoda: Copepods constitute planktonic group of both freshwater and marine

habitats. In the present work, we found three free living groups viz. Calanoids,

Cyclopoids and Harpacticoides. Copepods presented three species: Cyclopod,

Nauplius and Diatomus.

iv) Cladocera: Cladocerans are commonly known as water fleas. These are minute

crustaceans generally ranging in size from 0.2 - 5.0 mm. They belong to order

Cladocera of subclass Brachiopoda under subphylum Crustacea including 11 families

(Raghunathan and Suresh Kumar, 2002). Order Cladocera included two types of

species during the present study, that is, Sida and Daphnia.

v) Nematoda: showed one type of species, that is, Heterodera vi) Aostraca: showed

one type of species, that is, Streptocephalus.

vii) Schizopyrenida: showed one type of species, that is, Naegleria Among

zooplankton in the study area, the order of dominance in diversified groups was as

follows: Rotifera > Protozoa > Copepoda > Cladoecera > Nematoda > Aostraca >

Schizopyrenida.

Plankton study showed seasonal variation in all sampling sites, as per their nutrient

status, age, morphometry and other physicochemical factors. The statistical data in the

present study showed that planktonic population was maximum in postmansoon and

mansoon season as compared to premansoon season). Percent composition of

phytoplankton throughout the study period showed Chlorophyceae 22%,

146

Bacillariophyceae 11%, Cyanophyceae 10%, Hydrocharitaceae 1% and Desmidiaceae

1% .Relatively, zooplankton showed Protozoa 8%, Rotifera 9%, Copepoda 1%,

Cladocera1%, Nematoda 1%, Schizopyrenida 1%, Anostraca 1% .The study on

plankton diversity showed some genera which act as bioindicators of organic

pollution hence it can be said that the water body is slightly organically polluted.

Detailed Fisheries investigations carried-out in the Krishna River

Table 3.23: List of Fishes observed in the study area

Sl.

No.

Order Family Fish species Local Name

1. Cypriniformes Cyprinidae Berilius bendelisis

Hamilton Buchannan, 1822

2. Cypriniformes Cyprinidae Catla catla (Hamilton,1822) Catla

3. Cypriniformes Cyprinidae Cirrhinus cirrhosa (Hamilton,1822)

4. Cypriniformes Cyprinidae Cirrhinus mrigala Hamilton

Buchannan, 1822

Mrigal

5. Cypriniformes Cyprinidae Ctenopharyngodon idella

(Valenciennes,1844)

Grass carp

6. Cypriniformes Cyprinidae Cyprinus carpio (Linnaeus, 1758)

7. Cypriniformes Cyprinidae Garra gotyla (Gray,1930)

8. Cypriniformes Cyprinidae Hypophthalmichthys molitrix

(Valenciennes,1844)

Silvar carp

9. Cypriniformes Cyprinidae Labeo bata (Hamilton,1822)

10. Cypriniformes Cyprinidae Labeo calbasu (Hamilton,1822)

11. Cypriniformes Cyprinidae Labeo fimbriatus (Hamilton,1822)

12. Cypriniformes Cyprinidae Labeo rohita (Hamilton,1822) Rohu

13. Cypriniformes Cyprinidae Labeo boggut (Sykes, 1839)

14. Cypriniformes Cyprinidae Puntius kolus (Hamilton,1822)

15. Cypriniformes Cyprinidae Puntius sarana

(HamiltonBuchanan,1822)

16. Cypriniformes Cyprinidae Puntius ticto


17. Cypriniformes Cyprinidae Puntius chilinoides


18. Cypriniformes Cyprinidae Puntius lithopidos (Day, 1874)

19. Cypriniformes Cyprinidae Osteobrama cotio Hamilton

Buchannan, 1822

20. Cypriniformes Cyprinidae Salmostoma bacaila Hamilton

Buchannan, 1822

21. Cypriniformes Rasboridae Rasbora neilgherriensis Day, 1867

22. Cypriniformes Cichlidae Oreochromis mossambicus (Peters,

147

1852)

23. Cypriniformes Cichlidae Oreochromis niloticus (Linnaeus,

1758)

24. Siluriformes Bagridae Rita buchnani Hamilton-

Buchannan, 1822

25. Siluriformes Bagridae Spearotaaor


26. Siluriformes Bagridae Spearota seengala (Sykes,1839)

27. Siluriformes Bagridae Mystus seenghala Sykes, 1839

28. Siluriformes Bagridae Mystus bleekeri Day, 1877

29. Siluriformes Bagridae Bagarius bagarius Udd

30. Siluriformes Siluridae Ompok bimaculatus (Bloach,1794) Pabda-gojal

31. Siluriformes Siluridae Ompok pabda (Hamilton-

Buchanan 1822)

32. Siluriformes Schilbeidae Silonia silondia (Hamilton,1822)

33. Siluriformes Claridae Clarias batrachus (Linnaeus,1758)

34. Siluriformes Claridae Clarias garipinus (Burchell, 1822)

35. Siluriformes Claridae Wallago attu (Bloach &

Schneider,1801)

36. Siluriformes Heteropne

ustidae

Heteropneustes fossilis

(Bloch,1794)

37. Perciformes Channidae Channa marulius (Hamilton,1822)

38. Perciformes Channidae Channa punctatus (Bloch,1793)

39. Perciformes Channidae Channa striatus (Bloch,1793)

40. Osteoglossifor

mes

Notopterid

ae

Notopterus notopterus

(Pallas,1769)

41. Synbranchifor

mes

Mastacem

belidae

Mastacembalus armatus

(Lacepede,1800)

Bam-eel

42. Beloniformes Belonidae Xenentodon cancila

(Hamilton,1822)

148

Figure 3.18: Specimens of Fishes found in Krishna River

3.3.10 Social Environment

The baseline data referring to the socio-economic environment is collected by way of

secondary sources such as census records, statistical hand book and relevant official

records with the government agencies. The growth of industrial sectors and

infrastructure development in and around the agricultural area i.e. villages and semi-

149

urban settings and towns is bound to create certain socio-economic impacts on the

local populace. The impacts may be either positive or negative depending on the

nature of development. To assess such impact it is necessary to know the existing

socio-economic order of the study area, which will be helpful in improving the overall

quality of life.

Basic Information of Vijayapura District

The district is located in northern Karnataka and borders Belgaum, Bagalkot, Raichur,

Yadgir, Gulbarga districts and Sangli district of Maharashtra. It has geographical area

of 10,498 sq. km. and is administratively divided in 5 talukas. As per 2011 census

Vijayapura District had a population of 2,177,331 persons. The district has a rural

population of 1,675,353 and urban population of 501,978. The district has a population

density of 207 persons per sq. km. Its population growth rate over the decade 2001 -

2011 was 20.50 percent. Vijayapura district has a sex ratio of 960 females for every

1000 males, and literacy rate of 67.15 percent. There are around 692 revenue villages

and 6 towns in the district.

Table: 3.24: Demographic Attributes for Vijayapura District

Description Rural Urban

Population (%) 76.95 % 23.05%

Total Population 1,675,353 501,978

Male Population 857,562 253,460

Female Population 817,791 248,518

Sex Ratio 954 981

Child Sex Ratio (0-6) 933 924

Child Population (0-6) 251,849 66,557

Male Child(0-6) 130,258 34,598

Female Child(0-6) 121,591 31,959

Child Percentage (0-6) 15.03 % 13.26 %

Male Child Percentage 15.19 % 13.65 %

Female Child Percentage 14.87 % 12.86 %

Literates 894,132 354,136

Male Literates 538,400 192,166

Female Literates 355,732 161,970

Average Literacy 62.81 % 81.33 %

Male Literacy 74.03 % 87.80 %

Female Literacy 51.10 % 74.79 %

As per Census 2011, Vijayapura had population of 2,177,331 of which male and female

were 1,111,022 and 1,066,309 respectively. In 2001 census, Vijayapura had a

150

population of 1,806,918 of which males were 926,424 and remaining 880,494 were

females. Vijayapura District population constituted 3.56 percent of total Karnataka

population. In 2001 census, this figure for Vijayapura District was at 3.42 percent of

Karnataka population.

There was change of 20.50 percent in the population compared to population as per

2001. In the previous census of India 2001, Vijayapura District recorded increase of

17.51 percent to its population compared to 1991.

The density population in Vijayapura district is 207 people per sq. km. as per Census

2011. In 2001, Vijayapura district density was at 172 people per sq. km. Vijayapura

district administers 10,498 square kilometers of areas.

Average literacy rate of Vijayapura in 2011 were 67.15 percent compared to 57.01

percent of 2001. If things are looked out at gender wise, male and female literacy were

77.21 percent and 56.72 percent respectively. For 2001 census, same figures stood at

69.94 percent and 43.47 percent in Vijayapura District. Total literate in Vijayapura

District were 1,248,268 of which male and female were 730,566 and 517,702

respectively. In 2001, Vijayapura District had 866,561 persons in its district.

Sex Ratio in Vijayapura, it stood at 960 female per 1000 male compared to 2001 census

figure of 950. The average national sex ratio in India is 940 and sex ratio of Karnataka

is 973. In 2011 census, child sex ratio is 931 girls per 1000 boys compared to figure of

928 girls per 1000 boys of 2001 census data.

There were total 318,406 children under age of 0-6 against 286,831 of 2001 census. Of

total 318,406 male and female were 164,856 and 153,550 respectively. Child Sex Ratio

as per census 2011 was 931 compared to 928 of census 2001. In 2011, Children under 0-

6 formed 14.62 percent of Vijayapura District compared to 15.87 percent of 2001. There

was net change of -1.25 percent in this compared to previous census of India.

In 2011, total 334 families live on footpath or without any roof cover in Vijayapura

district of Karnataka.

Out of the total Vijayapura population for 2011 census, 23.05 percent lives in urban

regions of district. In total 501,978 people lives in urban areas of which males are

253,460 and females are 248,518. Sex Ratio in urban region of Vijayapura district is 981

as per 2011 census data. Similarly 76.95 percent population of Vijayapura districts

lives in rural areas of villages. The total Vijayapura district population living in rural

areas is 1,675,353 of which males and females are 857,562 and 817,791 respectively. In

rural areas of Vijayapura district, sex ratio is 954 females per 1000 males.

Study area

The study area for socio economic assessment was defined as an area within 10 km

radius around the proposed project site as per the statutory requirement of the

Ministry of Environment & Forest. Designation of impact zone is based on the EIA

151

guidance manual.

The project site is located in the Krishna Nagar, at Hosur Post, Taluka & District

Vijayapura. The 10 km radius study area is spread over Bijapur taluka of Bijapur

district and Jamkhandi and Bilagi talukas of Bagalkot district. There are total 34

villages in 10 km radius of the project site, of which 14 villages are in Bijapur and 20

villages in Bagalkot districts. There are no towns or cities in the study area. The

location is essential rural with moderate in habitation. The nearest town Mudhol is 34

km from the project site towards west.

Methodology

The data for the project is collected from secondary sources and Primary sources. The

secondary data was collected from the sources such as Census of India, 2011, District

Statistical Handbook and the district website and other relevant sources in respect to

population, infrastructure facilities available and the occupational structures of the

study area.

a. Secondary Data Collection

Baseline Status

The data is collected and analysed using secondary sources viz. Census records,

District Statistical Abstract, Official Document etc. on following parameters for the

study region.

Demographic structure

Infrastructure resource base

Economic attributes

The demographic profile, infrastructure facilities and socio-economic condition is

being described under different classifications in the following section.

Demography

Summary of demographic structure with reference to population, household, literacy,

community structure and employment are presented in this section. Total population

of the study area is 78,902 belong to 15,269 households (Census, 2011). Population size

ranges from 8,380 persons in Galagali village in Bagalkot district, to 211 persons in

Gudadinni village in Bagalkot District. Population within the age class 0-6 year

accounts for 14.78 percent of the total population.

Table : 3.25 Demographic Characteristics of Study Area

District Name No. of

HH

Total Populn

Sex Ratio

Population (0-6)

Size of

HH

% SC

% ST

% Literacy

BA

GA

LK

OT

Linganur 666 3421 999 449 5 16.02 0 59.08

Gani 551 2811 985 375 5 34.65 2.74 61.82

152

Budni 238 1200 1034 191 5 16.58 0 62.04

Bidari 1071 5515 1019 810 5 18.91 6.60 64.63

Galagali 1627 8380 1036 1173 5 17.72 1.37 73.76

Rabkavi 250 1301 922 197 5 33.36 1.38 61.87

Chowdapur 57 314 938 40 6 19.43 43.63 65.69

Chinkhanchinal 252 1355 990 241 5 17.49 0.52 61.13

Kolur 493 2726 991 434 6 16.21 0.95 66.36

Mundaganur 509 2633 909 368 5 16.29 2.47 60.09

Yadahalli 753 3920 1046 553 5 15.43 33.70 63.08

Gulbal 222 1172 986 169 5 11.01 8.62 62.21

Budihal(S.G.) 272 1282 975 154 5 11.47 7.33 68.97

Bisnal 619 3122 1065 568 5 8.90 41.51 48.98

Teggi 973 5118 993 865 5 11.18 35.48 57.77

Badgi 632 3355 998 494 5 15.53 1.79 67.60

Girgaon 275 1413 949 212 5 25.97 9.55 62.78

Gudadinni 37 211 867 29 6 7.11 35.07 80.77

Hanchinal(Inam) 189 963 1019 136 5 11.73 22.12 68.44

Ballur 56 287 952 38 5 1.05 2.44 69.88

VIJ

AY

AP

UR

A

Gunadal 502 2803 907 468 6 15.27 0.93 65.95

Kengalagutti 350 2029 1001 294 6 15.57 0 65.76

Babalad 326 1740 1019 311 5 28.39 0.34 62.63

Shirabur 302 1651 1028 235 5 24.59 6.06 61.65

Kanabur 444 2126 994 251 5 29.16 0.19 65.17

Chikka-Galagali 328 1585 1035 221 5 20.63 1.39 67.60

Jambagi 225 1181 1033 154 5 33.70 0.42 70.07

Hosur 759 3598 961 509 5 31.66 0.28 68.82

Sutagundi 312 1827 988 278 6 20.53 9.25 60.56

Devara-Gennur 567 2839 953 405 5 19.97 0 64.34

Devapur 287 1424 919 195 5 10.53 0.77 59.97

Tajapur 83 458 908 90 6 2.18 0 58.15

Lingadalli 156 832 1024 140 5 20.19 3.00 71.10

Jainapur 886 4310 979 611 5 28.58 1.51 61.12

TOTAL 15269 78902 994 11658 5 19.30 8.07 64.13

The demographic characteristics of the study area are depicted in Table 3.25. Average

sex ratio for the study area is 994 females per 1000 males, which is more than the sex

ratio of 973 female per 1000 for Vijayapura District and 989 female per 1000 males for

Bagalkot District. There are 15,269 households in the study area and the average size

of household is 5 members per household.

Vulnerable Population

According to the 2011 census, the ratio of SC population to the total population is

19.30 percent in the study area which is lower than the ratio of SC population in

Bijapur district which is 20.34 percent and higher than the SC population in Bagalkot

district which is 16.89 percent. The ratio of SC population of Karnataka to the total

population is 17.15 percent. In the study area, villages with very high percent of SC

153

population are Gani (34.65), Jambagi (H) (33.70) and Hosur (31.66).

The ratio of ST population to the total population is 8.07 percent in the study area

which is higher than the ratio of ST population in Bijapur, Bagalkot districts which is

1.81 percent and 5.14 percent respectively. The ratio of ST population of MP to the

total population is 6.95 percent. In the study area, villages with very high percent of

ST population are Chowdapur (43.63), Bisnal (41.51) and Teggi (35.48).

Literacy

The average literacy in the study area is 64.13 percent, which is lower than the literacy

rate of the Bijapur district i.e. 67.15 percent and Bagalkot district i.e. 68.82 percent. The

literacy rate is considerably higher in male population (74.66 percent) as compared to

female population (53.63 percent) and similar trend of lower female literacy is also

visible in the districts of Bijapur and Bagalkot.

Table 3.26: Literacy in the study area

Total Literates

Male Literates

Female Literates

Literacy rate

Male literacy

Female literacy

Study Area 43,126 25,079 18,047 64.13 74.66 53.63

Bijapur 1,248,268 730,566 517,702 67.15 77.21 56.72

Bagalkot 1,113,412 641,388 472,024 68.82 79.23 58.40

Economic Activity

As per the Census 2011, the workforce in the study area is 36,754 which constitute

46.58 percent of the total population of the study area. The total workers comprise of

30,433 main workers and 6,321 marginal workers. The work participation rate for the

Bijapur district is 42.61 percent and for the Bagalkot district is 43.29 percent.

Main workers1 constitute 82.80 percent of the total workers. The remaining 17.2

percent are marginal workers2. Among the main workers, female workers are only

38.50 percent whereas 61.50 percent are male workers.

Table 3.27: Status of working population in the study area

Total workers

Main workers

Marginal workers

Non workers

Work participation

Study Area 36,754 30,433 6,321 42,148 46.58

Bijapur 927,722 760,083 167,639 1,249,609 42.61

Bagalkot 818,081 676,407 141,674 1,071,671 43.29

As an economy transforms from an agricultural economy to an industrial economy, a

154

decline in participation of female labour force is observed in the study area. This is

attributed to the shift from family-based production to large-scale production in

industrial units.

1 Main workers were those who had worked for the major part of the area preceding the date of

enumeration i.e., those who were engaged in any economically productive activity for 183 days (or six

months) or more during the year.

2 Marginal workers were those who worked any time at all in the year preceding the enumeration but

did not work for a major part of the year, i.e., those who worked for less than 183 days (or six months).

Occupational structure

The occupational structure of the population in the study area has been studied. Total

workers are classified on the basis of Industrial category of workers into the following

four categories:

1. Cultivators

2. Agricultural Labourers

3. Household Industry Workers

4. Other Workers

Table 3.28: Distribution of Total (main + marginal) workers by category

Total Workers

Total Workers Cultivators Agricultural

Laborers Household

Industry Others

Study Area 36,754 10963 19338 801 5652

Bijapur 927,722 262,217 351,600 25,379 288,526

Bagalkot 818,081 196,199 303,243 44,797 273,842

Of the total workers category, cultivators (30 percent) and agricultural labour (53

percent) together constitute 83 percent of the total workers. It reflects that agricultural

sector has absorbed maximum workforce in the study area. Only 2 percent of workers

in the study area are engaged in the household industry.

In the study area, about 15 percent workers are engaged as ‘other worker’ category.

The type of workers that come under this category of 'Other Worker' include all

government servants, municipal employees, teachers, factory workers, plantation

workers, those engaged in trade, commerce, business, transport banking, mining,

construction, political or social work, priests, entertainment artists, etc. In effect, all

those workers other than cultivators or agricultural labourers or household industry

workers are 'Other Workers'. Thus it reflects that the opportunities for other workers

category are very less in the study area as it is rural in nature.

155

Infrastructure

The study area consists of 34 villages within the 10 km radius area. The area is rural in

nature with the city of Vijayapura and Bagalkot both more than 50 km away. Basic

amenities are available in the villages of the study area. Jamkhandi, small town at a

distance of 30 km is the nearest urban pocket from project site with okay physical and

social infrastructure and basic amenities.

Road connectivity

Road connectivity is also good in the study area as State Highways 53, 55, 124 criss-

crosses the study area and the villages are connected to both Bagalkot and Bijapur

towns.

b. Primary Data Collection

Key aspects of any socio-economic study depend on the methodology and selection of

the villages / stakeholders involved in that project. The unprecedented horizontal

growth of Vijayapura city slowly occupy Vijayapura Rural Districts Taluks in which

the entire agricultural land use of Rural District is turned out be industrial and

commercial land use over the period of last 10 years. In this context, quantitatively

Participatory Rural Appraisal (PRA) and qualitatively Focal group discussions were

planned.

Participatory Rural Appraisal (PRA)

Participatory Rural Appraisal (PRA) technique which is a family of approaches and

methods to enable rural people to share, enhance and analyze their knowledge of life

and conditions to plan and to act (Praxis, 1996). One such effective core element

amongst the PRA is questionnaire survey, wherein the questions will be directly

156

asked to the respondents to get the desired information. Based on the resident’s

perception the data should be collected and analysed.

Questionnaire Survey

The present study relied on a questionnaire survey and used the people perception as

the basis for estimating the impacts of the project on air, noise, traffic, biodiversity,

land, solid waste, water, health and other socioeconomic activities. The questionnaire

was framed in such way that it includes both closed and open ended questions to

facilitate the respondents to provide larger information.

Sampling

Six villages were selected within 10 km radius of the study area. Stratified Random

Sampling method was followed to select the villages for sampling. The sampling

villages on 10 km radius map of the project and distributions of households among the

sampled villages are shown in Figure 3.19 respectively.

Figure 3.19: Locations of the wards on 10 km radius map of the project area

Following criteria were followed for selection of villages;

Land use of the village

Chikka-Galagali village

Shirbur village

Kanabur village

Rabakavi village

Jambagi village

Budhihal village

Project Site

157

Villages within 6 Km of project impact zone, and

Transportation of raw material to the site (accessibility to the site).

Table 3.29: Key Features of the Sampled Villages

Sl. No. Particulars Key Features

1 Kanabur village Close to the project site with impact zone of 1.8 Km with the predominant residential growth and the approach road to the site.

2 Chikka - Galagali village

Within the project impact zone of 2.5 Km with Predominant residential growth and agricultural activity and close to road.

3 Jambagi village Within the project impact zone of 3.0 Km with the predominant residential growth.

4 Shirbur village Within the project impact zone of 2.0 Km with the predominant residential growth.

5 Budihal village Within the project impact zone of 3.5 Km with the predominant residential growth.

6 Rabakavi village Within the project impact zone of 5.2 Km with predominant residential growth and agricultural activity.

The respondents were interviewed at their places in the vernacular languages based

on their availability. The participants were questioned and given an opportunity to

express themselves and express their opinions about the project.

Training for Field Survey Team

Field survey team was trained on 13.01.2017 to ensure successful completion of the

field survey using questionnaire. Each interviewer was taught on:

Survey objectives

Meaning of each question and answer

The way of asking question i.e. avoiding leading questions

Figure 3.20: View of Socio-economic Survey Photos

Results and Discussions

158

Distribution of Age and Gender in the Sampled Villages

About 89 % of Male and 11% of female respondents were involved in the survey. Out

of which, 32 % of the respondents were aged between 20-30 years followed by 30%

between 30-40 years of age. 13% of 40-50 years of age, 26% of >50 years of people were

consulted to achieve highest maturity. The survey was not ignored the people of < 20

years, in which their participation was 2% during the survey.

Occupation & Income

Due to the impact of education in the study area, most of the people are practicing

business/employment opportunities such as Accountant, Teachers, Software

engineers, Cane supervisor, Farmers, Home makers, Mechanic etc and 7% of the

people in the study area were having income in the range of Rs 10,000- 50,000 per

annum followed by 22% of the people were enjoying their life with 50,000-100,000, Rs

per annum followed by 47% of the people are also enjoying their life with >100,000.

Most of the respondents (Govt. and Private Employees) in the study area don’t reveal

their income level (15%).

Perception of Respondents on various social and environmental attributes

Natural resources and its components are the most significant source of rural

livelihoods in the developing countries like India. However, the perception of the

rural people on Environmental Management, pollution, etc in developing countries

is somewhat negligible due to its education, urban sprawl and livelihood

implications. Thus, there is a pressing need to establish that environmental

conservation which must go hand in hand with economic development because any

economic development which destroys the environment will create more poverty,

unemployment, and disease (Sarkar et al, 2007).

A total of 6 villages selected within 10 km radius of the study area were

considered for studies. The results of socio-economic survey reveals that, highest

education attained by the respondents were Degree (11%). 7% of the respondents

were PUC in the study area and whereas meagre (17%) of the respondents have done

Higher primary. 80% of the respondents opined that the proposed project will

bring substantial employment and business opportunities for local people

however, the respondents expressed that the proposed project have 4% impact on

biodiversity, 4% impact on noise levels, 6% impact ambient air.

It is evident from the above facts that, respondents have critically evaluated the

project in terms of creating environmental pollution to the region. Results reveal that

the impacts on environment are only short term and which will not bring any

significant long term impacts to the region.

159

Suggestions for improvement of local environment

80% of the people opine that, planting of trees on either side of the road,

maintenance of sewer lines, drinking water facility and biodiversity, improvement of

educational institution, hospitals, internal roads, infrastructure facilities and greenbelt

development will bring considerable improvement in the local environment.

Expected Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR) Activities in the study area

CSR is a process with the aim to embrace responsibility for the company's actions and

encourage a positive impact through its activities on the environment,

employees, communities and stakeholders. As part of the proposed project CSR

activities, questions were asked to the respondents on the expected activities. The

corporate sector has a pivotal role to play in ensuring private investment flows to

those rural areas that have been left out of the development process so far and also to

work for sustainable development of rural areas in general (Pradhan et al, 2010).

Following suggestions were emerged during the discussion on CSR;

Drinking water facility and also purification facility to the nearby wards.

Improvement of roads.

Planting of trees.

Education facility to poor children, improvement of Govt schools and

Anganavadis.

Construction of common toilets for women.

Construction of Hospitals.

Sanitation facilities.

Frequent Bus facility, and

Health checkup camps.

Park development.

Road construction.

Employment to the local people.

Focal Group Discussions (FGDs)

FGDs were conducted. A group of 5-6 people were discussed randomly on the issues

revolve around the construction of proposed project. Respondents opine that, after the

advent of industries to Bengaluru the land rates were grown up and in turn farmers

were benefited since in the recent times agricultural practices were considered to be

expensive.

Also, people opine that the proposed project doesn’t bring any serious substantial

impact on the local environment except usage of drinking water and increase of traffic

congestion in and around the villages. People feel that the proposed project will

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stakeholder_(corporate)

160

bring substantial development to the region in general and around the villages

in particular in terms of providing employment and business opportunities.

Inference

Majority of respondents are from agricultural background, many of the

respondents are depend on secondary occupations such as petty shop, labour work,

tailoring, driver, etc for their livelihood. Education levels and awareness on

environmental issues are found to be high among the respondents of the region

and most of the basic infrastructures such as improvement of road, providing

drinking water facility, planting of trees were lacking in the region.

Rehabilitation & Resettlement plan

The expansion project is proposed in the existing industrial premise. No procurement

of any additional land for the proposed project.

In view of the above, the proposed expansion project does not involve any

displacement of persons and no rehabilitation or resettlements are necessary.

161

Chapter – 4

Anticipated Environmental Impact and Mitigation Measures

4.1 Introduction

This section identifies and predicts the potential impacts on different

environmental components due to the construction and operation of the proposed

project. It details all the potential impacts on biophysical and socio-economic

components of the local environment due to the proposed activities and sub-activities.

Prediction of impacts is the most important component in the Environmental

Impact Assessment studies. Several qualitative and quantitative techniques and

methodologies are used to conduct analysis of the potential impacts likely to occur as

a result of the proposed development activities on physical, ecological and socio-

economic environments. Such predictions are superimposed over the baseline (pre-

project) status of the environmental quality to derive at the ultimate (post-project)

scenario of environmental conditions. The prediction of impacts helps to minimize the

adverse impacts and maximize the beneficial impacts on environmental quality

during pre and post project execution.

The proposed project would create impacts on the environment in two distinct phases:

During the construction phase which may be regarded as temporary or short –

term.

The other during the operation stage which would have long term effects.

The environmental impact assessment approach used to evaluate the proposed

project comprises of three sequential elements. These are impacts identification,

prediction and evaluation.

The first step of the impact assessment process involves identifying the key issues

associated with the construction and operation phases of the project. Issues and

concerns of the proposed project are scoped based on the knowledge and experience

w.r.t environmental setting and project elements. Accordingly, the existing

environmental system is described and the components of the projects are

determined.

The second step involves identification of the environmental modification that may

be significant, forecasting of the quality and spatial dimension of change in the

environment identified and estimation of the probability that the impact will occur.

The third step involves determination of the incidence of benefit to population

affected by the project, specification and comparison of effects between various

alternatives, if any considered and assessment of the likely effect of the project on the

environmental, economical and social components indicating the nature of effects.

The sugar unit will work 180 days, Co-generation unit will work 210 days Minimum

and availability of Bagasse in a year.

162

Installation of Air pollution control equipment’s and revamping of the existing ETP

will be done before the operational phase of the Project.

4.2 Land Environment

4.2.1 Impact on Land Use

Impact during Construction Phase:

a. Impacts on the natural drainage system and soil erosion

There shall not be any effects in the core or buffer area either on the drainage or on

the water regime of the area. The industry has already developed 84 Acre of land

for greenbelt , no additional greenbelt proposed, however the core area under green

belt using native species to prevent top soil erosion.

b. Loss of productive soil and impact on natural drainage pattern

The majority of the land coming in buffer area is agriculture cultivation. The proposed

project site is 1.5 km away from the River Krishna; hence proposed project doesn’t

alter the drainage patterns of the riparian ecosystem. However suggested rain water

harvesting plan for the proposed project site.

c. Study of the problem of landslides and soil erosion

The area falls under seismic zone II is safe. Since the working area is not much

deep, proposed is a proper drainage system to divert the drainage water away from

the workings, hence no problem of landslides is anticipated. The top soil will be

extracted in advance, mixed with mulches and top soil stabilizers before its use in

plantation work. After top soiling the area, before the start of permanent green belt,

initial reclamation crop with leguminous plants and grasses shall be cultivated in the

area to improve the fertility of the soil.

The green development program is aimed at planting native species capable of

forming good humus, so that the water retention capacity of the floor is high and

surface erosion is reduced. Effective steps like green belt development using

leguminous plants by mulching with proper drainage and retaining walls to

minimizing soil loss if any and maintaining the nutrient of the soil of the area as

existing in the buffer zone.

Impact during Operational Phase

During operation phase the installation of a boilers of 240 TPH, with its stack of 77 m

height and other sizeable structures would substantially alter the place and rural

landscape. However, the construction of green belts, parks, will largely offset the

change to the existing landscape and will provide visual comfort.

163

4.2.2 Mitigation measures with respect Land environment

A total 30,750 cum of top soil will be stored in a designated place and it will be

reused for existing green belt and landscaping works within 12 months. Following

illustrates the protocol for top soil preservation and reuse.

Top soil patches are scattered with thickness varying from 10 to 50 cm. This soil will

be removed in advance and staked separately at designated area with a height

not exceeding 2m.

Soil stockpile location will be identified to avoid slopes, natural drainage ways and

approach road points.

Temporary seeding will be carried out to protect topsoil stockpiles by planting

preferably grass and legume species as soon as possible, within 30 days after the

formation of the stockpile.

If stockpiles not been used within 12 months, then they will be stabilized with

permanent vegetation to control erosion and weeds.

Before spreading of topsoil, well-established erosion and sedimentation control

structures such as diversions, dikes, waterways and sediment basins will be

constructed.

Top soil areas will be well graded according to the approved plan.

Roughening will be carried out prior to spreading the topsoil, loosen the

subgrade by disking or scarifying to a depth of at least 100 mm to ensure bonding

of the topsoil and subsoil.

Soil horizons are replaced in the same order that they were removed.

The proposed construction project layout indicates that, there is no chance for soil

erosion after the completion of project.

4.3 Soil Environment

4.3.1 Impact on Soil Environment

Impact on soil nutrients and soil biota

The proposed project site is gently grades from approximately 5 - 10 m elevation

difference. Since the area is having gentle slope and undulating terrain needs to be

leveled for construction activities and also for approach roads. This process may not

much damage on soil nutrients and biota, but may cause some other secondary

impacts such as decrease the water infiltration and also reduce the ground water level

in the region. Hence, green belt development and rain water harvesting plan for the

proposed project site.

Soil pollution due to DG set

During the construction phase project proponent shall use D.G. set on standby use,

the spent oil generating from the D.G. sets is categorized as Hazardous waste may

164

lead to soil pollution, which need to be disposed off to the authorized

recyclers/reclamation units as per the Pollution Control Board guidelines.

If in case of any spillage of spent fuel, that soil will be excavated and will be disposed

off to authorized disposal site.

Top Soil Loss

From the proposed project site 30,750 cum of top soil will be excavated during

construction phase and it will be preserved and reused for green belt.

Impact on Vegetation

There are no trees coming in the proposed expansion area and no trees will be felled,

hence no impacts on soil or landuse system of the proposed project site.

Impact during Operational phase

During operation phase the soil will not be affected due to any operation. However,

any percolation of any contaminates into ground water will be prevented by

constructing suitable storage facilities as per guidelines of CPCB and MoEF by

providing HDPE lining.

Another manner in which the soils within the impact zone might undergo changes is

due to deposition of air pollutants. The characteristics of dispersion of pollutants from

the stack indicate that the incremental concentration of PM is of insignificant value.

Moreover, the Air pollution control devices such as ESPs and bag filter will be

installed, thus the emission will have insignificant amount of PM. The site receives

favorable wind which will help in dispersion of the pollutants to longer distances.

4.3.2 Mitigation measures with respect soil environment

During Construction phase

Muck Disposal Plan

The excavated top soil coming in the proposed construction site will be removed in

advance and will be reused for green belt development. During the process of

excavation if stones and gravels are encountered, the same should be used in

construction work or can be used construction of check dams, gully plugs, retaining

walls etc. Apart from these if there is any generation of large quantity of muck, it

will be stacked to height not exceeding 2m in designated area within the proposed

project site.

Slope stabilization and Soil embankments

Soil conservation and slip protection works will be carried out by constructing check

walls, retaining walls, terracing, rock anchors, rock bolts, shot create with wire mesh

and wire crates etc. In order to protect the structures of the project a number of soil

165

erosion/slope stabilization measures have to be taken up project authority.

Depending upon the structures/geological conditions of the area the soil erosion/

slope stabilization measures should be executed at different locations of the project.

Grading (the excavation and creation of the road bench) creates large expanses of bare

soil, and should therefore be performed only during dry spring, summer or early fall

conditions. All road construction activities, including erosion control work, will be

scheduled for completion before the onset of the rainy period.

Balanced Cut and Fill (BCF) Construction

In BCF construction, the dozer starts at the top of the proposed cut slope, excavating

and side casting material until the desired road grade and width. Material is pushed

or "drifted" in front of the blade to areas where fill is needed. Road fill is used to cover

culverts and build up flat or low areas along the alignment. In BCF construction,

some of the waste material moves down the slope below the final roadbed and

cannot be compacted or contained.

Use of excavated top soil for green belt development

Soil and water conservation works consists of a comprehensive package of practices

in green belt development. Given excellent implementation of soil and water

conservation measures in a plantation, more than half the work is done. Of course, the

final success of the plantations will depend as much on integration of all the factors

as on the quality of each item of work; but being central to a plantations success, no

efforts should be spared to execute soil and water conservation works in the most

effective manner possible. The project proponent have reserved one third of the area

(33%) for green belt development and forty four tree species have been suggested for

planting. The top soil of 30 cm will be carefully excavated and it will be stored in a

designated place and then it will be mixed with farm yard manure, and it will be

applied to plants. During pit –digging the soil should be dumped in a heap downside

of the pit and the excavated soil will be used to construction of saucers. The heaped

excavated soil will be used for filling in the immediate vicinity of the root zone of the

plants during planting operation. If the excavated soil contains excessive boulders,

stones or other undesirable materials should be cleaned and then will be used. The

excavated soil can also be used to construct rain water harvesting structures like gully

plugging, check dam and contour bund formation around the plants in green belt

area.

Apart from the above following methods will be followed:

Extent of vegetation removal will be minimized to prevent extent of soil erosion.

Effort will be made to minimize the cutting operations by optimal utilization of

existing contours so as to avoid soil erosion/loosening of top soil.

166

Unscientific dumping of solid wastes (viz., Industrial solid waste, domestic solid

wastes, ETP sludge, excavated earth, construction debris) will be prohibited and

instead disposed through proper treatment, reused as backfilling/leveling

purposes, used in pavements, drains works and sludge as a manure will be reused

for greenbelt/landscaping development.

Hazardous materials used during the period of construction like petrol cans,

diesel cans/drums, paints cans/containers etc., will be stored and disposed off to

KSPCB authorized recyclers.

Vehicle maintenance area will be made impervious to avoid impact of accidental

spillage of oil on soil.

Monthly soil quality analysis will be carried out by collection soil samples from

treated effluent discharging are and analyzed to overview the impact of treated

water on soil environment especially on the fertility status.

The construction debris will be reused / recycled for back filling / sub base

work for roads pavements and drains within the project site.

Mitigation measures during operational phase of the project

Using Bagasse and Press mud as a manure

Bagasse, Press mud and Boiler ash are the main solid wastes generated from the

proposed project. Boiler ash contains potassium; hence it can be used as manure.

Press mud contains many useful nutrients; it can also be used as manure. Boiler ash

is mixed with press mud and is used as manure in the cane fields.

4.4 Air Environment

4.4.1 Impact on Air Environment

Impact during Construction phase

Particulate Matter (PM) would be the predominant pollutant generated from

construction activities. The gaseous emissions such as SO2, NOx would be generated

from the construction equipment’s from movement of vehicles.

Impact of construction activities on air quality is a cause for concern mainly in the dry

months due to settling of dust particles. The main sources of emission during the

construction period are the movement of equipments at site and dust emitted during

the leveling, grading, earthworks, foundation works and other construction related

activities. The dust emitted during the above mentioned activities depend upon the

type of soil being excavated and the ambient humidity levels.

The impact is likely to be for short duration and confined locally to the construction

site itself. The composition of dust in this kind of operation is however mostly coarse

167

particles, inorganic and non-toxic in nature. These are not expected to travel long

distance before settling.

The impact will, however, be reversible, marginal, and temporary in nature and

levels decreases gradually as project progresses.

The impact of such activities would be temporary and restricted to the construction

phase. The impact will be confined within the project boundary and is expected to be

negligible outside the project boundaries.

Impacts during Operational phase:

The main sources of Air Pollution in the proposed project are the Boiler.

Boiler

The capacity of the Boiler installed is as per the following table. However emission

from the boiler will be taken care by providing adequate stack height as per the

CPCB guidelines. The details regarding the boiler are given below:

Table 4.1: Boiler Details

Capacity Pressure Temperature Quantity Type Chimney Air

105 TPH

( Existing )

For Sugar Co-gen

67 ATA 510 oC 1 Nos Bagasse fuel

Travelling Grate boiler

Ø 3.2 m

effective dia. 65 m

height

Electro Static

Precipitator

240 TPH

( Proposed )

For Sugar Co-gen

87 ATA 510 oC 1 Nos Bagasse fuel

Travelling Grate boiler

Ø 4.0 m effective dia. 77 m

height

Electro Static

Precipitator

24 TPH

boiler,

(Existing)

Distillery unit

65 ATA 400oC 1 Nos FBC

Fluidized Bed

Combustion boiler

Ø 1.4 m effective dia. 60 m

height

Electro Static

Precipitator

Even though DG sets will be used at site, for the prediction of air pollution from the

project, it is not included as the same will be only used during power failure during

initial stages and rest of the time, power will be utilized from cogeneration unit.

Characteristics of fuels used in the boiler

Sl. No.

Parameter Fuel

Bagasse Coal CSW Diesel

168

1 Heat value, GCV, kcal/kg 2200 5000 1600 10700

2 S content, kg/T 0.1 10 10 1 3 Ash, kg/T 10 100 20 - 4 Steam / fuel ratio, kg/kg 2.4 5.5 1.6 -

Modeling Procedure

Analysis details

Tools and methods

Source dispersion analysis is assumed based on AERMOD ViewTM model. This model

enables analysis with respect to PM10, SO2 and NOx gives results in simple to

understand graphical format.

The following steps are involved in the analysis:

Inputs are entered into the software as per the general modeling parameters.

Information on the stack i.e. height, diameter, exit gas velocity, temperature and

receptor is added to the software.

The analysis process is done by the model.

Input(s) needed and assumption

Table 4.2 illustrates series of input and some of assumptions gone into the model.

Table 4.2: Input and Assumptions

Sl. No.

Inputs Required Availability for this project

1 Stack emission parameter

Stack height Yes

Stack diameter Yes

Flue gas velocity Yes

Exit gas temperature Yes

2 Meteorological Parameters

Wind Speed, Wind Direction, Cloud Cover, Temperature, Humidity, Station Pressure, etc.

Onsite monitoring

3 Emission Parameters Expressed in grams/second emitted

US-EPA, AP42

4 Receptor Location Uniform grid Uniform grid

Methodology

For the stack proposed on site details procured from Emission Regulations – Part IV,

CPCB’86 was utilized for emissions estimation. Widespread method based on the data

available was to use emissions in terms of pollutant mass per second emitted.

169

Data collection

The stack details and flue gas characteristics are provided in Table 4.3.

Table: 4.3: Stack and flue gas emissions details

Parameters Unit Old Sugar Co-Gen

Old Distillery

New Sugar Co-Gen

Stack height m 65 m Above 60 m 77 m

Stack diameter at exit / top m 3.2 1.4 4.0

Stack exit gas velocity m/s 12 18 10

Stack gas temperature at exit °C 160 185 160

Fuel type Bagasse Spent wash + Bagasse

Bagasse

Fuel requirement T/day 1050 140 + 81 2400

PM Emission g/sec 8.9415 2.4274 11.6426

SO2 Emission g/sec 7.1532 1.9419 9.3141

NOx Emission g/sec 7.1532 1.9419 9.3141

Air pollution control equipment




Site specific wind-rose for this season is shown in below figure, the wind blowing

from East to West direction. For the site-specific mixing heights CPCB document

PROBES/88/2002-2003 is followed.

Wind rose Plot for the study period

170

Model Inputs

AERMOD ViewTM has been used for evaluating the emission scenarios for proposed

project. The inputs to the model are defined in 5 functional pathways as represented

in the following sections. Each of these functional parameters include several options

that may be user defined or set as default, the details of some of these essential

elements of AERMOD ViewTM runs have been explained in the discussions.

A. Control pathway inputs

Default option.

Emission concentration.

Averaging period of 24 hr as per NAAQS pollutant type.

B. Source pathway inputs

Includes definition of source, its locations.

Stack source parameter include emissions (g/s)

C. Receptors pathway inputs

Cartesian grid starting at the SE corner of the ward with 2000m increment over

X & Y coordinates, thus forming a receptor output grid radius of 10km.

Uniform grid is selected with 10x10 cell size.

D. Meteorology pathways inputs

One hourly data for period that is from November to December’16 and

March’17 was used as an input in the meteorology processor to generate model

ready one hourly input surface & profile meteorology files.

Roughness length of 1m of measurement height, displacement height of 0.2m,

Albedo of 0.2 & measurement height at which measurements of meteorology

have been done.

The minimum wind speed (0.5 m/s lower than 1m/s considered as calm by

IMD), minimum mixed layer height (50m), and minimum heat flux 20

W/M2/s).

The Bowen ratio=Sensible Heat flux/Latent Heat Flux as a function of month

to allow smaller Bowen Ratios during the Indian monsoon season when the

ground is wet and latent heat fluxes become significant (from 2 in non-

monsoon to 0.5 in monsoon).

The potential temperature gradient above the mixed layer (0.008 degrees/m)

The weather data for project site station have been used for the present project.

The data was compiled in AERMET module of AERMOD ViewTM and the

results of this final analysis were used as input meteorological data.

171

E. Output Pathway

The model has been run for 24hr average as per the pollutant type and the NAAQS

standards criteria. The contour for 1st highest reading is shown for each pollutant

based on BAU scenario.

Model outputs were obtained for emissions of each of the pollutants in each of the

2km x 2km receptor grid spread across gridded impact zone. Contour maps are

plotted for each of the study pollutants and the impact by the point source. This map

is superimposed on the road tile map of the proposed location.

Results

The point sources are represented in the contour plots for concentration to understand

the impact of on the study domain. Modeled pollutant concentrations for existing two

stacks and one proposed stack is given in Table 4.4 and dispersion trend is shown as

iso-pleths in Figure 4.1 to 4.6 for PM, SO2 and NOX respectively.

Table 4.4: Modeled concentrations for present scenario

Parameters Present Levels (µg/m3)

Distance from Site

Proposed Levels

(µg/m3)

Distance from Site

PM10 (24hr average) 0.75 W @ 2.0 km 1.23 W @ 2.0 km

SO2 (24hr average) 0.60 0.98

NOX (24hr average) 0.60 0.98

The maximum incremental concentration of PM, SO2 and NOX are superimposed on

the baseline concentrations recorded during the study period to arrive at the likely

resultant concentrations after implementation of the proposed boiler. Comparative

account of each pollutant concentration with respective National Ambient Air Quality

Standards (NAAQS) is represented in Table 4.5.

Table 4.5: Comparative Account of resultant concentration

Parameters Concentrations (µg/m3) NAAQS*

(µg/m3) Baseline Incremental Resultant

PM10 (24hr average) 86 0.48 86.48 100

SO2 (24hr average) 16 0.38 16.63 80

NOX (24hr average) 24 0.38 24.65 80

*NAAQS – National Ambient Air Quality Standards, 2009

172

Figure 4.1: Present 24hr average emission dispersion contours for PM10

(Existing stacks)

Figure 4.2: Present 24hr average emission dispersion contours for SO2

(Existing stacks)

173

Figure 4.3: Present 24hr average emission dispersion contours for NOX

(Existing stacks)

Figure 4.4: Present 24hr average emission dispersion contours for PM10

(With proposed stacks)

174

Figure 4.5: Present 24hr average emission dispersion contours for SO2


Figure 4.6: Present 24hr average emission dispersion contours for NOX


175

Conclusion

The predicted average concentrations with baseline BAU from the project will be

below the standards. Hence, it can be concluded that there will not be any ill impact

because of the said project. Whereas probable negligible impacts will be maintained

so as to control shock load and intern to keep the air quality pollutant free.

Electrostatic Precipitator will be provided for proposed sugar + co-gen boiler as air

pollution control measures and stack of adequate height, is also provided to disperse

the flue gas.

4.4.2 Mitigation measures w.r.t Air Environment

Mitigation measures suggested during construction phase of the project

Any vehicle not meeting the vehicular pollution standards will not be allowed

within the construction activity and emission certificate will be made mandatory

& enforced to contractor to maintain.

Water will be sprayed through water sprinklers/water tankers during dust

generating activities like site clearing, leveling, excavation, material handling etc to

suppress the dust.

Vehicles delivering loose and fine materials like sand and fine aggregates will

be covered by tarpaulin sheets to reduce spills on roads and to reduce fugitive

emissions.

The height from which excavated materials are dropped shall be controlled

to a minimum practical height to limit fugitive dust generation from unloading.

Monthly Ambient Air Quality Monitoring will be carried out to ensure for

compliance to NAAQ, 2009 standards.

Mitigation measures suggested during operation phase

Following measures will be taken to reduce the impact on the air quality:

Stacks/chimney will be provided to Boilers and D.G. sets as per KSPCB Norms.

ESP will be provided for the proposed boiler of 240 TPH with a new stack of

height of 77 m.

33% Greenbelt development already created aesthetic environment and also

acts as a pollution sink for dust emissions.

Fugitive Emissions

The presence of fugitive emissions would be visible if not controlled and would cause

significant adverse impact in working zone. A number of mitigation measures

implemented to control fugitive emissions and reviewed continuously such as:

Designing the plant layout in such a way that, so as to virtually eliminate need of

using heavy equipment for material handling in the main plant.

176

Internal roads paved and leveled without undulations as well as sharp curves,

maintain slow speed of vehicular movements.

No open storage of raw materials.

Curtain tree plantation on surrounding is planned in the available area.

Transportation vehicles to bring in raw materials & fuels such as Rubber wheel

carts, tractors and trucks not to be filled high, sides must be cladded, maintain

slow speed and avoiding vibrations en-route.

Table 4.6: Fugitive Emissions control strategy

Sl. No. Item Control Strategy

1 Transportation Water sprinklers will be provided to reduce dust.

2 Cane handling Water sprays de-dusting. Plantation around source

3 Bagasse storage Design stockpiles to reduce exposure to prevailing winds.

Minimizing the distance that bagasse falls during movement.

Fully enclosing bagasse handling conveyors, particularly transfer points.

Installing belt cleaning systems so that bagasse is not carried back on the underside of conveyor belts.

Implementing a bagasse dust management plan that prescribes mitigation measures for unfavorable weather conditions.

Installing a water spray system to reduce dust emissions around, and from, the site.

4 Greenery Greenbelt development (33 % of total plot area)

Internal Transportation

All raw materials from raw material storage to mill house will be transported

by cane conveyors. All the materials in the sugar section will be transported using

inter carriers, Sugar carriers.

Impact on traffic is negligible as the existing traffic around the villages is very

minimum. Mitigation measures for impact on traffic

Parking area of 4 Acres is reserved

The transportation density on the road is likely to increases by about 10 %.

The SH 55 is the major road and has adequate capacity to take the additional

vehicular load.

The road passes through villages and agriculture lands.

Road side tree plantation is already present. The industry will take measures to

additional plantation on road sides.

177

Bell mouth shape geometry will be provided at entry and exit gates.

Considering the facilities as above the impact of additional transportation on

road will be insignificant.

4.5 Noise Environment

4.5.1 Impact on Noise Environment

Impact during Construction Phase

During construction phase, various sources of noise pollution will be from the

operation of machineries like compactors, concrete plant, cranes etc. Other sources of

noise pollution during construction period includes movement of vehicles for

unloading of construction materials, fabrication, handling of equipment and

materials, operation of batching plants. Overall, the impact of noise generated on the

Environment is likely to be insignificant, reversible and localized in nature and

mainly confined to the day time.


Noise generating machinery operations at sugar unit are sugarcane cutting, crushing,

lime addition, clarification, evaporation, sugar separation, steam production, noise

making equipments such as cutters, crushers, mixers, pumps, boilers etc.

All connecting roads to sugar mill complex will be metaled one. Cane loading will be

restricted to the capacity. Vehicle maintenance, proper lubrication to machinery will

be arranged. Tree plantation on the campus and on the connecting roads is

initiated and will be done each year.

Noise from cogeneration unit

1. Steam turbines : 85-90 dB (A) 2. Diesel Generators : 75-80 dB (A) 3. Fans, blowers and compressors: 80-85 dB (A)

The sound intensity appears to be at moderate level in co-gen power. In general at the

locations of turbines, compressors, fans etc., the sound intensity generally exceeds the

limit. Control measures will be adopted to reduce noise level within the permissible

limits at the source itself. These machineries are installed on vibration proof

foundation and base. Steam turbine and diesel generators are located in isolated and

acoustic building. The workers engaged in such locations are provided with earmuffs

to have additional safety against noise nuisance. These units will be manufactured to

meet the noise levels as per MOEF/ CPCB guidelines.

DG set are provided with in-built acoustics measures. Also ambient noise levels will

be ensured within the ambient standards by inbuilt design of mechanical equipment

and building apart from vegetation (tree plantations) along the periphery and at

various locations within the industry premises.

178

Source of noise will be various components of industrial operations like crushing,

operation of the boiler, power plant, D G Sets and vehicular movement.

4.5.2 Mitigation Measures w.r.t. Noise Environment

Provision of insulating caps and ads at the exit of noise source on the

machinery;

Construction equipment generating minimum noise and vibration will be

chosen.

The use of damping materials such as thin rubber / lead sheet for wrapping

the work places line compressors, generators sets.

Shock absorbing techniques will be adopted to reduce impact;

Ear plugs will be provided to the workers exposed to high noise prone

activity and it will be enforced to be used by the workers;

Greenbelt/Landscape development along the periphery of the proposed site

will act as a noise attenuator.

Monthly Ambient noise level monitoring will conducted during construction

phase and operation phase to conform to the stipulated standards both during

day and night time as per KSPCB.

Construction activities will be restricted only during day time.

D. G. Sets with acoustic enclosures will be provided.

4.6 Water Environment

4.6.1 Impact on Water Environment


During construction stage, initially water will be drawn from tube-wells till the

permanent water system is laid. The extraction of water from the ground water

reserves of the area may not lead to any major adverse impact on ground water

table, as there is sufficient ground water availability in the vicinity of the plant.

Hydrological investigations have ascertained the ground water potential.

The construction workers colony will he provided with drinking water taps and

sanitation discharge through septic tanks into soak pits. The exploitation of ground

water resources during the construction phase will not have a significant impact on

the ground water availability in the area.


Impacts can be anticipated on the soil & ground water environment of effluent is not

treated to KSPCB discharge standards for onland irrigation/greenbelt

development/gardening as improper treated discharge will bear foul smell and

179

creates septic condition on the soil and since the discharge within the premises is only

option for reuse, long term effects can be anticipated on to the ground water of the

region. The sewage generated from the domestic activities if not treated will bear the

above same impact.

Table 4.7: Water Conservation Proposal Techniques Considered In the Complex

Sl. No Stations Conservation Proposals /Techniques

1 Milling Plant Use fully hot condensate instead of fresh water supplement

2 Boiler feed water Overflow of all condensates from the vapour cells, first body evaporator and condensate pan shall be connected to a small storage tank instead of allowing to overflow into gutters

3 Clarification House Compressors Recirculate the cooling waters

4 Sulphur Burner Use treated effluent water boiler blow down & cooling tower blow down after treatment in neutralization pit for cooling purpose and connect it to spray pond to reduce the temperature

5 Boiling and Centrifuge Section Instead of allowing fresh water to go to spray pond after cooling at vertical crystallizers and massecuite allow it to go service tank

6 Preparation of seed and mixture Use hot water instead of fresh water

7 Cooling waters Mill drive, mill bearing, power

house turbines, fiberiser, compressor,

cooling waters and vertical crystallizers The cost for Implementation of water conservation is negligible as most of the options can be carried out with the waste materials available in the factory. The only major expenditure is Mini- cooling tower to reduce the temperature and pipe connections for recycling ,Source: CPCB.

4.6.2 Mitigation Measures

During construction stage, the construction workers colony will he provided

with drinking water and sanitation arrangements by providing 12 No. s toilets, 6

Bathrooms and sewage treatment by septic tank (18KL capacity with 3.5m X 2.0 m

X 2.5m + 0.3 FB) & 2 No.s soak pits (1.5m dia X 3 m depth).

Wastewater generated from the project activities including the sewage from

the domestic activities will be treated in ETP of 1500 KLD capacity and the treated

wastewater/trade effluent/treated effluent will be reused on land for

irrigation/greenbelt development/gardening purposes.

All along the internal road network, storm water drains (0.8 m X 0.6 m) will be

provided to collect storm water. The storm water collection system will be

180

designed in such a manner so that storm water from garden, parking area,

roadways and lawns is used for recharging of ground water through Recharge

shaft (8 No.s).

During the construction stage, water stagnation will be avoided by pumping the

water and utilizing the same for dust suppression purposes/gardening/greenery

development purposes. Whereas during the operation phase, the same will be

avoided by providing drain network.

First aid facilities and center will be provided in both the stages.

Effluent treatment plant design report

1132 KLD Effluent generated from the process and domestic waste will be treated in

the ETP of capacity 1500 KLD based on UASBR.

Design Data and Performance Projections

The trade effluent treatment plant is designed based on the following considerations;

Effluent Characteristics

Quantity of Effluent

Prescribed norms for discharge of treated trade effluent.

The combined trade effluent data assumed for designing is as follows;

Inlet combined trade effluent characteristics:

Crushing Capacity : 14000 TCD Effluent Flow rate per day max. : 1400 KLD Effluent Flow rate per hour max. : 50 KL Temperature : 38– 40 Deg.C pH : 4.5 – 6.0 T.D.S : 2300 to 2450 ppm max. Suspended Solids : 230 to 250 ppm B.O.D : 1800 to 2200 ppm Oil/Grease : 20 to 40 ppm

Quality of Treated trade effluent:

Temperature : 30 – 40 Deg.C pH : 7.0 – 7.8 T.D.S : Less than 2000 ppm Suspended Solids : less than 100 ppm B.O.D : less than 100 ppm Oil/Grease : less than 05 ppm

The treated effluent shall be utilized for Plantation, gardening and irrigation purpose.

181

Treatment Procedure:

The mill plant effluent contains oil and fibre in large concentration. This effluent is

therefore subjected to de-skimming operation in mill plant itself to free it from oil and

fibre and then mixed with other factory effluents. The combined effluents are

subjected to preliminary and secondary treatment as described below. The flow

diagram of effluent treatment plant is given in Figure 2.8. The excess vapour

condensate which is let out from the plant is collected separately in a storage tank.

This is of relatively good quality and is suitable for irrigation. It is tested for quality

and then let out for gardening in factory premises or to agriculture land for irrigation.

i. Preliminary treatment

Combined effluent in a common drainage is led to the effluent treatment premise. It is

passed through bar screen, grit chamber and oil separator and then received in a

neutraliser cum equalization tank of about 20 min hold-up capacity. Alkali is added

into the neutraliser to raise the effluent pH to about 7.5-8.0 and also to precipitate

some of the dissolved solids. The neutralised effluent is passed through the primary

clarifier of 2.5 to 3.0 hr detention period. The sludge collected at the bottom is

pumped to sludge drying bed for dewatering. The clear overflow from the clarifier is

passed to biological treatment plant for further treatment. 70% of suspended solids,

20% of BOD and 30% of dissolved solids present in effluent are expected to be

removed in preliminary treatment.

ii. Secondary treatment

This consists of the two stage activated sludge process. One stage consists of diffuser

system (Bottom aeration) and another one is aeration tank with fixed surface aerators

and secondary clarifiers. The effluents containing suspended biomass are clarified in

respective secondary clarifiers. Biomass settled at the clarifiers is recycled to aeration

process to maintain the concentration of mixed liquor suspended solids (MLSS) in

Diffusor & aeration tank at the desired level. The excess bio-mass (sludge) from

secondary clarifier is passed to sludge drying beds. The clear effluent from last

clarifier is collected in a sump of about 8 hours capacity and then let out to

agricultural land for irrigation.

Specification of Effluent Treatment Units:

It is proposed install 1500 KLD effluent treatment plant to cater the requirement for

Sugar cane crushing capacity of 14000 TCD. The proposed equipment’s details of the

same are as below; the design details of 1500 KLD effluent treatment plant is already

discussed in chapter 2 of EIA report.

182

Treatment Scheme:

The combined effluent from the factory shall flow through Main gutter to ETP. The

effluent is passed through bar screen, Oil separator, neutralizer, equalization tank,

primary settling tank, USBAR Anaerobic system, Aeration tanks, Secondary Clarifiers

and Polishing Pond and then let out as treated effluent for use in gardening and

irrigation. The sludge collected at Secondary clarifiers is recycled to aeration tank and

/ or to sludge drying bed. Cleaning day waste water, which is highly alkaline, is

collected in cleaning day sump separately and then gradually added to regular

treatment. An additional oil separator is provided at mill house of the sugar plant to

remove the oil and fibers. Excess hot water generated from sugar plant is collected &

cooled in cooling tower in two stages and partly recycled back in process and partly

used for irrigation.

Sludge generated from primary settling tank to separate sludge drying beds. The

drainage from sludge drying bed is taken back to equalization tank for treatment.

Sl. No. Description Size

1 Bar Screen Chamber 0.6 mt x 1.2 mt x 0.55 mt

2 Oil and Grease Chamber 4.0 m x 1.5 m x 1.5 m

4 Flash mixer 2 m x 2 m x 1.5 m

5 Flocculator 2 m x 3 m x 1.5 m

6 Primary Settling Tank 8 m x 8 m x 3 m HT

7 Equalization Tank 20 m x 16 m x 3.0 m Depth

8 Anaerobic lagoon – 1 20m x 36 m x 3.0 m HT

9 Neutralizer/ Buffer Tank 3.0 m x 3.0 m x 3.0 m

10 Up Flow Anaerobic Sludge Blanket Reactor (UASBR) 21 m dia x 7.0 HT (approx.)

11 Aeration Tank –I ( Diffuser ) 20m x 36 m x 3.0 m HT

12 Aeration Tank – II ( Surface) 19 m x 20 m x 3.0 m HT

13 Clarifier – II 7.5 m dia x 3.0 m HT

14 Polish Pond 12.5 m x 12.5 m x 2.5 m HT

15 Sludge Drying Beds – 3 Nos 20 m x 8 m x 8 m HT

Storm Water Management

M/s Nandi Sahakari Sakkare Karkhane Niyamit is planning to have a system of

rainwater harvesting at plant. Rainwater harvesting is primarily dependent on

various site characteristics such as soil properly, catchments characteristics; rainfall

characteristic, and ground water table etc. There are artificial as well as natural

rainwater harvesting system.

Construction of rainwater filter bed at centralized place where water from

individual unit as well as storm water from open area will be diverted. The rainwater

carries suspended solids as washed out from open area. A filter bed filters the

particles thus prevent them from reaching/contaminating ground water. The first

layer of filter bed will be coarse sand the second layer will be pebbles and third

183

layer will be gravel. The filtrate thus collected from the bottom of filter bed will be

piped to recharge bed.

Average annual rainfall = 620 mm

Storm water gutters/drains is constructed in the premises on either side of the

haul roads (0.8 m X 0.6 m) and along the periphery of 1.0 m X 0.6 m

Garland channels will be provided around the storage yards.

As per estimation rain water thus collected and harvested of about 22,50,000

lts/annum will be used for greenery development/ sprinkling applications and

non-potable uses thereby conservation fresh water requirement.

Surface Rainwater harvesting sump of capacity 2250 KLD (25 m X 30 m X 3.0 m)

is implemented.

Groundwater recharge through shafts is recommended in these areas. The

shafts are deep pits with dimensions of 1m x 2m x 10 m of width, length and

depth respectively. These shafts may be uncased on the top, but are back filled

with permeable soil, which facilitate more effective and faster percolation.

Typical designing of recharge shaft is shown below:

Figure 4.7: Typical section of recharge shaft

4.7 Geology and Hydrology

Mitigation Measures for Minimizing the Impacts

184

The proposed project doesn’t abstract any ground water, the impact due to the

project is minimum.

In the study area following methods can be encouraged to people, to increase the

ground water table of the region.

Changes in cropping pattern

Conjunctive use of Surface and ground water

Resort to drip / sprinkler irrigation storing in small sumps

Proper planning of available water and select crop pattern

Roof top Rainwater Harvesting for domestic water consumption

Rainwater run-off Recharge to ground water through various conservation

structures.

Discourage application of traditional farming and irrigation methods

Unscientific development of ground water results in depletion of bore well yields

and lowering of water table.

Encourage low crop water requirement crops iv. Encourage Drip / sprinkler

farming

Encourage water consuming crops at head reaches for arresting seepage of

ground water and rise in ground water levels.

Ground water extraction is more than the ground water recharge, Generally this

happens in the tail end of the command area.

Implementation of recharge to ground water body through rainwater harvesting.

Conjunctive use of surface and ground water ensures rise in ground water level

and improves water quality.

4.8 Biological Environment

There is no direct impact on biological environment (flora and fauna) anticipated due

to the project. However, changes occurring on air, water and land environment will

have indirect impact. The project site encounters species like Prosopis juliflora and

Lagenocarpus rigidus and there is no cutting of trees in the project site. Hence, no

impacts envisaged. However, as part of the greenbelt development, native species are

proposed to be planted at site which will eventually help in improvement of the biota

of the region.

Mitigation Measures

Green belt will be developed and local species will be planted

All the raw materials transporting vehicles shall be covered with tarpaulins so

that the dispersion of air pollutants shall be avoided.

All the raw materials transporting vehicles shall be periodically maintained and

clean fuel shall be used for vehicles.

185

Bharath IV stage vehicles shall be used for transportation of materials to

reduce the noise levels.

Earth work and construction debris shall be reused for backfilling and

construction /laying of roads.

Operation Phase

No major impacts are anticipated during operation phase of the project on biological

environment. However, with the development of green belt inside the project site

shall attract, the movement of birds, butterflies, etc resulting in positive impact.

Maintenance of greenbelt will be undertaken with proper watering during summer.

4.9 Socio Economic Environment

4.9.1 Impact on Socio Economic Environment

Impact during Construction

Impact on Demography

The peak workforce strength during construction would rise-up to hundred

persons. Though the technical persons and skilled labors would by and large, be

hired from outside the study area, bulk of the labor force would comprise of

unskilled and semi-skilled workers, a substantial number of whom would

presumably be recruited from the surrounding areas itself. Since majority of the

unskilled workforce would be from surrounding areas, they would settle in the

villages.

Therefore, the demographic scenario including population, sex-ratio, literacy level

etc. would undergo certain local changes within a limited peripheral zone. The overall

impact over the study area would be marginal.

Impact on Socio-economic

Construction of any major industrial project invariably results in socio-economic

changes. The influx of material and money lends to change the economic status of the

community. Markets, workshops and commercial centers would develop in the area.

Construction of the project will involve a substantial unskilled labour force. Since

most of the unskilled labour force will be from nearby village, unplanned and

haphazard development of slums would not be significant. However, labour camps

with provision of basic amenities of water supply and sanitation etc. would be

provided which would go long way in curbing the degradation of the physical and

aesthetic environment.

Impact during Operation

Impact on Demographic Pattern

186

Operation of the unit will require an appreciable quantum of skilled and semi-skilled

workforce which, would have to be imported from outside the study area.

Moreover, a sizeable number of service class people who are directly connected with

the operating personnel of the plant, e.g. house servants, washer man, barbers,

shopkeepers etc. will flow in from the neighboring areas. As the plant and its

ancillary facilities act as an active nucleus of activity, a shift of population towards

this center will also occur within the study area.

The migration of people will marginally increase the total population in the study

area particularly in the peripheral zone. This would result in an alteration of the local

demographic pattern. The high literacy level of people and their families involved

in the operation of the plant would certainly enhance the overall literacy rate within

the study area. The population density in the peripheral zone will also tend to rise,

though very marginally.

Impact on Socioeconomic

This project will definitely alter the simple and quiet rural nature of the locality,

which exists today. As there will be a large flow of financial and material resources,

there remains a large possibility of growth of population in the business, trade,

commerce and service sector. The large inflow of financial and material resources

accompanied with the urban culture complete with technological inputs as modern

housing, water closets, radio, television, synthetic fibers, use of steel and aluminum,

use of LPG/electricity for domestic cooking would all contribute towards changing

the socioeconomic environment of the areas as this would introduce a mixed culture

emphasizing urban traits in place of traditional, prevalent rural customs. The

economic, cultural and technological changes are likely to induce social stress and

ethical changes. All these would change the local life style.

Thus, a simple backward community may be transformed into a semi-urban complex

within a short time frame. Such impacts are inevitable, that could also be felt in case of

the present project; however, these would be attempted to be controlled and

minimized by ensuring suitable human management, stable working conditions,

security and the provision of adequate compensation.

At the same time, however, farmers may be induced to adopt more intensive

agricultural and animal husbandry practices, resulting in higher production and

boosting up of the area economy.

It has been observed that people always have a propensity to settle at locations where

civic amenities as transportation, postal service, educational institutions, drinking

water, market, medical treatment, electricity etc. are easily available within a short

distance, as well as the working place being within a reasonable distance.

187

4.10 Health Environment

4.10.1 Impact on Health Environment


Impacts on health of the construction workers/labors/personnel deployed in the site

can be anticipated through poor quality of water supply, illegal dumping of solid

waste, creation of mosquito breeding sites, poor supervision of the works carried out

at higher level improper hygienic condition and lack of safety items

(PPE’s)/instructions/guidelines/practices.


Impact on health of the workers is generally anticipated from improper handling of

solid waste at the source through creation of mosquito breeding sites and through

direct contact of wastewater near ETP areas.

4.10.2 Mitigation Measures

Potable water supply to the construction workers/laborers/personnel is ensured

conforming to IS 10500:2012 (Second Revision) drinking water quality standards.

PPEs will be provided to the workforce based on the type of work assigned

during the both stages.

First Aid Centre with its facilities will be provided.

Stagnation of water will be avoided by providing drains during the operation

phases and pumping out the same and utilizing it for other secondary purposes

during the construction stage.

Solid wastes will be scientifically handled and disposed by utilizing the same

within the premises in the compost production or sold to members farmers as

manure.

4.11 Solid Waste and Hazardous waste Generation and Management for Disposal

Impact due to construction phase

During construction phase, solid waste such as excavated soil, debris, some metal

waste, municipal waste and oil & grease from construction machines will be

generated.

Domestic solid wastes from the labor sheds if not properly disposed might impact

in the health of the workers, also creates unaesthetic environment and inturn affect

the soil environment.

188

Table 4.8 (a): Solid and Hazardous waste generated in the operation phase of the

project for Co-gen Sugar.

Sl. No

Solid waste

Quantity Method of collection

Method of

Storage

Mode of disposal

Solid Waste

1 Bagasse 4200 TPD Mechanical

conveyor

Bagasse storage

Sent to

cogeneration to

use as fuel as

boiler

2 Boiler- Ash

69 TPD Mechanical

conveyor into common silo for further disposal

Ash storage yard

Mixed in required proportions and used as manure.

3 Press mud

560 TPD Mechanical

conveyor

Bio compost yard

4 Sludge

from

ETP

300 Kgs /d Sludge drying beds

Bio compost yard

5 Lime Grit

0.6 TPD Mechanical

screw conveyor

Used in low

lying areas

6 Domestic

solid

waste

473 Kgs /d Collection bins Segregated

and organic

waste is

composted and

inorganic waste

is stored in a

separate space

provided

Nearby

municipal

agencies

Hazardous waste

1 Used oil

from

DG sets

75 lts Stored in leak

proof sealed

barrels

Hazardous

storage

area

Used as

lubricants

within the industry 2 Spent

turbine

oil waste

50 lts

3 Waste

oil

residue

from

ETP

50 lts

189

Table 4.8 (b) : Solid and Hazardous waste generated in the operation phase of the

project for Distillery.

Yeast sludge. The yeast and other sludge are obtained from the fermenter and bio-digester. The sludge is removed periodically from bio-digester and fermenter. The quantity of sludge after drying is about 2 T/month.

The solids are mainly the spent yeast and other bio-mass. It contains plant nutrients such as phosphorus, potash, nitrogen and other bio materials.

Hence, this is dried and then used in composting process along with the press mud.

Boiler ash Potash and phosphate present in Concentrated Spent Wash will end up in boiler ash.

Boiler ash is sent to farmers for use as soil nutrient. The quantity of boiler ash from distillery boiler will be 30 T/d.

Spent oil and grease

Cooling and lubricating oils are used in diesel engine (D.G set), machinery gears in the plant and electric transformers.

Spent oils of about 0.5 T/A will be generated from these units. Spent oil is sent to authorized reprocessors.

190

Table 4.9: Impact Identification Matrix

Sl. No

Activities

Environmental Attributes

Air Noise Surface

Water

Ground

water Climate

Land

/soil Ecology

Socio

Economics Aesthetics Health

Construction phase

1 Site Clearing/leveling √ √ √ √ √

2 Excavation activities √ √ √

3 Ready-mix concrete preparation √ √ √

4 Transportation of Construction √ √ √

5 Construction activities on land √ √ √ √ √

6 Laying of roads √ √ √ √

7 Labour camps √ √ √ √ √

8 Movement of Vehicles √ √

9 Construction Debris √ √

10 Excavated Earth √

11 Disposal of Sewage √ √ √

12 Disposal of Solid waste √ √ √

13 Stagnation of water √

14 Storm Water √

15 Runoff √

Operation Phase

1 Sugar mill section, Boiler section √ √ √ √ √

2 Operation of D. G. Sets √ √

3 Solid waste Disposal √ √

4 Wastewater Disposal √

5 Sludge Disposal √

6 D.G. Maintenance √ √

7 Runoff √ √

8 Vehicular Traffic √ √

9 Greenery Development √ √

10 Quality of Life √

191

Table 4.10: Characteristics of Environmental Impacts from Construction Activities

Activity Environmental

Attributes Cause

Impact characteristics Impact Evaluation

Nature Duration Reversibility Significance Without

EMP With EMP

Site clearing/ Leveling activities

Air Environment

Dislodging of particles from the ground

Direct, Negative

Short- Term

Reversible Medium 8.5 3.5

Noise Environment

Noise generation from earth excavating equipment

Direct, Negative

Short- Term

Reversible Medium 6 3

Land use/Soil Environment

Excavation Direct, Negative

Long Term Reversible High 7.5 3

Ecology Loss of vegetative cover such as herbs and shrubs

Direct, Negative

Short- Term

Reversible High 7 3

Health Dislodging of particles (SPM/RSPM) from the ground

Direct, Negative

Short- Term


Excavation Activities

Air Environment

Dislodging of particles from the ground

Direct, Negative

Short- Term


Noise Environment

Noise generation from earth excavating equipment

Direct, Negative

Short- Term



Excavation Direct, Negative

Long- Term

Irreversible High 7 2

192

Health Dislodging of particles (SPM/RSPM) from the ground

Direct, Negative

Short- Term

Reversible Medium 8 2.5

Transportation

of

construction

materials

Air Environment

Transport of

construction

material in trucks

& Exhaust

emission from

vehicles

Direct,

Negative Short- Term Reversible

Medium 5 4

Noise

Environment Noise generation from vehicles

Direct,

Negative Short- Term Reversible Low 5 3

Health Risk of accidents

during transit Direct,

Negative Short- Term Reversible Medium 7 5

Ecology Impact of noise on

birds, butterflies

and nocturnal

animals

Direct,

Negative Short- Term Reversible Medium 6.5 2.5

Construction

activities on

Land

Air Environment

Operation of

construction

machinery,

welding activities

and others

Direct,


Noise

Environment Noise generation

from use of

machinery

Direct,


Land use/Soil

Environment Setting up of

Project Direct, Negative

Long Term Irreversible Low 8 4

Ecology Loss of vegetation Direct, Negative

Short -Tem Reversible Medium 6 4

Health Various construction activities

Direct, Negative

Short -Tem Reversible Low 6 4

193

Laying of

Roads Air Environment Operation of

construction

machinery,

Movement of

Vehicles

Direct,

Negative Short- Term Reversible High 7 3

Noise

Environment Noise generation

from use of

machinery,

Vehicular

movement

Direct,

Negative Short- Term Reversible High 7 3


Development of

Roads Direct,

Negative Long Term Irreversible Medium 8 3

Ecology Loss of vegetation Direct,

Negative Short- Term Reversible Medium 7.5 4

Labour

Camps Air Environment Burning of Fuels Direct,


Water Environment (Surface and

Ground)

Disposal of

Sewage Direct, Negative

Short- Term Reversible High 6 3

Land/Soil Environment

Disposal of

Sewage Indirect, Negative

Short- Term Reversible Medium 7 3

Socio-Economic Employment

Opportunities,

Influx of people.

Indirect, Negative


Health Disposal of

Sewage/Solid

wastes

Direct, Negative


Movement

of Vehicles

Air Environment Transportation of

Construction

Materials

Direct, Negative


Noise

Environment Vehicular

movement Direct, Negative

Short- Term Reversible Low 6 3

194

Excavated Earth/Muck

Land/Soil

Environment Foundation works Direct,


Disposal

of Sewage

Water Environment (Surface and

Ground)

Domestic activities from Labour camps/ site office

Direct, Negative


Aesthetics Odour nuisance In Direct, Negative


Health Disposal of

Sewage Direct, Negative


Disposal of

Solid wastes Land/Soil

Environment

Solid waste generation, Land

contamination

Direct, Negative


Aesthetics Odour nuisance Indirect, Negative


Health Degradation of Solid waste, attraction of

flies

Direct, Negative


Stagnation of

Water Health Mosquito breeding

sites Direct, Negative

Short- Term Reversible High 6.5 3.5

Storm water

Run-off Water Environment (Surface)

Construction site

areas Direct, Negative

Short-term Reversible Medium 6 2.5

Land/Soil

Environment Flooding Direct,

Negative Short-term Reversible High 7 3.5

Note: Scale of Impacts: 1-10 (1-Negligible, 3-Low/Less, 5-Moderate/Medium, 8-High/Significant, 10-Adverse Impact)

195

Table 4.11: Characteristics of Environmental Impacts from Operational Phase

Activity Environmental Attributes

Cause Impact characteristics

Nature Duration Reversibility Significance Without EMP

With EMP

Operation of the sugar mill, cogeneration unit

Air Environment Operation of boilers, sugar production

Direct, Negative

Long - Term Reversible High 8 3

Noise Environment

Noise generation from the industrial operations

Direct, Negative

Long - Term Reversible High 7.5 3.5

Water Environment (surface and Ground)

Generation of wastewater

Direct, Negative

Long - Term Reversible Medium 7 4

D.G Set operation

Air Environment Operation of D.G Set during power failure

Direct, Negative

Long - Term Reversible Low 5 1

Noise Environment

Noise generation D.G Set

Direct, Negative

Long - Term Reversible Low 6 1

Greenery Development

Ecology Improvement of local flora and fauna, movement of species

Indirect Positive

Long - Term Irreversible High 7 3

Solid Waste generation


Solid waste generation, Land contamination

Direct, Negative

Long –Term


Water Environment

Leachate generation,

Direct, Negative

Long –Term Reversible Medium 8 3

196

(Surface and Ground)

Land contamination

Aesthetics Odour nuisance In Direct, Negative


Health Degradation of Solid waste, attraction

of flies

Direct, Negative


STP Sludge generation


Sludge disposal Direct, Positive


Sewage

generation Water Environment (Surface and Ground)

Domestic activities from Dwelling units

Direct, Positive

Short –Term Reversible High 6 3

Aesthetics Odour nuisance/Improper

In Direct, Negative

Short –Term Reversible Medium 6 4

Health Disposal of Sewage Direct, Negative

Short –Term Reversible High 4 2

D.G/ machinery


Used oil generation

Direct, Negative

Short –Term Reversible Low 8 2

Vehicular

traffic

Air Environment Vehicle operation and fuel combustion

Direct, Negative

Short –Term Reversible Medium 6 2

Noise Environment Noise generation from vehicles

Direct, Negative

Short –Term Reversible Low 6 2

Quality of

Life

Socio- Economic Employment generation, Quality

of life, In-flow of

funds in the

region, Increase in

housing

accommodation

In Direct, Positive

Long - Term Irreversible High 6 2

Storm water Run-off

Land Environment Flooding Direct, Negative

Long - Term Reversible Medium 6 2

Note: Scale of Impacts: 1-10 (1-Negligible, 3-Low/Less, 5-Moderate/Medium, 8-High/Significant, 10-Adverse Impact)

197

Chapter-5

Analysis of alternatives

(Technology and site)

5.1 Siting of Project

5.1.1 Environmental Guidelines

Setting restrictions for the project depend on the sensitivity of the surrounding

environment. Sensitivity of the project site should be assessed in relation to its

proximity to the ecologically sensitive places. As per MoEF guidelines, following

aspects are to be considered while selecting the site:

1. Land procured should be minimum but sufficient to provide for greenbelt. If

treated effluent is to be utilized for irrigation, additional agricultural land is to be

made available.

2. Enough space for storing solid waste.

3. Layout and form of the project must confirm to the landscape of the area without

affecting the existing scenic features.

4. If associated township of the project is to be created, it must provide space for

phyto-graphic barrier between project and township and also should take into

account of wind direction.

5. The site should not be in migration route.

6. It should not interfere with the natural water course

7. Forest, agriculture and fertile and other specified lands to be avoided.

8. The following distances maintained between the project and specified location.

Estuaries: 200 m

Flood plains of riverian systems: 500 m

Highways and Railways: 500 m

Streams and rivers used for drinking water supply: 1500 m

Ecological and/or otherwise sensitive areas: 15 km

5.1.2 General Criterion for Selection Of Location

The general criterion for site selection is:

Accessibility for easy disposal of effluents.

Proximity to availability of perennial water supply, raw materials, skilled and

unskilled manpower.

Access to power supply from KPTCL/ own captive generation.

Further important details to be checked up about the site are:

Soil conditions

198

Contour survey

Rainfall in the area

Ground water resources / potential

Weather conditions, maximum and minimum temperature, humidity etc.

Seismographic soundness of the place.

5.1.3 Site Requirement and Proposed Location

M/s Nandi Sahakari Sakkare Karkhane Niyamit is a fully integrated sugar industry

consisting of 6500 TCD sugar plant, 18.14 MW co-gen power plant and 50 KLD

distillery plant at Krishnanagar Village , Hosur Post, Vijayapur Taluk and District,

Karnataka State. Based on the above guidelines location and site has been selected.

The industry possesses a total of 240 Acre land and this includes 118.28 Acre open

land meant for future expansion.

i. Availability of raw material/fuel

Sugar is available in plenty in the surrounding areas from the local farmers. Bagasse

which is a byproduct of the sugar industry is the fuel for the power plant. Molasses

another byproduct of sugar industry is the raw material for the distillery unit. During

normal operation of the industry the bagasse available from sugar industry is

sufficient to run the boilers during the crushing season. Shortage of fuel if any during

off odd conditions will be met through agro wastes such as sugarcane thrashes.

During off-season also, left over bagasse will be used to maintain sustained burning in

the boiler.

ii. Availability of water supply

The industry has obtained permission to draw water from Almatti dam/Krishna

river. The availability of water from the source is found to be adequate to meet the

requirement of the industry.

iii. Effluent disposal

The effluent generated from the sugar complex is proposed to be treated on-site

within the industry premises itself. Treated effluent is used on land for development

of greenery and sugarcane.

iv. Availability of infrastructural facility

Industrial infrastructural facilities such as roads, transport, security, water, power,

administration etc. are available at the site. Community facilities such as quarters,

medical services, education and training facility etc. will be provided.

199

5.2 Environmental Features of Site

The industry is proposed to be located in Krishnanagar Village, Hosur Post, Vijayapur

Taluk and District in Karnataka State. Ministry of Micro, Small & Medium enterprises

has classified Vijayapur as industrially backward area.

The area experiences a dry climate. Summer temperature is high touching 390C. There

are no eco-sensitive locations such as bio-sphere, mangrove, protected forest, National

parks etc. or environmental sensitive locations such as protected monuments,

historical places within 10 km from the site. However river Don is present at 35 km

from the site.

5.3 Technology/ Process

The process selection is done based on the following considerations:

1. Least stress on resources including raw materials and utilities

2. Reduce, Recycle and Reuse of wastes

3. Least or no pollution from the industry

4. Least or no risk to human and property

5. Least or no adverse impacts on environment

The technology options for the proposed plant were considered based on efficient

utilization of raw materials, fuel and water along with efficiency in power generation.

5.4 No Project Option

No project option is considered mainly with respect to:

1. Utilization of natural resources

2. Environmental impacts, harmful or beneficial

3. Benefits of the industry to the society

The project is proposed mainly for the purpose of best utilization of agro waste bio-

mass such as bagasse and sugarcane thrash to produce power. This product is

environmental friendly and is essential commodity as indicated below. The power is

an essential and scarce resource to the mankind and country.

The proposed project will not cause depletion of natural resources or the significant

adverse impacts on environment. On the contrary, it will produce value added

resources such as bio energy. Hence, “No Project Option” is not considered.

200

Chapter – 6

Environmental Monitoring Program

6.1 Introduction

The objective of this study is to minimize or off-set the adverse impacts that due to this

project. Various mitigation measures are designed and described. In operation phase we

shall have to check continuously as to (1) whether our measures are being operated as per

design and (2) whether the resultant impacts are within the tolerance limits. This can happen

only if we have a specialized cell, higher management support for the cell, adequate

funding, support of library-laboratory, open dialogue corridor with all the stake-holders

and authorities, and if the success indicators are in agreement with our findings.

Documentation is necessary along with periodic Reporting to factory management and

statutory authorities such as MoEF, SPCB, factory inspectorate etc.

It is proposed to frame an Environmental Monitoring program both in Construction and

Operational stages to monitor the effectiveness of the mitigation measures by judging the

impact on environment. A separate budget is proposed for the same as also a dedicated Cell

is proposed. A transparent approach will be kept with documentation and reporting with

statistical treatment to the data. Checklist of Statutory Obligations will be maintained and

compliance with it will be monitored.

A chemical or process industry in general produces solid, liquid and gaseous wastes, which

are discharged to the environment. These discharges pollute receiving media such as air,

water and land which in turn harm living beings and property. The waste product may

contain one or more chemical constituents. It is the responsibility of the industries to prevent

or minimize the discharges of waste products by adopting suitable control measures in the

factory to avoid harm to the environment. The effectiveness of such measures is ascertained

by systematic monitoring of discharges at factory level and at receiving level. Systematic

monitoring of various environmental parameters is to be carried out on regular basis to

ascertain the following;

Pollution status within the plant and in its vicinity.

Generate data for predictive or corrective purpose in respect of pollution.

Effectiveness of pollution control measures and control facilities.

To assess environmental impacts.

To follow the trend of parameters which have been identified as critical;

6.2 Monitoring Plan

The routine monitoring program as indicated below is proposed. Also monitoring

facilities will be provided for stack emissions from boilers.

Regular monitoring of important and crucial environmental parameters is of immense

importance to assess the status of environment during plant operation. The

knowledge of baseline status and monitored data is an indicator to ascertain for any

201

deterioration in environmental conditions due to operation of the plant. Based on

these data, suitable mitigation steps could be taken in time to safeguard the

environment. Monitoring is as important as that of pollution control since the

efficiency of control measures can only be determined by monitoring. A

comprehensive monitoring system in the industry is detailed below.

Air Pollution and Metrological Aspects

Both ambient air quality and stack emissions are monitored. The parameters

monitored are SPM, NOx and SO2. The ambient air is monitored as per the guidelines

of Central Pollution Control Board. Existing online monitoring for stack as

recommended by CPCB is already in place, photographs of the same is enclosed as

Annexure- 15

Water and Wastewater Quality

All the effluents emanating from the plant are monitored for their physico-chemical

characteristics and heavy metals. In addition ground water samples surrounding the

hazardous waste storage area are monitored. Existing online monitoring for ETP

treated water as recommended by CPCB is already in place, photographs of the same

is enclosed as Annexure- 15

Noise Levels

Noise levels in the work zone environment are monitored once a month.

6.3 Sampling Schedule and Locations

The solid, liquid or gases discharges from the factory are analyzed at the sampling

points indicated below by the factory as self-monitoring system. Post Project

Monitoring Plan with environmental attributes and schedule of monitoring is given in

Table 6.1.

Table 6.1: Post project monitoring schedule

Sl. No. Particulars Location Frequency

1 Ambient air quality for SPM, SO2 and NOx

2 no’s downwind direction and one each in upward and crosswind direction.

24 hrs sample, half yearly

2 Flue gases from stack for SPM, SO2 and NOx

Sampling port of chimney

Monthly

3 Wind and weather wind velocity & direction

At site Hourly

4 Temperature (max & min) Humidity (max & min)

At site Daily (day & night)

5 Ground water drinking water standards

Down flow direction: 2 no.s, Near lagoon: 1 no., Agri land tilizing

Quarterly

202

treated effluent: 1 no. Near quarters: 1 no.

6 Soil - organic & inorganic matter

At site Pre & post monsoon

7 Effluent water Final discharge point Daily

8 Noise level, work zone (hourly)

6 locations Monthly

9 Water utilization, m3/d For process, domestic, cooling and boiler

Daily

10 Power utilization For air pollution control facility (ESP) and for ETP

Daily

6.4 Laboratory Facilities

Laboratory is proposed with manpower and facilities for self-monitoring of pollutants

generated in the industry and also its effects on the receiving soil, water body and

atmosphere. The list of laboratory facilities to be provided in the industry is given in

Table 6.2. The laboratory is equipped with instruments and chemicals required for

monitoring following pollution parameters.

For water

pH , temperature, BOD, C.O.D, T.D.S, Cl, SO2, PO3, N, Na, K, D.O., Fe, Cr, Ca, Mg,

F, Pb, etc.

For gases

Velocity, Temperature, SPM, SO2 , NOX and CO from the stack

SPM, SO2, NOx, RSPM, from ambient air.

Meteorology

Wind speed and direction, temperature, relative humidity and rainfall.

Table 6.2: List of laboratory equipment’s proposed

Air quality

High volume sampler

Meteorological station (continuous)

Spectrophotometer (Visible range)

Sound level meter

Water and soil quality

pH meter

Conductivity Meter

Turbidity Meter

Dissolved oxygen apparatus

Flame photometer

Kjedhal Assembly

Microscope

Muffle Furnace

Soxhlet apparatus

BOD incubator

COD reflux set

Spectrophotometer

General

Distilled water plant

Balances

Magnetic Stirrer

Refrigerator

Drying Oven

Balances

203

Centrifuge

A set of chemicals, glass ware and apparatus

Bacteriological analysis

Autoclave

Bacteriological Incubator

6.5 Compliances to Environmental Statutes

This industry is law-abiding and the Environmental Statutes are proposed to be

complied with letter and spirit.

Submission of half-yearly compliance to SEIAA Karnataka, Department of

Environment and Ecology, Govt. of Karnataka and the APCCF, Regional Office,

MoEF, Bengaluru.( Latest half yearly Compliance report for Environmental

Clearance Issued by Ministry of Environment Forest & Climate Change, is

enclosed as Annexure- 5)

Carrying out “Environmental Audit Statement” of various environmental aspects,

review the environmental policies with the help of experts and make the up

gradation /changes accordingly.

Submission of the “Environmental Statement” to the State Pollution Control

Board in Form V under Rule 14 of the Environment (Protection) Second

Amendment Rules 1992 of the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986.

Renewal of Consent to Operate under the Water and Air Acts.

Filing the Cess returns to the State PCB under the Water (Prevention and

Control of Pollution) Cess Act, 1977.

Renewal of the Hazardous Waste Authorization under sub-rule 3 of the

Hazardous Waste (Management and Handling) Rules, 1989.

6.6 Monitoring Of Compliances to Statutory Conditions

Environmental clearance from KSPCB and MOEF is always accompanied by the

specified terms and conditions. Necessary measures are taken to comply with these

conditions. Environmental Cell and the associated staff monitor the compliances

regularly.

6.7 Financial Allocation for Environmental Aspects

Table 6.3: Financial allocation/budgetary provisions for environmental

management aspects

Sl.no. Particulars Amount in Lakhs

1

Capital Investment on EMP facilities 500.00 Air Pollution Control

Water pollution Control

204

Laboratory & Monitoring Green Belt & greenery development , rain water harvesting , landscape development

2 CSR activity 1780.00 Sl.no. Particulars Amount in Lakhs

3

Recurring Cost of Operation & Maintenance

75.00

Air pollution Control

Water Pollution Control

Greenery , water harvesting and land scape maintenance

Laboratory & Monitoring of Environmental Quality

Occupational health & safety

Total Recurring cost 75.00

6.8 Success Indicators

The success of the sincere and honest efforts put in, will be judged by various

indicators, such as;

No complaint from the villagers regarding transfer of lands.

No complaint f rom the customers regarding quality of product and delivery

schedule.

No complaints from Government or Non-Government Authorities and Public.

Statistics of Health, Safety and Environment maintained.

Other Promoters come to seek our advice.

Demonstration to others for rainwater harvesting, environmental status report,

environmental statements (annually), cess returns (monthly), groundwater

recharging, sand-substitute ash, plastic-free packing, care for disabled etc.

205

Chapter – 7

Additional Studies

7.1 Public Hearing and Consultation

Amendment of the Environmental Impact Notification No. S.O. 60 (E) dated

27.01.1994, issued by the MoEF, Govt. of India has made mandatory under Schedule-I

of EIA notification for 30 different activities to obtain NOC (No Objection Certificate)

from the State Pollution Control Board and Environmental Clearance from the

Ministry of Environment & Forests (MoEF), Govt. of India. This amendment to the

EIA Notification is effective from 14.09.2006. It is in this context that all such activities

need to prepare Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) report and also appear

before Public Hearing to ascertain the response of Public for the project based on the

General and Specific conditions in the said notification.

The project is expansion of the co-gen power plant from 18.14 MW to 62.14 MW in the

sugar plant from 6500 TCD to 14000 TCD. The industry is agro based and located in

rural area. No additional land or sanction of additional water is needed to the project.

Further, the extent of resources utilized and pollution load generated is limited.

The 1st Public hearing was conducted in 2008 at Hosur Village, Vijayapur Taluk and

District for Expansion of Sugar plant from 3500TCD to 6500 TCD and installation of

50 KLPD Distillery.

In order to ascertain the concern of the local persons who have plausible stake in the

environmental impact of this project, the Proponents conducted interaction with some

of the local people and farmers during February 2016 at the time of Environmental

Clearance application, as sample survey. These interactions were oral and informal

not as a part of statutory requirement. The interviews generally brought out the

following points.

In existing Sugar units, proponents are working well to give benefit to the local

people.

The payment of cane is satisfactory, as also the weighment

No odor or noise nuisance is felt.

Local persons are employed and benefited.

With proposed expansion of the power plant they expect improved price for their

sugar cane.

It is however, necessary to see that no dust nuisance is created by the industry.

Employment and contract works should be given to local persons only.

206

The Public were satisfactory for the expansion project, both public and Proponents

were are generally comfortable with each other for expansion .

However Environment Appraisal Committee (EAC), in continuation with the meeting

held at Delhi on 15-06-2017 has issued Terms of Reference (TOR) vide letter no. F. No:

J-11011/110/2017- IA. II (I) dated 19th July 2017 to conduct public hearing.

M/s Nandi Sahakari Sakkare Karkhane Niyamit (NSSKN) after finalizing the draft

EIA report, approached Karnataka State Pollution Control Board to conduct the

Environmental Public Hearing as per Notification.

The Karnataka State Pollution Control Board issued Paper Notification in State level

leading Kannada daily newspaper Prajavani and leading English daily newspaper

The Hindu on 06-09-2017 and also issued Paper Notification in District level local

newspaper Satya Kranti on 07-09-2017 regarding the proposed project by inviting

objections/suggestions from the bonafide residents, NGO’s, Environmentalists and

general public who are affected from the proposed project, either by attending the

public hearing/in writing/by e-mail to KSPCB and Chairman & Deputy

Commissioner, Vijayapura District, (Earlier: Bijapur District) of public hearing panel.

The Environmental Public Hearing commenced at 11.00 AM on 07-10-2017 in the

factory premises, the welcome speech was given by the Environmental Officer,

Regional Office, KSPCB, Vijayapura, the Deputy Commissioner, Vijayapura

addressed the gathering and explained the need of conducting Environmental Public

Hearing for the proposed expansion for public. On behalf of our company, a

representative of M/s. ULTRA-TECH Environmental Consultancy and Laboratory,

Thane, Mumbai, made technical presentation of the proposed project in Kannada

language. In the presentation it was informed in detail about the history and activities

of the company, total extent of land available, availability of raw material, sources of

water, existing Sugar Cane Crushing and Co-generation Power Plant, products

manufactured and by products generation, mode of collection and its disposal, waste

water generation and its mode of treatment and disposal and air pollution sources

and the control measures adopted in the unit. The consultant also explained the likely

impacts on the environment that could arise from the proposed expansion project

through prediction studies and by compiling the base line data collected within a

distance of 10.00 KM radius on Air, Water and Noise qualities, ecology of the area and

socio-economic details.

After the detailed presentation by the consultant, the Environmental Officer, KSPCB,

Vijayapura invited the public who were present at the meeting to express their

comments/views/suggestions on the proposed expansion project.

207

Table 7.1 below details the persons who came up with their opinions/ suggestions/

comments or views along with the reply and Budget allocation for the issues raised

during the Public Hearing on the proposed expansion, the copy of the Public Hearing

minutes, approved by the Deputy Commissioner, Vijayapura and approved letter

from KSPCB, is enclosed as Annexure – 17 of this EIA Report.

After the public’s comments/views/suggestions, the Deputy Commissioner &

Chairman of the Environmental Public Hearing Panel while addressing the meeting

said that the minutes of the proceedings of the meeting will be forwarded to the

Ministry of Environment, Forests and Climate Change, Government of India for

further action. Finally the meeting concluded with vote of thanks.

208

Table 7.1 Compliance to Public hearing with action plan

Sl.

No

Name Suggestions/ Objections/ Comments raised

before Public hearing

Reply given by M/s Nandi Sahakari

Sakkare Karkhane Niyamit

Budget Allocations

1 Sri.

Chandrashek

har Irappa

Immannavar,

Resident of

Kanabur

Village.

He said that he is the resident of Kanabur

Village, which is two Kms away from the

factory site. Previously, public hearing had

been conducted for the enhancement of

factory’s crushing capacity from 3500 TCD to

6500 TCD with Co-gen plant along with

Ethanol plant. At present, the factory is

working with capacity of 6500 TCD with co-

gen plant along with Ethanol Plant; there is

no any pollution problem. In this factory, so

many trees have been grown up to avoid the

pollution problems.

Since inception the factory had grown up 50

to 100 numbers of trees. From 1992 to 2016,

totally 11,820 trees and during the year 2017,

950 numbers of trees have been taken up for

grown up. Hence, he briefed that the

Environment Clearance has to be considered

in respect of the factory for establishment of

new plant of sugar along with co-gen unit.

The project proponent informed that

there is 38% of greenery development in

the factory premises with 3 row

plantation, a total of 10 mts buffer is

provided for the plantation of trees (i. e

Between the Factory boundary to the

Industry), and now also the factory

gives very much importance for

greenery development as this will

mitigate pollution to some extent.

Also, the industry has taken all

necessary preventive measures and is

adopting new technologies to mitigate

even the small effects which may be

caused by the industrial activities.

The factory intends

to plant 400 to 500

saplings every year

and is ready to spend

a sum of Rs.2.5 Lakhs

to 5.5 lakhs for

greenery

development every

year.

The factory has

allotted a sum of Rs.

100 lakhs for

greenery

development to the

nearby villages

which will be carried

out in next 5 years

(by the end of 2023).

2 Sri. He said that this village is 3 Km away from M/s NSSKN thanked for all the support The proponent have

209

Govindappa

A. Jakaraddi,

Resident of

Badagi

Village.

the river. During 25 years back, Factory has

been established. For the establishment of

the factory, so many honourable people are

rendered their services for development of

this factory. Our village is having about

14,000 Acres of Sugarcane grown area, out of

those 800 acres of land, sugar cane is

supplying to this factory. Remaining others

area of land’s sugarcane is supplying to the

neighbouring other factories. In our village,

sugarcane yield is having about 80 to 100

metres Per acre. Since last 25 years, our

factory is crushing its sugarcane; there is no

any pollution problem for men and animals.

Therefore, he explained that Environmental

Clearance for the factory’s proposed

establishment of 6000 to 15000 TCD along

with Co-gen plant has to be granted by the

concerned authorities.

and encouragement for the proposed

expansion, also informed the factory

shall start once all the statutory

clearances have obtained.

Project proponent assured that

expansion of the proposed industry will

satisfy sugarcane growing farmers

problem and shall assure suitable price

for sugarcane accordingly.

made Investment on

the expansion project

for Rs. 35,500 Lakhs,

hence propose

expansion shall solve

the framers problem

3 Sri. Basavaraj

K. Jambagi,

Resident of

Linganur

Village.

He expressed that the 75% area of this

factory’s area, Sugar cane is supplying to this

factory and remaining 25% of this area,

sugarcane is supplying to the neighbouring

sugar factories. This is a co-operative sugar

factory named as Nandi Sahakari Sakkare

Karkhane Niyamit having its own name and

M/s NSSKN thanked for all the support






The proponent have

made Investment on


for Rs. 35,500 Lakhs ,

hence propose


the framers problem

210

fame in the state and National level. There is

no any pollution problem. Hence, it’s

requested for establishment of sugar plant

along with Co-gen plant has to be granted by

the concerned authorities.





4 Sri.

Shrishailappa

C. Tuppad,

Resident of

Jainapur

Village

He said that though our grownup sugarcane

is having more than 11% recovery, since 25

years, our growers are facing a problem of

supplying of sugar cane at this factory. Only

50% of grown up sugarcane of this area is

supplying to this factory. Hence, there is no

any pollution problem for establishment of

sugar plant capacity of 6000 to 15000 TCD

along with Co-gen unit. Kindly consider the

request for issuance of Environmental

clearance to the factory.











The proponent have

made Investment on


for Rs. 35,500 Lakhs,

hence propose


the framers excess

cane growing &

improve their

financial & social life.

5 Sri. Jagadish

R Hiredesai,

Resident of

Jainapur

Village.

He opinion that since my childhood, this

factory is Kamadenu. Initially from 2500 to

3500, 3500 to 5000 TCD the factory has

enhanced its crushing capacity of sugar plant

along with co-gen plant and as ethanol plant.

There is no any environmental pollution. At

present, around our village and as well as

factory, growing of sugarcane area is

increased every year. Therefore, factory’s

The project proponent thanked for

praising the factory, all support and

encouragement for the proposed

expansion project.

211

required environmental clearance for

expanding its crushing capacity along with

co-gen plant has to be granted by the

pollution Board.

6 Sri. Kallappa

Nyamgouda

Resident of

Gani village.

He said that there are eleven points to be

described here on behalf of the factory for

enhancing its crushing capacity along with

co-gen plant. This factory has developed all

the measures of pollution of air and water.

This factory has taken up for development

activities like education, economic and social

for its sugarcane suppliers, grower members

and as well as its employees. In this area,

sufficient sugarcane is available in and

around this factory and also this factory is

paying best price to the sugarcane suppliers

at its own practice directly crediting the

sugarcane bill to the sugarcane grower’s

bank account. Hence, the regular payment to

the sugarcane suppliers, growers is

developed economically by this factory.

Therefore, the proposed project of

enhancement of sugar plant along with co-

gen plant’s environmental clearance has to

be granted by the concerned authorities.



expansion.

The factory have been frequently

undertaken CSR activities and shall

extend the same by encouraging,

supporting and funding for education,

socio-economic development, welfare of

people, rural health & hygiene. Factory

has created sustainable rural

employment for youths.

The Company will be

in support of the

villages in and

around the factory in

many activities under

CSR Management

has planned to invest

Rs 1780 Lakhs as a

part of CSR Activity

for next five years.

7 Sri. Suresh He said that he is having the 8 acres of land The industry is operating with the EC The management

212

Dundappa

Kodabagi,

Resident of

Jambagi

Village.

nearby to the compound of the factory at the

backside. Since 1992 to, till date molasses,

polluted water of the factory is flowing in

my land. Due to these problems, earlier

factory has given the compensation and also

made its repaired in my land installing 10”

of pipe line to avoid the flowing of molasses

and polluted water. Since 1996 to till this

date, my facing of problems about the

flowing of molasses and as well as polluted

water, the board of directors have already

taken up steps to avoid the problems of

flowing of molasses and polluted water by

paying the compensation to me. Today, I

brought one bottle of pollutred water along

with C.D., which is flowed and stored in his

land. Handed over the same to the

concerned authority and requested the

authority for physically verification of the

same in his land.

conditions stipulated in EC letter

reference No Letter No. J-

11011/644/2007 - IA II (I) dated

02.09.2008, & Amendment in

Environmental Clearance J-

11011/644/2007 - IA II (I) dated 18.

11.2014 And with CFO of KSPCB vide

Ref No. AW-302311, PCB ID 10497

dated 22.03.2017.

Existing Infrastructure:

As per the conditions given in

Environmental Clearance as well as in

Consent For Operation, we have

established following infrastructure to

cater air and water pollution.

Sugar and co-generation unit

effluent is treated in full-fledged ETP

with extended aeration. Distillery

Spent wash is incinerated in boiler to

cater high COD.

Furthermore, we are submitting half

yearly compliance report to MoEFCC.

We have been monitoring ambient air

quality, stack, water and waste water

already invested a

sum of Rs. 755 Lakhs

for the existing

industry. This

investment initiated

towards pollution

control activities with

a good intention to

maintain pollution

free environment.

For the proposed

Expansion Project,

the company

earmarked Rs.500

Lakhs, for pollution

control activities out

of the total project

cost of Rs 35,500

Lakhs

213

quality as stipulated in consent

conditions and being submitted to

KSPCB at regular intervals. The analysis

result conforms to prescribed standards.

The respective authorities have visited

our unit and have appreciated our

pollution control efforts. The company

adheres to the norms stipulated by

government agencies and we are

regularly monitoring boiler stacks ,

Ambient air, bore well water , inlet &

outlet water of ETP from third party

agencies once in month, the reports has

submitted to KSPCB also indicates that

we are well within the limits.

Considering all the precautionary

measures been taken and proposed, the

point raised was not compelling. Above

all our unit is ZLD, hence the water

contamination and respective soil

fertility problem will not arise.

8 Sri. Basavaraj

Sahukar,

Resident of

He said that presently the factory has cane

crushed from 2500 to 6000 TCD to till to

date. For setup an expansion project if any,

The project proponent assured that the

industry has taken all necessary

preventive measures to mitigate even

The management

shall earmarked 500

lakhs towards

214

Bidari

Village.

pollution problems arises, the same is to be

solved by the factory and he requested for

enhancement of crushing capacity along

with co-gen unit. Hence, environment

clearance has to be granted to the factory for

the same.

the small effects which may be caused

by industrial activities and also

adopting new technologies to prevent

pollution.

The project proponent thanked for all

the support and encouragement for the

proposed expansion

pollution control

activities with a good

intention to maintain

pollution free

environment.

9 Sri.

Shashappa

Shivappa

Hugar,

Resident of

Gulabal

village.

He expressed that the factory’s proposed

enhancing crushing capacity along with Co-

gen unit. He requested to the concerned

authorised for environment clearance to the

factory, at the earliest.

The project proponent thanked him for

his concern to the factory and the

support and encouragement for the

proposed expansion project.

10 Sri. Maulasab

Nanasab

Jagirdhar,

Resident of

Uppaldinni

village.

He remembered and expressed his

gratitude’s to all the founders of the factory

and he has intimated that there is no any

pollution problem for crushing of sugarcane,

Co-gen plant and Ethanol unit. Hence, the

request for the enhancement of its crushing

capacity sugar plant along with Co-gen unit

has to be considered by issuing environment

clearance by your kind selves.

The project proponent thanked him for

his concern to the factory and the



The project proponent shall agree &

assures to take all the necessary steps &

precautionary measures for the

prevention & control of environmental

pollution to meet the sustainable

development.

The management

shall earmarked 500

lakhs towards

pollution control



pollution free

environment.

215

11 Sri.

Goudappa

Kallappa

Janawad,

Resident of

Sutagundi

Village.

He opinioned that from the since last three

years, there is a drought, hence, proposed

enhancement of crushing capacity of sugar

plant along with co-gen. The plant has to be

established without deducting any farmer’s

deposit out of his cane bill. Therefore,

environmental clearance has to be issued to

the factory as per their willingness.

The project proponent informed that the

factory is having concern about the

farmers and has assured that timely

bills will clear for cane growers.

The project proponent also informed

loans will be taken from the banks with

minimum interests and from the profit

that will be obtained for the expansion

project will be utilized for the payments

of debts, based on the shareholders and

the farmer’s approvals only money will

collected from there cane bill for the

expansion project.

Indeed the project proponent thanked

him for his concern to the factory and



The expansion

project cost is

estimated to be Rs.

35500 Lakhs, only the

farmer (shareholders)

who approves to

deduct money from

deposit will only be

collected for

expansion project.

12 Sri.

Venkangouda

Ramanagoud

a Patil,

Resident of

Kanabur

Village.

He expressed that with a slogan as save

Environment and grow Forestry. He states

that this public hearing has to be conducted

during the month of January, then only it

has come to know the exact pollution

problem. Since the last 15 years there is a

problem about flying ash from the factory.

Industry is treating all the waste in a

scientific manner and is not causing any

pollution to the Water and Air. The

project proponent said that regular

environmental monitoring had been

carried out and all environmental

parameters tested are within the limits

The management

shall earmarked 500

lakhs towards

pollution control



pollution free

216

Regarding sort out of these problems,

applicant has already given the plea, but not

yet set-right by the remedies. It results the

effect of problems on the growing sugarcane,

drinking water pond of the animals and bore

well of the growers of surrounding area. By

affecting this environmental problems,

public living the surrounding villages are

moving from their villages for seeking their

livelihood. Therefore, there is a pollution

problem about above the narrated facts.

Kindly look into the matter & verify the

same physically. Do not involve any body’s

impressions with regard to issuance of

environmental clearance to the factory. For

the factory should not deduct the growers

deposit out of his cane bill for the proposed

enhancement capacity of sugar plant.

as stipulated by the Statutory

Authorities.

In this expansion project also industry

has taken all necessary preventive

measures and is adopting new

technologies to mitigate even the small

effects which may be caused by the

industrial activities.

With respect to Fly ash problem raised

by the complainant, the factory is

installing new Electrostatic precipitator

and this will arrest the fly ash almost

completely. The factory has covered

more than 38% of the factory area with

tree plantation and greenery to absorb

carbon dioxide emitted from the

industry and arrest the particulate

matters if emitted.

Thus proponent assured that there will

not be any pollution problem even after

the expansion of industry and The

project proponent informed that the

factory is having concern about the

environment.

217

farmers and has assured that timely

bills will clear for cane growers

13 Sri.

Mahadevapp

a B

Masaraddi,

Resident of

Kanabur

village.

He revealed that the factory’s fly ash has

increased in the pollution and it has resulted

to the effect on the drinking water pond of

the animals and surrounding public bore

well water. Sri. Venkangouda R. Patil, R/o

Kanabur has already intimated the pollution

problems occurred on the drinking water of

animal as well as bore well and road itself.

Regarding elimination of the flying ash, the

General Manager of the factory has assured

to install the machineries. But till this date it

has not been alone and there is no remedy

for withstanding of flying ash in the

pollution. Hence, considering these facts,

there is a pollution problem in and around

the sugar factory villages.

In order to control the air and water

pollution, the company has adopted

latest technologies by making huge

investments on this.

As stated earlier, the industry is not

causing any adverse effect / impact on

Air and Water because of its operations

as the industry is established suitable

treatment schemes for the effluents and

air emissions.

There is no contamination of water in

the nearby villages. The borewell

water is being tested frequently by

KSPCB Officials and through

empanelled Laboratory. The results are

within the norms.

The monitoring of Air Stack is also

being done regularly and the results are

within the norms.

The Boiler ash is being utilised for the

The management

shall earmarked 500

lakhs towards

pollution control



pollution free

environment.

218

manufacture of organic manure.

For this expansion project also industry






14 Sri.

Mansursab

Walikar,

Resident of

Hosur village

He said that his house is nearer to the

compound of the ethanol plant of the

factory. The factory is having a coal yard

nearby to the compound of the factory,

which is adjacent to my house. During the

summer season, if any fire occurs in the coal

yard, our family, is living & having 16

members in the said house. By effecting

ashes of the coal as well as fire ashes, all my

family members’ eye and ear have been

affected. Due to ethanol plant’s polluted

water with composition of molasses in the

bore well water, environmental pollution has

been effected and heavy to my house and

family members. Hence, he requested for

consideration of his plea for compensation.

The project proponent informed that,

the factory following EMP and assures

that necessary safety measures shall be

taken in the coal yard and in the other

area in order to avoid any such fire.

If any such problem occurs to their

family because of factory activities, the

factory concerned officer will visit their

house and investigate the problems and

will take care of it.

In this expansion project also industry






219

15 Sri.

Murigeppa

Timmappa

Budni,

resident of

Kanabur

village.

He expressed his views that due to the

ethanol plant’s pollution bore well water

gets polluted with molasses. Hence, his

written plea has to be considered by the

concerned authority.

As stated earlier, the industry is not

causing any adverse effect / impact on

Water because of its operations as the

industry is established suitable

treatment schemes for the effluents.

There is no contamination of water in

the nearby villages. The borewell

water is being tested frequently by

KSPCB Officials. The results are within

the norms.

The molasses that is obtained will be

transferred very carefully within the

plant premises and shall be used for

own captive for distillery production for

ethanol, there are existing 06 No’s of

steel storage tanks to store molasses,

and one more is steel tank is proposed

for the expansion project. Hence

pollution of Molasses on Bore well

water is unlikely

The project proponent assures that with

this expansion project the factory will

adopt zero discharge method to avoid

The management

shall earmarks 500

lakhs towards

pollution control



pollution free

environment for the

proposed expansion

220

water pollution and also adopt latest

technology and equipment’s to mitigate

all sorts of pollution.

16. Sri. Ashok

Shirabhur,

Resident of

Hosur Village

He informed that his house is behind the

factory compound, and his house is

surrounded by water. And suggested to

verify physically about the Environmental

problem.

M/s NSSKN is having a State-of-the-

Art-Technology for the treatment of

effluents generated from Sugar, Co-

Generation and Distillery Plants. The

treatment schemes and methods

adopted in this industry are most

advanced and scientific which is in

practice in most of the similar

industries. These methods are also

approved and advised by CPCB, MOEF

& CC and KSPCB.

The treatment scheme practiced is based

on the principle of reduce-reuse-recycle

methods which is also an Eco Friendly

Policy of the Government of India for

developmental projects. The industry

adopted “Zero” discharge

environmental concepts for pollution

prevention. The entire waste water

generated in the sugar and co-

generation unit is being treated in

anaerobic reactor followed by extended

The management

shall earmarked 500

lakhs towards

pollution control



pollution free

environment.

221

aeration method to get the water quality

suitable for land irrigation. The entire

treated waste water is being utilized

within the industrial premises for

greenery development as well as for the

development of cane in their research

field. There is no ill effect reported with

the application of this water on the

ground, either in the quality of ground

water or in the production of sugarcane

and also in the growth of plantation in

the industry area. Not a single drop of

water is let out from the industrial

premises / farms established by the

industry. Hence, the question of

pollution outside the industry premises

does not arise.

After physical examination, it was

noted that water behind the factory

compound was due to the heavy rains

in this year and not because of factory

discharge, hence the statement given by

Sri. Ashok Shirabhur is not really true,

The bore well water inside the factory

premises are regularly monitored and

222

the results of water indicates that the

quality of water is not affected and

factory people have been making there

every possible effects to protect the

environment and not discharging any

water outside the premises .

17. Sri. R. P.

Kodabagi,

Resident of

Jambagi

Village

He informed that the factory was

commissioned on 1992 and crushing rate is

increased by 2500, 3500, 5000 and 6000TCD

with co-gen plant and ethanol plant for

better price for cane growers. After

commissioning of ethanol plant noise and

dust pollution is increased. The factory’s

East and South side is surrounded by

Krishna Back waters. Fly ash is spreading

over back water of the Krishna River. And

also he said that air, water noise pollution is

not affected to the outer area of the factory.

He is also supporting the statement of Mr.

Venkangouda R. Patil, Kanabur about the air

pollution by the factory, He expressed that

fly ash is affected to the children and animals

of the surrounding area of the factory. Hence

he is opposed to expand the crushing

capacity of the factory.

The industry is functioning as per the

norms stipulated by the Government of

Karnataka and is providing all the

possible facilities to the local region.

Air Emissions from the Chimney is

controlled by ESP which is the most

efficient technology adopted and

practiced. It is capable of removing

99.89% of the emissions of SPM.

Therefore, the dust concentration in the

region is well within the limit

prescribed by the authorities. The

results monitored and reported

regularly are also within the limits as

prescribed by CPCB.

The question of dust does not arise as

the entire solid waste generated is

systematically and scientifically

M/s NSSKN

commits to conduct

regular health camps

and provide

necessary medical

aid to the nearby

villages, the

company have

embarked 120 Lakhs

towards Health care

programs

An amount 15 lakhs

shall exclusively

allocate to the

Jambagi village

alone.

223

disposed. Bagasse obtained in the sugar

unit is used as a fuel at Co Generation

Boiler. Press mud generated is

composted along with spent wash

generated in the distillery in a scientific

manner and supplied to the farmers as

bio manure which is a good soil

nutrient / conditioner.

18.

Sri. Basappa

Mallappa

Chebbi,

Resident of

Mannikeri

Village

He expressed that the proposed crushing

capacity of the factory, which has not been

affected on the environment. Hence consent

for Environment clearance has to be granted

to the factory by the concerned authority.






The Company will be

in support of the

villages in and



CSR and also

providing

employment to the

local people apart

from encouraging

them to do the

contract works of the

industry.

Management has

planned to invest Rs

1780 Lakhs as a part

224

of CSR Activity for

the benefit of the

people.

19. Sri. Noorali

Walikar,

Resident of

Hosur Village

He expressed regarding the problems arised

by Ethanol plant to his residence, which is

located at the backside of the factory. He

sought for compensation from the factory

about his plea.

As stated earlier, there is no

contamination of either ground water or

ambient air due to industrial activity.

However

The project proponent shall agree &

assures to take all the necessary steps &

precautionary measures for the

prevention & control of environmental

pollution to meet the sustainable

development.

The management

shall earmarked 500

lakhs towards

pollution control



pollution free

environment.

20. Sri.

Chikkayya

Shankreyya

Mathed,

Resident of

Kanabur

village.

He expresses regarding the fly ash spread

over their village, there is no pollution

created by the existing plant of the factory.

Hence, he said that there is no objection for

expansion project of the factory. He

requested to the concerned authority for

issuing of Environmental clearance.






Management has



of CSR Activity for

the benefit of the

people.

21. Sri.Sanjugoud

a Patil, ,

Resident of

Kanabur

Village.

He commented that some of the statements

are true and some are false, however the

factory is planning to expand its crushing

capacity without any affect to the

Environment. Hence the factory has to be

granted Environmental Clearance for is

The proposed expansion will be

adapted with latest equipment’s, will be

installed to mitigate Air and Noise

nuisance & will adapt Zero discharge

Method to avoid water pollution , EMP

will be followed Effectively for

Management has


500 Lakhs towards

EMP.

225

expansion project. mitigation of Impact. However project

proponent thanked for the support and

encouragement for the proposed

expansion.

22. Sri. Malappa

Uppar,

Resident of

Kengalgutti

Village.

He expressed to expand the factory’s

crushing capacity and requested to the

concerned authority for clearance of

Environment.

M/s NSSKN thanked for all the


proposed establishment, also informed

the factory shall start once all the

statutory clearances have obtained.

The Company is

supporting the

villages in and



CSR, the company

has embarked Rs


of CSR Activity

23. Sri.

Govindappa

Rangappagou

da Patil,

Resident of

Korthi Village

He expressed regarding the existing factory

was made both district farmers cane has

been crushed without any difficulty to the

farmers by promoter late Sri. B. T. Patil of

Shirabur with district former leaders. Now

he concluded to expand the crushing

capacity without any adverse effect to the

environment and also requested to the

factory to take the necessary actions to

control the pollution. As such on the

implementation of the upper Krishna

Project, all farmers have been supported for

National project at the lowest cost of the

M/s NSSKN thanked gathering for all


proposed establishment, and assured

that expansion of the proposed industry

will satisfy sugarcane growing farmers



The project proponent informed the

Gathering that, the proposed expansion

will adapt Zero discharge Method to

avoid water pollution and also latest

equipment’s will be installed to mitigate

The management

shall earmarked 500

lakhs towards

pollution control



pollution free

environment.

226

Land. In the same manner, now also

requested to gathered public to support for

implementation of the expansion project

without any objections, which will helped to

outside area farmer to supply excess cane

and finish their sugarcane in time. He once

again requested to the public to support the

agricultural Industry, which has the

backbone of farmers. Lastly ,he said the

slogan as “Jai Jawan Jai Kisan”.Hence there

is no pollution problems and concerned

authority have to be granted the

environment clearance to the factory for its

expansion project.

air and odour nuisance which may be

emitted from the industry.

24. Sri. Sadashiva

Sonnad,

Resident of

Kambagi

Village.

Regarding expansion project he expressed

his view that advantages and disadvantages

of the project may be occurred. However

now our area is going to be irrigated by

implementation of new canals, which has

been implemented by Hon’ble Sri. M. B.

Patil, Irrigation Minister, and Government of

Karnataka. Hence there is no pollution

problem about establishment of crushing

capacity along with co-gen unit of the

factory.

M/s NSSKN thanked for all the


proposed expansion, the management

shall take every possible step to mitigate

the pollution.

The management also assured that Job

opportunity will be given to land losers

(submergence area and new canal areas)

of local cane growing farmers.

Management have

agreed to provide 95

% of Job opportunity

to the local people

and also has planned

to invest Rs 500

Lakhs towards EMP

25. Rajeev He expressed his willingness to expand the M/s NSSKN thanked for all the support Management have

227

Jamadar,

Resident of

Giragaon

Village

crushing capacity 6000 TCD to 10000 TCD

which is useful to improve the financial

position as well as create the huge

employment to the youngsters of this

district. Suppose factory has not expanded

its capacity the farmers cane is going to

harvest before 18-20 months which is

directly affected to the farmers’ financial

soundness. And also youngsters are

migrated to other places for seeking

employment for their livelihood.

In our Country, about 70% peoples are

depending on agriculture. Even though, our

farmer’s standard of living is not so much

improved. Hence expansion of project will

meet the farmer’s demands. He is also said

that an undivided Vijayapura District is

having with flowing of five rivers, it is

declared as a drought district.Lastly,

Agricultural based industry is backbone of

the India. If such projects have been

implemented which will pay the more

attractive cane price to the farmers. Hence

there is no any pollution problems about

establishment of crushing capacity along

with co-gen unit of factory.





As the sugarcane is being produced in

huge quantity in this region, the

sugarcane growing farmers facing

transportation problem are also not

getting suitable price for sugarcane sale.

Hence expansion of this industry will

enable the sugarcane growing farmers

to get suitable price and solve the

transportation problem.

For the proposed expansion project, the

company requires about 150 employees

additional. Hence, the factory has plans

to give preference to the local educated

people. In addition to this, there are

plans to engage the local people in other

indirect employment opportunities.

agreed to provide 95

% of Job opportunity

to the local people

228

26. Sri.

Hanamantha

gouda

Halagali,

Resident of

Sonna

Village.

He expressed that due to the existing factory

of the Nandi SSKN has been made

satisfactory to all the famers. Hence he has

given consent for implementation of the

expansion project of the factory by issuing

environment clearance to the factory.



establishment, also informed the factory



The management assures that





The Company is

supporting the

villages in and



CSR, the company

has embarked Rs


of CSR Activity, The

management shall

also earmarked 500

lakhs towards

pollution control



pollution free

environment.

27. Sri. Bhimasi

Masaraddi,

Resident of

Kanabur

Village.

He informed that he is having four acres of

land adjacent to the factory premises, even

though there are no pollution problems

during the cane crushing operation of the

factory. Hence there is no pollution problem

about establishment of crushing capacity

along with co-gen unit of the factory.



establishment, also informed the factory



The Company is supporting the villages

in and around the factory in many

The company has

embarked Rs 1780

Lakhs as a part of

CSR Activity, The

management shall

also earmarked 500

lakhs towards

pollution control

229

activities under CSR and shall assure

that industry will take all the necessary

preventive measures to mitigate even

the small effects which may be caused

by industrial activities



pollution free

environment.

28. Sri.Vittal

Singa reddy ,

Resident of

Badagi

Village.

He expressed his view to take precautions to

affected farmers by existing ethanol project.

However factory is expanded from 6000 tcd

to 10000tcd, farmers excess cane has been

supplied to the factory in time. If factory has

not implemented the expansion project

which will effected only to 1% or 2%

farmers. Suppose the factory has

implemented the expansion project which

will beneficial to the tune of 98% farmers.

Hence there are no any pollution problems

about establishment of crushing capacity

along with co-gen unit of the factory.

Environmental clearance has to be granted

by the concerned authority to the factory.

M/s NSSKN assures to take all the

necessary steps & precautionary

measures for the prevention & control

of environmental pollution to meet the

sustainable development.

The proposed factory will adapt latest


Air and Noise nuisance & EMP will be

followed Effectively. Hence there will

not be any adverse impacts on

surrounding area of the factory.

The management assures that





The project proponent also thanked for

all the support and encouragement for

The proposed

expansion will have a

Total Investment of

35500 Lakhs, all the

efforts will be made

to buy cane from

local cane growers in

the neighbouring

villages, however

management shall

also earmarked 500

lakhs towards

pollution control



pollution free

environment.

230

the proposed establishment, also

informed the factory shall start once all

the statutory clearances have obtained

29. Sri.

Chanabasu

Singareddy,

Resident of

Badagi

Village.

He expressed that some farmers are

opinioned regarding existing ethanol

pollutants. He requested to the Management

of the factory to solve the concerned affected

farmers problems by mutual discussion.

Hence there is no pollution problem about

establishment of crushing capacity along

with co-gen unit of the factory. and accord

the environment clearance for setting up of

expansion project of the factory.

M/s NSSKN has agreed to intervene the

problem and will assure to take all the




sustainable development. The proposed

expansion project will adapt latest


Air and Noise nuisance & EMP will be

followed Effectively. Hence there will

not be any adverse impacts on

Childrens, or animals of the

surrounding area of the factory.

Efforts will be made

to maintain

sustainable

Environment,

hoverer

Management shall

have earmarked 500

lakhs towards

pollution control



pollution free

environment.

30. Sri.

Manjunath S.

Albal,

Resident of

Janawad

Village

He expressed his views about this area

farmers conditions before Nandi SSKN

Existing Sugar Plant. That is on those days

formers had growing jawar and cotton due

to this situation farmers financial conditions

are weak. And also standard of living is

lower. After Nandi SSKN Existing plant

commissioning only this area farmers

financial conditions and standard of living is

M/s NSSKN assures to take all the




sustainable development.

The proposed expansion will adapt

latest equipment’s will be installed to

mitigate Air, water and Noise nuisance

The Company is in

support the villages

in and around the

factory, The

management

earmarks 500 lakhs

exclusively towards

pollution control

activities to maintain

231

improved. However, existing ethanol project

may cause air and water pollutants to some

surrounding farmers. Even though he

requested to the Chairman of the Public

hearing meeting to grant the environmental

clearance for expansion project of the

factory.

& EMP will be followed Effectively.

Hence there will not be any adverse

impacts on surrounding area of the

factory.

The project proponent also thanked for

all the support and encouragement for

the proposed establishment, also

informed the factory shall start once all

the statutory clearances have obtained

pollution free

environment.

232

7.2 Risk Assessment, Hazards Management and Disaster Management

Plan (DMP)

Rapid development of the industries has posed wide-ranging hazards threatening

safety and health of people. Accidents may adversely affect the environment and the

people living in the vicinity. These accidents can be minimized to a great extent by

proper procedures, handling and training. But it may be difficult to reach zero risk or

absolute safety level. Whenever such incidents do occur in order to prevent loss of

lives and damage to property, it becomes necessary to take immediate steps to control

the situation. This can be achieved through a planned advance preparation to face

such a situation with respect to on site emergencies.

7.2.1 Occupational Health and Safety

Occupational health and safety risks that must be considered by the employer arise

from normal functions and operations and during unusual circumstances such as

accidents and incidents. The employer is responsible for implementing appropriate

national and internationally recognized OHS standards, codes and guidelines.

Occupational Health

Occupational health needs attention both during construction and operation phases.

However, the problem varies both in magnitude and variety in the above phases.

Construction Phase

The occupational health problems envisaged at this stage can mainly be due to

constructional accident and noise. To overcome these hazards, in addition to

arrangements to reduce it within Threshold Limit Value's, personal protective

equipment’s will also be supplied to workers.

Hot Materials - High temperatures can cause fatigue and dehydration. Direct IR

radiation also poses a risk to sight. Precautionary measures for prevention and control

of exposure to hot materials include the following:

Shielding the surfaces where close contact with hot equipment or splashing

from hot materials is expected;

Implementing safety buffer zones to separate areas where hot materials and

items are handled or temporarily stored. Rail guards around those areas will

be provided, with interlocked gates to control access to areas during operations

Using appropriate PPE (e.g. insulated gloves and shoes, goggles to protect

against IR and ultraviolet radiation, and clothing to protect against heat

radiation);

Implementation of work rotations providing regular work breaks, access to a

cool

233

Heavy Loads / Grinding & Cutting / Rolling - Lifting and moving heavy loads at

elevated heights using cranes presents a significant occupational safety hazard in

construction phase. Measures taken to prevent and control potential worker injury

include the following;

Clear signage in all transport corridors and working areas;

Appropriate design and layout of facilities to avoid crossover of different

activities and flow of processes;

Implementation of specific load handling and lifting procedures, including:

Description of load to be lifted (dimensions, weight, position of center of

gravity)

Specifications of the lifting crane to be used (maximum lifted load, dimensions)

Train staff in the handling of lifting equipment’s and driving mechanical

transport devices

The area of operation of fixed handling equipment (e.g. cranes, elevated

platforms) will not cross above worker and pre-assembly areas;

Material and product handling will remain within restricted zones under

supervision;

Regular maintenance and repair of lifting, electrical and transport equipment

will be conducted.

Prevention and control of injuries related to grinding and cutting activities, and use

of scrap, include the following:

Locating machine-tools at a safe distance from other work areas and from

walkways;

Conducting regular inspection and repair of machine-tools, in particular

protective shields and safety devices /equipment;

Training staff to properly use machines-tools, and to use appropriate

personal protection equipment (PPE).

Musculoskeletal disorders - are injuries that affect muscles, tendons, ligaments and

nerves. These injuries can develop when the same muscles are used over and over

again or for a long time without taking time to rest. The chance of getting this type

of injury increases if the force exerted is high and/or the job requires an awkward

posture. Some examples of musculoskeletal disorders include back pain, tendonitis

and tenosynovitis.

Preventing musculoskeletal disorders requires recognition, assessment and control of

the hazards that cause them. Keep in mind that the most knowledgeable person about

problems with a job is usually the person doing it.

234

Illumination at project site has following measures;

Covered / enclosed areas shall be well illuminated.

Specific area illumination will be provided in the working area as required.

Noise - Noise is not a new hazard. Too much noise exposure may cause a temporary

change in hearing (ears may feel stuffed up) or a temporary ringing in ears (tinnitus).

These short- term problems usually go away within a few minutes or hours after

leaving the noise. However, repeated exposures to loud noise can lead to permanent,

incurable hearing loss or tinnitus. Removing hazardous noise from the workplace

whenever possible and using hearing protectors/ear plugs/ear muffs in those

situations where dangerous noise exposures have not yet been controlled or

eliminated.

The following noise mitigation measures will be implemented;

Acoustic enclosures will be provided

Ear plugs will be provided for the employees working near the noise prone

areas.

Extensive greenbelt will further mitigate the noise levels.

7.2.2 Health and Safety Measures for the Workers

Buildings and structures: No walls, Chimneys, Galleries, Stairways, Floor, Platform,

Staging or structure whether of a permanent or temporary character will be

constructed in such manner as to cause risk or bodily injury.

Provision of crawling boards etc: No person will be required to stand to pass over or

work on or near by any roof of ceiling cover with fragile material through which he is

liable to fall, in case it breaks or gives away the distance for more than 3 meters

without use of sufficient number of suitable ladders, duck ladders or crawling boards

which are securely support.

Service platforms: Whenever practicable and demanded service platforms and

gangways will be provided for overhead shafting, and where required by him

these will be securely fence with guardrails and toe boards.

Belts, etc: All belts will be regularly examined to injure that the joints are safe and the

belts are proper tension.

Helmets: Helmets will be provided to the workers for safe guarding themselves

against any head injuries.

Machinery: No machineries or equipment’s will be situated, operated or maintained

in such a manner as to cause risk of bodily injury.

Methods of work: No process of work will be carried out in such a manner as to

cause risk of bodily injury.

235

Electricity: No electricity installation will be provided during construction so as

to be dangers to human life or safety.

A full time doctor and a paramedical staff will be made available round the clock at

site.

Fully equipped emergency Ambulance van will be provided at site round the clock.

Tie ups with local leading hospitals will be worked out. Pre-employment

medical examination will be conducted.

All workers will be medically re-examined once in a year w.r.t occupational health

like Lung Function test, Audiometric test, heat stress etc. depending upon the worker

& the exposure.

Medical surveillance will be conducted for each employee & medical records shall be

maintained.

First aid facilities will be provided. The medical records of each employee will be

maintained separately. Based on the employees working area conditions, required

medical tests will be conducted.

Eye test for crane operators & vehicle drivers will be conducted at least once in a year.

First aid facilities will be made available at each & all the production facilities,

canteen, office building, Weigh Bridge, DG room, Pump house etc.

7.2.3 Safety of Personnel

Suitable personnel-protective-equipment/devices will be given to employees / staff

/ workers/ construction laborers depending upon their nature and magnitude/

intensity of work and are as follows:

Industrial Safety Helmet;

Crash Helmets;

Face shield with replacement acrylic vision;

Zero power plain goggles with cut type filters on both ends;

Welders equipment for eye and face protection;

Cylindrical type earplug;

Ear muffs;

Canister Gas mask;

Self-contained breathing apparatus;

Leather apron;

Line man's safety belt /multipurpose and rescue harness

Leather hand gloves;

Heat resistant hand gloves

Acid/Alkali proof rubberized hand gloves;

Canvas cum leather hand gloves with leather palm;

236

Lead hand gloves;

Electrically tested electrical resistance hand gloves;

Industrial safety shoes with steel toe; and

Electrical safety shoes without steel toe and gumboots.

Full fledge First Aid facilities will be made available round the clock for

attending emergency arising out of accidents/incidents, if any. All working personnel

will be medically examined at least once in every year and at the end of his term of

employment. This is in addition to the pre-employment medical examination.

Safety Plan of both men and materials during construction and operation

phases is of concern. The preparedness for the occurrence of possible disasters is

known as emergency plan. Keeping in view of the safety requirement during

construction and operation and maintenance, the project proponent would formulate

safety policy with the following regulations:

To allocate sufficient resources to maintain safe and healthy conditions of work;

To take steps to ensure that all known safety factors are taken into account

in the design, construction, operation and maintenance;

To ensure that adequate safety instructions are given to all employees;

To provide wherever necessary protective equipment, safety appliances and

clothing, and to ensure their proper use;

To inform employees about materials, equipment or processes used in

their work which are known to be potentially hazardous to health or safety;

To keep all operations and methods of work under regular review for

making necessary changes from the point of view of safety in the light of

experience and up- to- date knowledge;

To provide appropriate facilities for first aid and prompt treatment of

injuries and illness at work;

To provide appropriate instruction, training, retraining and supervision to

employees in health and safety, first aid and to ensure that adequate publicity

is given to these matters;

To ensure proper implementation of fire prevention methods and an

appropriate firefighting service together with training facilities for personnel

involved in this service;

To organize collection, analysis and presentation of data on accident,

sickness and incident involving personal injury or injury to health with a view

to taking corrective, remedial and preventive action;

To promote through the established machinery, joint consultation in health

and safety matters to ensure effective participation by all employees;

237

To publish/notify regulations, instructions and notices in the common

language of employees;

To prepare separate safety rules for each types of occupation/processes

involved in a project; and

To ensure regular safety inspection by a competent person at suitable

intervals of all buildings, equipment’s, work places and operations.

OHS surveillance programme

Will be conducted once in a year, the health status report of the for the workers

who are working for the is enclosed as Annexure-13

Involves tests for lung function test, audiometric, visual, chest X-ray, prevailing

illness, height, weight, blood, Urine and asthama.

Responsibility will be from first aid center equipped with 2 full time doctors, 3

paramedical staff, 2 assistants, 2 helpers and ambulance.

Pre-employment Assessment

Employment health examination will involve the following:

Data such as height and weight

A detailed history of previous diseases and occupational exposures.

Past or present history of any allergies including Asthama

Physical examination with special attention to respiratory, dermal and possible

renal problems.

In addition to the items listed above, number of clinical tests will be performed

for records purpose and includes:

Posterior/anterior chest x-ray

Lung function tests

Audiometric testing and

Visual testing

7.2.4 Safety Department

Construction Phase

A qualified and experienced safety officer will be appointed. The responsibilities of

the safety officer includes identification of the hazardous conditions and unsafe acts

of workers and advise on corrective actions, conduct safety audit, organize training

programs and provide professional expert advice on various issues related to

occupational safety and health. He is also responsible to ensure compliance of Safety

Rules/ Statutory Provisions. In addition to employment of safety officer, every

238

contractor, who employs more than 250 workers, will also employ one safety officer

to ensure safety of the worker, in accordance with the conditions of contract.

Operation Phase

When the construction is completed the posting of safety officers would be in

accordance with the requirement of Factories Act and their duties and

responsibilities would be as defined thereof.

7.2.5 Safety Training

Safety training will be provided by the Safety Officers with the assistance of faculty

members Professional Safety Institutions and Universities. In addition to regular

employees, limited contractor labors would also be provided safety training. To create

safety awareness safety films would be shown to workers and leaflets would be

distributed. Some precautions and remedial measures proposed to be adopted to

prevent fires are:

Compartmentation of cable galleries, use of proper sealing techniques of

cable passages and crevices in all directions would help in localizing and

identifying the area of occurrence of fire as well as ensure effective

automatic and manual fire fighting operations;

Reliable and dependable type of fire detection system with proper

zoning and interlocks for alarms are effective protection methods for conveyor

galleries;

Housekeeping of high standard helps in eliminating the causes of fire and

regular fire watching system strengthens fire prevention and firefighting; and

Proper fire watching by all concerned would be ensured.

7.2.6 Health and Safety Monitoring Plan

All the potential occupational hazardous work places would be monitored

regularly. The health of employees working in these areas would be monitored once

in a year for early detection of any ailment.

Table 7.2: Health Register

Name of the Company: Address:

1. Department Works

2. Name of worker

3. Sex

4. Age (at least birthday)

5. Date of employment on present work

6. Date of leaving or transfer to other work with reasons for discharge or transfer

7. Nature of job or occupation

239

8. Raw materials products or by-products likely to be exposed to

9. Dates of medical examination and results thereof

Dates:

Result : Fit or unfit

10. Signs and symptoms observed during examination

11. Nature of tests and results thereof 1. Spirometry:

2. Pulse Oxymetry:

3. Lungs function test:

12. If declared unfit for work state period of suspension with reasons in detail

13. Whether certificate of unfitness issued to the worker

14. Re-certified fit to resume duty on

15. Signature of the certifying surgeon with date

7.3 Identification and Assessment of Hazards

This stage is crucial to both on-site and off-site emergency planning and requires

systematic identification of all possible emergencies that could arise in the

Industrial Development project. These will range from small events, which can be

dealt by Emergency Organization personnel without any help from external agencies,

to the largest event that would require outside help. To tackle such emergencies

effectively, it is essential to have clear-cut action plan. Experience has shown that for

every occasion that the full potential of an accident is realized, there are many

occasions when some lesser event occurs or when developing incident is made

safe before reaching full potential.

The following risks are due to external factors and proposed mitigation measures are

also detailed:

Natural hazards

Earthquake: As per Indian Standard IS 1893, project site comes under Zone-III, as

such earthquake loads in the form of static and dynamic loads are taken

into account. All materials and workmanship are of good quality conforming

generally to accepted standards of Bureau of Indian Standard specification &

codes as included in National Building Code of India. No building or part of a

building will be constructed or reconstructed or no addition or alteration will be

made in the operation phase of the project in the intervening spaces between the

building and any overhead electric supply line.

240

The height of the handrail in the staircase will not be less than 90 cms. Every

slab or balcony overlooking any exterior or interior open space which are 2 meters

or more below will be provided with parapet walls or guard rails of height not less

than 1.20 meters and such guard rails will be firmly fixed to the walls.

Lightening arrester:

Lightening arrestor is being installed at the top of the chimney to arrest the

natural lightening during thunder.

Standard galvanized iron doom with spikes 3 Nos. with 20mm dia. Copper rod at

120

Deg. Apart 300 Amps. Flexible copper cable to be fixed with G.I. Hot dipped lugs.

50mm x 6mm tk. G.I.Double flat circumferential band. Galvanized plate is grounded

to earth.

Flooding: No flooding history found .Details of internal drainage system, rain water

recharge pits, excess water harvesting etc to be given.

Fire Protection System

Following are the fire protection systems proposed in the project to take care of fire

emergencies in accordance with the guidelines of NBC

Underground fire water storage sump

Fire Hydrants & Pumps

External yard hydrants

Internal wet riser system

Automatic Sprinkler system

Portable first-aid fire extinguishers

Sand filled buckets

7.4 Risk Analysis

Risk analysis carried out by visiting the project-site and discussing with site engineer

and others regarding the possibility of risks arise at different stages / activities. In

general in all activities some amounts of risks are existing. In general level of risks is

assessed and preventive measures to be taken are mentioned. Further past

experiences are also discussed in other similar type of projects in to account while

preparing this report.

7.4.1 Identification of Hazards, Mitigation Measures.

From experiences and studies, the following hazards are identified:

Noise pollution

241

Explosion

Spillages/leakages of chemicals

Fire

Noise pollution:

The plant can cause noise pollution due to operation of various equipments in the

plant.

Mitigation measures:

The typical measures to mitigate noise pollution include:

Acoustic enclosures or barriers.

Proper maintenance of equipment’s.

Provide ear protection.

Development and maintenance of green belt to attenuate noise pollution.

Explosion:

HAZOP study indicated that boilers can blow up only if safety valves do not

operate properly. Explosion of boilers is basically connected with maintenance.


Proper maintenance of boilers, safety valves gauges etc,.

Inspecting regularly safety valves, gauges.

Spillages / leakages of chemicals

Spillages/leakages can occur from storage points, pipelines etc.


Proper maintenance of storages, and keeping the equipment in good condition.

Compliance with standard operating procedures for material loading and

unloading, and

Working properly.

Fire

Fire may occur due to electrical, chemicals. Etc,.


By installing, where required, flame proof electrical equipment / fittings in

chemical usage area.

By laying and maintaining electrical and equipment’s properly.

Prohibiting smoking.

Strictly following hot work permit as per requirement.

Lightening arrestor will be provided.

By providing adequate fire protection system.

242

7.4.2 Preventive measures for Hazards / Disasters during construction phase

Table 7.3: Preventive measures for Hazards / Disasters during construction phase

Sl. No

Construction Activity

Associated Hazard

Effect of Hazard

Preventive Measures / Recommendations

1. Electrical Installations & Usage

Short circuiting

Electrification of Fire

Use hand gloves and other PPE

Don’t lay wires under carpets, mat or doorways.

Employ licensed electricians to carry out electrical installation.

Use one socket for one appliance

Ensure usage of only fully insulated, undamaged wires or cables.

Don’t place bare wire ends in a socket.

Ensure earthing of equipment’s.

Do not use damaged cords and avoid temporary connections.

Do not allow open/bare connections.

Provide all connections through ELCB.

Protect electrical cable / equipment’s from water and naked flames.

Check all connections before energizing.

Over loading

of Electrical

System

Bursting of

system leading to fire

Display voltage and current ratings prominently with Danger Sign.

Ensure approved cable wire, voltage grade and type.

Switch off the electrical utilities when not in use.

Do not allow unauthorized connections.

Ensure proper grid wise distribution of power.

Improper laying of overhead

Can cause electrocution and prove

Do not lay unarmored cable directly on ground, wall, top of trees

243

and underground transmission lines/cables

fatal Maintain at least 3m distance from HT cables

All temporary cables should be laid at least 750mm below ground on 100mm fine sand overlying by brick soling

Proper sleeves should be provided at road crossings

Provide cable route markers indicating the type and depth of cables at intervals not exceeding 30m and at the diversions/ termination.

2. Working at heights

Person can fall down

May sustain severe injuries or prove fatal

Provide guard rails/ barricade at the work place

Use PPE like safety belts, full body harness, with two life lines, helmets, safety shoes, etc.

Obtain work permit before starting the work at height about 2 m.

Fall arrest systems like safety nets, must be installed

Provide proper working space (min. 0.6m x 0.6m)

Tie/weld working platform with fixed support

Avoid movement on beams

May hit the scrap/ material stacked at the ground/ in between

Keep the work place neat and clean

Remove the scrap immediately

Material can fall down

May hit the workers work- king at lower levels & prove fatal

Same as above plus

Barricade the area at ground level

Do not throw or drop materials or equipment from height

All tools to be carried in a tool-kit bag

Remove scrap from the planks

Ensure wearing of helmet by the workers at low level.

244

3. Confined Spaces

Suffocation Unconscious ness/ death

Use respiratory devices

Avoid overcrowding inside a confined space

Provide exhaust fans/ventilation

Do not use loose clothes

Keep a stand-by person outside the tank / sump

Provide alarm bell to the person inside the confined space

Check for presence of hydrocarbons, O2 level, toxic gases

Obtain permit before entering a confined space

All incoming lines to the tank should be emptied & blanked

4. Hand/ power Tools

Unguarded moving part like grinding Wheel, Drill bit

It may injure the operator. Wheel may get detached & hit passerby as flying missile causing serious injury

Use proper guard

Ensure tightening mechanism of the tool

5. Handling and Lifting Equipment’s

Supply of Power without earthing

Electrocution Always use 3-pin plug

Ensure good earthing

Damaged tools

Can cause injury

Always use tested and certified tools.

Failure of load lifting and moving equipment’s

Can cause accident and prove fatal

Check periodically oil, brakes, gears, horns and tire pressure of all moving machinery

Check quality, size and condition of all chain pulley blocks, slings, U-clamps, D-shackles, wire ropes, etc.

Allow crane to move only on hard, firm and leveled ground.

Allow lifting slings as short as possible.

Overloading Same as Safe lifting capacity of

245

of lifting equipment’s

above derricks and winches should be ascertained

The max safe working load shall be marked on all lifting equipment’s

Check the weight of columns and other heavy items painted on them and accordingly decide about and angle of erection

Allow only trained operators and riggers during crane operation

Overhead electrical wires

Can cause electrocution and fire

Do not allow boom or other parts of crane t o c o m e w i t h i n 3 m r e a c h o f overhead HT cables.

Hook and load being lifted shall preferably remain in full visibility of crane operators.

6. Excavation Digging Pit

Falling into pit

Serious personal injury

Provide guard rails / barricade with warning signal.

Provide at least two entries/exits; also sufficient light.

Provide escape ladders

Earth

Collapse Suffocation/ breathlessness buried/ death

Provide suitable size of shoring

Keep soil away from the edge

Don’t allow vehicles to operate too close to excavated areas

Maintain sufficient angle of repose.

Provide breach of 0.5m width at every 1.5m depth of excavation in all soils except hard rock.

Contact with buried electric cables

Electrocution, Explosion

Obtain work permit from construction manager

Locate the position of buried utilities by referring to plant drawings.

Start digging manually to locate the exact position of buried utilities and thereafter

246

use mechanical means.

Movement of vehicles/ equipment’s close to the edge of cut

May cause cave in or slides Persons may get buried

Provide ring buoys

Identify and provide suitable size dewatering pump

Barricade the excavated area

Maintain at least 2m distance from edge of cut

Strengthen shoring

Narrow deep excavation for pipelines etc.

Same as above Frequent cave in or slides

May cause severe injuries or prove fatal Damage to adjoining structure

Barricading, shoring

Provide escape ladders

7. Vehicular Movement

Reversing the vehicle

Accident may occur & prove fatal

Vehicle should always be manned by a Driver and a cleaner

Provide Reverse Horn on the vehicle

8. Machineries Unguarded Transmission parts. Dangerous operation points

Injuries All transmission and dangerous parts to be guarded.

Trained personnel only to operate the machines.

247

7.4.3 Risk Assessment during Construction Phase

Table 7.4: Risk Assessment and quantification of impacts during construction phase

Sl.No

Activities Risk Characteristics Measures Quantification of Impacts

High Medium Low Without MM

With MM

1. Construction of Structural works

√ Construction under experienced supervision in line with IS standards.

7.5 2.5

2. Works at Height √ To use PPEs like Belts, Helmets, Shoes 9.5 3

3. Electrical Works √ To perform under the supervision of experienced electrical experts/engineers/ supervisors

8 2.5

4. Welding Works √ To use face shields 6 2

5. Falling Objects √ To use helmets 6 2

6. Structural Collapse √ Plan, design and construction as per relevant IS codes/standards

9.5 2.5

7. Lack of PPE’s √ To enforce strictly with penalty 8 2

8. Handling of Construction Materials

√ To use nose masks 5 2

9. Handling of Hazardous Materials

√ To use gloves, nose masks, shoes under EHS officer supervision

8 2

10. Drilling works √ To use nose masks under supervision of structural engineers/supervisors

7.5 2.5

Total 75 23

Note: Scale of Impacts: 1-10 (1 – Negligible, 3-Low/Less, 5-Moderate/Medium, 8-High/Significant, 10 – Adverse Impact)

248

7.4.4 Risk Assessment during Operation Phase

Table 7.5: Risk Assessment during Operation Stage

Sl.no. Area Effect Hazard Mitigation Measures

1 Cane yard Serious nature of injuries

Due to bad maintenance of vehicles.

Personnel sleeping/taking rest near the vehicles.

Driving by unauthorized persons.

Maintain vehicles properly.

Personnel will not allow sleep/rest near vehicles.

Only allow drivers having valid licenses.

Safety officer will monitor continuously.

2 Cane unloading bay

Serious nature of injuries

Snapping of slings & wire ropes

Over loading of cranes.

Dragging of loads

Unauthorized personnel operating the cranes.

Maintaining and testing regularly & in good condition.

Following S.O.P. strictly.

Authorized agencies will verify the weighing tools regularly.

3 Mill house Serious nature of injuries

Cleaning while the machines running.

Broken plat-forms

Slippery surface

Dust

Follow S.O.P. strictly.

Good housekeeping

Use of P.P.E. (safety wears)

Work permit procedure before attending height oriented jobs.

4 Clarifier & Evaporators.

Fire & Explosion. Hot atmosphere.

Steam leakages.

Faulty gauges

Defective valves and vents

Maintain equipment properly.

Provide good ventilation like roof extractors, air circulators.

Regular inspection of shell thickness, Hydro trials before in operation.

Regular hydro

249

testing of boiling vessel calendria tubes and valves

Provision of safety.

5 Crystallizer Injuries Slippery floor and damaged floor

Good housekeeping & working properly.

Proper testing and alignment of drives and internal ribbon/ coils

Regular inspection of shell thickness, Hydro trials before in operation.

6 Centrifugal. Injuries. Non-functioning or removal of inter-lock guards.

Breakage of basket and internals

Maintain the equipment properly.

Regular balancing of baskets, testing of rubber buffers and break pads, bearing housing assembly, etc.,

Regular inspection of thickness, internal cracks by DP test/ ultrasonic test.

7 Drying grading and bagging.

Dust of fine powder.

Escaping of dust Maintain equipment properly.

provide P.P.E.

8 Boiler house.

Explosion Safety valves not working etc.

Proper maintenance of boilers, safety valves, gauges etc. and inspecting them regularly.

9 Storage tanks

Spillages/ leakages of chemicals

Corrosion, Wear and tear.

Impact - by foreign bodies.

Proper maintenance of storages, and keeping the equipment in good condition and to be regularly inspected and tested.

250

Compliance with standard operating procedures for material loading and unloading and working properly

Dyke walls to be provided.

10 Electrical installation like transformer, switch- yard, M.C.C.

Fire or electrocution Suffocation of persons inside.

Over loading.

Loose contact

Short circuit.

Installation as per electricity rules.

Other controls will be provided.

11 Bagasse yard

fire Sparks from exhaust of the vehicles.

Smoking.

External fires

Provide spark arresters.

Smoking to be prohibited.

Follow work permit system

12 Factory area

fire Prohibiting smoking.

Providing fire hydrant system etc.

By laying and maintaining electrical all equipment’s properly.

Strictly following work permit systems as per requirement.

Lightening arrestor will be provided.

Maintaining equipment properly

Working properly

13 Sulphur Fire and explosion

Dust/ vapors can cause fires and explosion.

Store in a cool ventilated area separately.

14 Sugar godown

injuries Collapsing of sugar stack Follow standard procedures

251

7.5 Emergency

7.5.1 On-Site Emergency Plan

Onsite Emergency plan deals with measures to prevent and control emergencies

affecting workers and others within the project site and not affecting outside public

or environment. It is essential that all concerned project stakeholders familiarize

themselves with the overall onsite emergency plan and their respective roles and

responsibilities during emergency. They should also participate regularly in the mock

drills that will be conducted so as to keep themselves and the emergency organization

in a state of perpetual preparedness at all times to meet any emergency. The On-Site

Management plan will be circulated to all concerned members of emergency

teams.

7.5.2 Objectives, scope and contents of On-site Emergency Plan

Objectives of Emergency Planning are to maximize the resource utilization and

combined efforts towards emergency operations and would broadly cover the

following;

To localize the emergency and if possible eliminate it.

To minimize the effects of accidents on people and property.

To take remedial measures in the quickest possible time to contain the

incident and control it with minimum damage.

To minimize the damage.

To keep the required emergency equipment in stock at right places and

ensure that they are in working condition.

To keep the concerned personnel fully trained in the use of emergency

equipment.

To mobilize transport and medical treatment of the injured.

To arrange for rescue and treatment of casualties.

To safe guard the people.

To render necessary help to concerned.

To rehabilitate area affected.

To provide information to media & government agencies.

7.5.3 Scope of Onsite Emergency Plan

The plan covers information regarding the properties of the housing people, type of

disasters and disaster/accident-prone zones, disaster plans with authority delegation,

controlling and other details. General details like location, project layout,

neighboring entities and the assistance they can render etc., are also provided.

The important elements considered in this plan are;

Statutory requirements

252

Emergency organization

Roles and Responsibilities

Communications during emergency

Rescue & Rehabilitation

Emergency facilities

Important Information

A major emergency in any situation is one, which has the potential to cause serious

injury or loss of life, which may cause extensive damage to the structures in the

vicinity and environment and could result in serious disruption to normal

operation both inside and outside the layout premises. Depending on the magnitude

of the emergency, services of the outside agencies may also be required for

supplementing the internal effort to effectively handle the emergency and to contain

the damage.

The Management shall take effective steps to assess, minimize and wherever

feasible eliminate the risks to a large extent. Accidents may still occur and it is

necessary to be fully prepared to tackle all such emergencies if and when they occur.

It is likely that the consequences of such emergencies will be confined to the units

concerned or may affect outside. If the consequences are confined within the project

boundary, it is then termed as On Site Emergency and will be controlled by in charge

of the project.

7.5.4 Methodology

The considerations in an emergency planning include the following:

Identification and assessment of hazards and risks

Hazard consequence anal Alarm and communication procedures

Identifying, appointment of personnel & assignment of responsibilities

Identification and equipping Emergency control centre, Identifying Assembly,

Rescue points, Medical facilities.

Emergency preparedness plan, procedures, steps to be taken before, during

and after emergency.

Formulation of plan and emergency sources.

Training rehearsal, evaluation and updating the plan

7.5.5 Structure of Emergency Management

Noticing the accidents

Informing declarer of emergency

Declaration of emergency

Functions of declarer

Interaction with outside agencies

253

7.5.6 Control Room

The emergency has to be controlled from one particular spot. This spot should be

away from the likely points of accident, should be easy access from the factory to

the control room. These criteria are met at the main security office at the entrance.

Facilities at Control Room

The facilities that are being provided at both control rooms are given below:

1. Factory layout plan.

2. Emergency telephone numbers.

3. General telephone numbers.

4. Emergency lighting.

5. Hailers.

6. Daily number of people working.

7. Hot lines to district magistrate, police control room, fire brigade, hospitals,

antidotes etc.

8. Safety equipment.

Telephone numbers of the following will be displayed in control room.

Deputy Commissioner.

Superintendent of Police.

Local Police.

Fire Services.

Hospitals Occupier.

Manger.

Directorate of Factories Boilers.

Karnataka State Pollution Control Board.

Key personnel of the industry.

Mutual aid partners.

Security will be posted around the clock throughout the year in the factory.

7.5.7 Alert Action Plan during Working /Non-Working Hours

Emergency will be declared when it has come to the knowledge during working

hours as personnel will be working and identify that situation during non- working

hours. Security will be trained as to what actions are to be taken.

7.5.8 Distances of Railway Station, Bus Stand, Air Port, Fire Service

Nearest Railway Station Basavana Bagevadi station 55 KM (E)

Nearest Bus Stand Hosur Bus Stop 2.2 (SE)

Nearest Airport Belagavi Airport 120 KM (SW)

Nearest Fire Station Mudhol Fire Station 23.5 Km (SW)

254

7.5.9 Establish Line of Control Responsibility and Alternative Line of Control

When an emergency situation arises in the factory, some worker on the shop-floor

will first notice it. He will immediately get in touch with the shift in-charge of that

particular section.

The shift in-charge will initiate action to overcome the emergency and will use his

discretion to shut down the factory if he feels that emergency situation is very

serious. He will simultaneously get in touch with the Declarer of Emergency. The

possible Declarers of Emergency in the order of priority are given below.

1. General Manager

2. Assistant General Manager

3. In charge General Manager

7.5.10 Constitution of Teams

Rescue team

Combat team

Medical team

Auxiliary team

The nature of accidents has already been recognized. So, suitable personnel will be

recruited and induction training will be given. An induction training program, safety,

first-aid fire etc. will be included. Further, yearly training and retraining will be

done. Apart from the above mock drills will be conducted and suitable play cards

will be prepared and will be given to employees.

7.5.11 Define Roles and Responsibilities in Brief

Plant supervisor

Initiate action to control emergency.

Shut down plant if necessary.

Declare emergency if conditions are extreme.

Get in touch with declarer of emergency in the order priority.

Declarer of Emergency

Declare emergency (if plant supervisor has not done so already)

Inform adjacent factories.

Call incident controller and ask him to proceed with the work control.

Inform fire brigade, if necessary.

Inform the hospitals.

Ask the security to account for personnel

Arrange to get ambulances to send injured workers to hospitals, if necessary

Nominate a person to give information to media, families of workers, etc

255

Arrange for admission to various hospitals.

Inform police, director of factories boilers and pollution control board

Get in touch with outside experts if is a need.

Give all clear signal when the emergency has been controlled.

Make a detailed report.

Incident Controller

Assemble rescue, combat, medical and auxiliary teams.

Arrange for safety equipment for the members of these teams.

Decide which paths the evacuated workers should follow.

Ensure that the evacuation paths are lighted through emergency lighting.

Provide hailers etc., to the rescue and search team.

Provide tools and safety equipment’s to the team members.

Keep in touch with the team and advise them regarding the method of

control to be used.

Keep the “Declarer of emergency” informed of the progress being made.

Security

Receive evacuated workers.

Account for them.

Help police control traffic, sending workers to hospitals.

Look after law and order within the factory premises.

Police

Control traffic and crowds of on-lookers to keep the area clear.

Maintain law and order.

Help taking injured to hospitals.

Function of Declarer

The declarer has to perform a number of functions simultaneously. First, the declarer

has to find out the nature of accident and has to get in touch with the incident

controller who has a set of four teams under him. For each shift, four different teams

will be available to the incident controller. Incident controller will come to the work

spot, if he is not already there, along with his four teams (Combat, Rescue

Auxiliary and Medical) and they will start functioning. The Combat team function

will be to look for the injured workers inside the factory and help those who are not

injured to be located and shifted to a safer spot.

The rescue team will also have to bring out injured workers to the safer spot from

where arrangements have to be made, for them to be taken to hospitals, etc, Auxiliary

team will actually go into the factory and try to control the cause of emergency. These

teams will have all the protective equipment. These teams would have already been

256

trained beforehand. The control of the incident will be done by a team headed by an

already identified “incident controller”. The medical team will give necessary medical

treatment and if required they will be sent to the hospitals for further treatment.

Declarer of Emergency

Get in touch with incident controller. Inform him to

take necessary action.

Assess the situation. Declare emergency through coded siren

shut down plant if necessary.

Inform adjacent factories

Call fire brigade

Inform doctors to arrange

medical treatment to the injured

Ask security for cordon off the area and

head count at assembly

place

Inform local

police for law and order at

site

Inform P&IR,

Director of Factories Pollution Control Board

Give all Clear signal through coded siren when emergency is

controlled

Make a detailed report

Incident Controller

Keep in touch with declare

of emergency

Ensure correct path for evacuation to

safe assembly place

Activate search & Rescue teams.

Provide tools & safety equipments. Remove injured to

safe assembly place for medical

treatment

Assembly Repair team. Provide

necessary tools & safety equipments. Ensure quick repair

Control fire

257

7.5.12 Notification of Emergency

Noticing the Accidents

Though an emergency is to be controlled by a senior person, a worker on the shop

floor will most probably notice it. As a result, the first person who comes to know

that an emergency type situation has arisen would be the supervisor/shift in-charge,

working in that shift. The supervisor/shift in-charge may take action for shutting

down the plant. If the accident is not serious, he might consider continuing the

operations.

Informing Declarer of Emergency

Apart from taking immediate remedial action, it will be the supervisors/shift in-

charge’s responsibility to inform the declarer of emergency who would immediately

come to the work spot and take over the management of the emergency from that

time onwards. The declarer of emergency, as well as his alternate, are pre-decided,

and known to everyone including, supervisors/shift in-charge. There are a number

of methods by which the supervisor/shift in- charge can get in –charge can get in

touch with the declarer of emergency. They include phone, messenger, siren, mobile

phone or any other method found convenient but decided beforehand. In case main

declarer of emergency is not available, the alternate has to be got in touch-with.

7.5.13 Declaration of Emergency

On arrival, the declarer of emergency will assess the situation. If he finds that the

accident could result in an “On-site” emergency situation, he could immediately

declare the emergency by a coded siren i.e., by intermittent sound. This will inform

the workers of the plant that an emergency situation has arisen and they would have

to shut down the plant and move towards safer areas which have been pre-

decided. The emergency is of “On-site” nature, the management of the emergency

will be entirely in the hands of the “Declarer.”

Evacuation of Personnel

When the emergency is declared, all workers will have to leave their places of work

and reach the safe assembly points, from there as per instructions they will proceed

towards main entrance gate or towards exit gate.

The escape route is fixed and it will be illuminated, if there is any problem in that path

the alternate path is also fixed.

There may be some workers who have been hurt and are unable to come out. So, a

special team has been selected on voluntary basis. This team is quite a large one,

because, not all its voluntary members will be available in one shift.

258

Accounting of Personnel

At the gate itself there will be arrangement for counting of the workmen reporting

there. The total number that has been put together consist not only the workers,

but also contract workers, visitors and others.

7.5.14 Controlling of Emergency

Apart from bringing the injured workers out and looking after their welfare, it is

absolutely necessary that emergency be controlled. This will be done under direction

of the incident controller once it has been decided that the work situation control in

our factory is controlled.

The incident controller will be wearing a RED helmet to be easily identified. The list of

equipment made available for use of these teams is given below:

1. Self-contained breathing apparatus.

2. Full body chemical proof suit and head gears.

3. Emergency light.

4. Stretcher.

5. Ambulance.

6. Ladders.

7. Gum boots.

8. Rubber gloves.

9. Helmets.

10. Respirators

11. Goggles

12. Torches.

7.5.15 Arrangements for Medical Treatment

The rescue team will also bring out injured workers to the safer spot from

where arrangements have to be made, for them to be taken to hospitals etc.,

The medical team will give necessary medical treatment and if required they will be

sent to the hospitals for further treatment.

7.5.16 Information to the Government Authorities

The declarer of emergency will also make necessary arrangements to inform

government authorities like:

1. Tashlidhar, Taluk office

2. Director of factories and boilers in Karnataka.

3. Chairman, Karnataka state board for prevention and control of air and water

pollution

259

7.5.17 Information to the Relatives of the Injured

The declarer of emergency will also make necessary arrangements to inform the

relatives over phone, or send vehicles to pick them depending upon the

circumstances.

7.5.18 Law and Order

The declarer of emergency will inform the police about the possible hazards

beforehand and therefore, they would be ready to undertake the work. Police will be

assisted by factory security to keep the law and order under control.

7.5.19 All Clear Signal

Declarer of emergency will notify to the superintendent of police about the cessation

of emergency and give an all clear signal.

“ALL CLEAR SIGNAL” will be the continuous blowing of siren for five minutes. He

will also inform the public, press, AIR, and doordarshan.

7.6 Disaster Management Plan

The complete works is carried out under the management control and direction of

qualified trained managers in this field. However natural / working hazards may

occur during natural operations.

Accident due to electricity

Accident due to working at heights

Accident due to excavation

Accident due to vehicles and machineries

Accident due to firm.

In order to take care of the above hazards / disasters, the following control measures

will be adopted:

Purchasing standard and good quality of equipment and supervising the work

Provisions of all safety appliances such as helmets, safety shoes, goggles, dust

masks, ear plugs / ear muffs are made available to the workers and regular

check in use

Keeping work area clean.

Fire-fighting and first aid provisions in office complex.

Entry of unauthorized persons is prohibited.

260

Increasing awareness of safety and disaster through posters, safety and

environmental weeks, encouraged through suitable rewards and other similar

drives.

Training and refresher courses for all employees regarding safety,

health and environment.

The management is able to deal with the situation efficiently keeping in view

of the likely sources of dangers.

7.6.1 Structure of the Disaster Management Plan

Outline of Disaster Management Plan

The purpose of disaster management plan is to restore the normalcy for early

resumption of operation due to an unexpected, sudden occurrence resulting to

abnormalities in the course activity leading to a serious danger to workers or any

machinery or the environment.

System of communication

Having an internal communication system for the project head and to their line of

command is essential. The telephone numbers and addresses of nearby police station,

fire station, local hospital/ambulance, will be maintained by the in charge of the

first aid room/unit in the project and as well as in the security cabin areas.

Safety Committee

A standing safety committee will be formed under the head of Project

Manager. The members consist of safety officer (full time), medical officer (full time

or part time), Asst. Manager (designated as in charge of environmental

management & pollution control) & Public relation officer. This team prepares the

emergency plan.

7.6.2 Emergency Plan

Organization Plan

Organization plan includes a clear statement on the line of command and the

responsibilities of each person involved in case of emergency situation.

Equipment Plan

Equipment plan includes clearly stipulating make & type of machinery, capacity

of machinery, location of operations and field of operations. Emergency Plan includes

Emergency Preparedness Plan and the standing orders will be prepared and

displayed at all conspicuous places.

261

Functions of the Emergency Safety Committee

The team shall meet once in two months to discuss the possible or probable

causes / instances leading to any disaster that may occur in and around area.

The team shall assess the required resources to deal with the situation that

may be identified as above.

The team leader shall lay down a detailed procedure or oral information

to each member to follow in case of any impending or possible or actual

disaster.

The team shall conduct mock drill once in a year to understand the practical

problems that may arise while implementing the Emergency Preparedness

Action Plan including the response time and take necessary steps to make the

system effective.

The team shall make necessary recommendations / suggestions to the

Management for identifying / monitoring / dealing with any possible or

probable disaster.

The minutes of the meeting of the Team shall be prepared including the

probable cause of incident, response time and corrective & preventive actions

required to be taken to avoid the reoccurrences of the same and kept as record.

The team may draw an Action Plan and modify the same from time to time

based on the changed circumstances.

The Emergency Preparedness Team shall come into action immediately in case

of any disaster by establishing the control room (main security cabin room) at

the entrance.

The team shall record the actual performance / procedure followed / short

comings while dealing with any actual disaster which will be discussed at

various levels to strengthen the plan and approach.

Project Manager shall inspect all the places where disaster occurred, along

with Emergency Preparedness Team to give their further instructions.

Project Manager shall ensure that all affected places are safe to resume the

normal works and then only shall give permission to start the operations.

Facilities & Accommodation

Accommodation and facilities for medical center/First Aid Centre/Unit, rescue room

will be provided. Regular checking of these facilities shall be undertaken by the

Asst. Manager at least once in six months.

262

First Aid & Medical Facilities

The management will have first aid / medical center for use in emergency situation.

All causalities would be registered and will be given first aid. The center will have

facilities for first aid. It will have emergency contact numbers like Ambulance,

Hospitals, Blood Banks, Oxygen Services, where the complicated cases are to be

referred. Regular checking of First Aid Centre/Unit facilities shall be undertaken by

the doctor in presence of Project Manager/Asst. Manager (EHS).

Stores

A detailed list of First Aid contents will be quarterly checked & maintained by the

Asst. Manager (EHS). Functions of public relations group.

It is essential to keep cordial relation with government officials and other social

service organization and working groups. Manager shall inform about the major

hazard/incident/disaster to the nearest police/control room, nearest office of

pollution control board, District Collector office and other required statutory bodies

of State Govt. to ensure that all the materials and transport system to deal with

emergency situation are made available at the site under their

instructions/directions.

First aid facilities and ambulance arrangements shall be taken care by the security/

Project Manager immediately after obtaining instructions/ emergency call from the

residents/visitors/any person under emergency.

Management required ameliorating the injured, survivors and family members of

affected persons by providing material, finance, moral support and establishing

contact with relatives of victims. The safety committee formed shall look into these

aspects.

7.6.3 Care and maintenance during temporary discontinuance

During discontinuance period, safety arrangement and fencing will be provided to

avoid the entry of unauthorized persons. The accessibility to the project premises area

will be prevented by providing security guards and fencing arrangements. The

Project Manager shall take all the steps required for the care and maintenance

during temporary discontinuance. After completion of emergency, project manager

to declare all clear signal indicating the residents that the emergency situations are

tackled/take care of and residents can safely move to their respective flats/building.

Emergency Plan

On realizing anything serious occurrence happened anywhere in the

premises place immediate information has to be passed onto the nearest official

as per law.

263

On receiving information of emergency intimation, it will be sent to the

safety committee, already formed by the Project Manager.

Figure 7.1: Structure of Onsite Emergency Preparedness and Response

Emergency Action Plan for Electric Fire

Disconnect the affected areas electric supply

Attempt to extinguish fire with the help of CO2 , DCP

If fire is not extinguished, extinguish by spraying water with fog nozzle after

ensuring complete isolation of electric circuit.

Emergency Action Plan for Office Fire

Disconnect electric supply of the affected area

Attempt to extinguish the fire with the help of CO2 , DCP and sand

Attempt to save the record

Attempt to use fire extinguishers

Emergency Action Plan for Oil Fire

Attempt to extinguish small fire with the help of DCP.

If the fire is not controlled, use water foam to blanket the fire and further action is to

be taken.

Rise Alarm

Inform over phone

People noticing an emergency situation

Shift in-charge/Asst. Manager (EHS)

1. If necessary, evacuate people of respective building/flat/tower.

2. Contact the emergency services/alert First Aid

Alert Govt. authorities

Alert Police

Alert Fire Station

Alert Hospital & Ambulance Safety Committee

Declare of emergency/Project

Manager

If emergency is major, contact

concerned authority and handover the

charge of emergency control operations

(Police/fire/medical)

All clear signal (When emergency is over)

Alert Fire Fighting/Security

Team

Alert Rescue/First Aid/Health Centre

Team

264

Emergency Action Plan for Medical Aid

Do first aid quickly and without fuss and panic.

Switch off the supply if this can be done at once

If not possible use a dry stick, dry cloth or other non-conductor to separate the

victim from electrical contact

The rescuer must avoid receiving shock himself by wearing gloves or using a

jacket to pull the system

Always keep in mind that delay in rescue and resuscitation may be fatal.

Every second counts.

Artificial Respiration - Give artificial respiration if breathing has stopped.

There are several methods of artificial respiration, if the victim is not injured

over the face

Natural Hazards

a. Emergency Action Plan for Tornado/High Winds

Weather reports will be monitored from broadcast warnings regarding

threatening conditions.

If the tornado has been sighted or effect is felt, following steps should be

taken by plant personnel.

Persons will be notified over public address system or through siren.

Emergency services will be alerted for assistance.

Plant personnel should be advised to assemble in the administration

building basement, staff room, recreation room and rest rooms.

All safety systems should be kept on alert and all non-essential utilities should

be put off.

After the status is restored, personnel should inspect all the facilities for

resource, first aid and damage control activities, damage assessment, and clean

up, restoration and recovery.

b. Emergency Action Plan for Earthquakes

When first tremors are sensed during an earthquake, all personnel should

evacuate buildings and assemble at safe place away from structures, walls and

falling objects. Emergency shutdown should be declared.

Emergency services should be contacted for assistance.

265

After the status is restored, personnel should inspect all the facilities for

rescue, first aid and damage control activities, damage assessment, cleanup,

restoration and recovery.

c. Emergency Action Plan for Bomb Threat

Inform the message to the highest local police authority and seek their

assistance for patrolling and security need

Inform Controller of Explosives the details and nature of the anonymous

message and read operations.

Request the Local Fire Brigade to position at least on fire tender at the

Location immediately.

Keep the Concerned Department at the Regional Level informed

with the developments at regular intervals.

Alert the Local Government / Private Hospitals and seek their help for

providing Ambulances if necessary.

d. In the location premises

Keep the Fire Hydrant System / all Fire Fighting systems/equipments in

readiness.

Every one entering the location must be frisked at the Gate / check all

Hand Bags, Parcels etc., for suspected explosive / dangerous objects.

Have thorough inspection of the location for any suspected dangerous object.

Materials and other Boxes to be brought into the location must be deposited

at Gate for minimum curing period of 24 hrs.

e. If the suspected object is found:

In case of finding of suspected Article, do not disturb its position, but the area

around it should be cordoned off to a distance of 100 meters and more

depending upon the gravity of situation.

Adequate Staff or Police Squad posted to prevent any unauthorized entry

into the enforced cordon.

Contact Controller of Explosives immediately, who on reaching the Site will

decide suitable action for defusing and disposal of the suspected object.

Evolution of thick billowing smoke is an indication of impending explosion

and in such a case withdraws or evacuates all personnel from the spot, which

has been identified.

266

As a general measure, regulate the movement of the outsiders inside the

premises and restrict their entry with permits.

267

Chapter - 8

Project Benefits

8.1 Improvements in Physical Infrastructure

The physical infrastructure of this area will improve due to various activities of the

proposed project as enumerated below.

About 84 Acres of the total site area is proposed to be extensively used for landscape

development. Storm water management and rain water harvesting will improve

water table in the area. The enhanced groundwater will be indeed useful to the

surrounding farmers who mainly depend on groundwater for irrigation.

Also nursery will be developed to meet the tree plantation needs of the industry

keeping the concept of bio-diversity in mind.

The industry is dependent on roads for transportation of men and material. Road

connectivity thus will improve. This improved physical infrastructure will be an

added facility to the community for surface transport.

Vehicular movement for raw materials and products and also for the movement

personnel in the roads of this area will considerably increase. This will result in

development and maintenance of roads. Automobile related activity such as vehicle

repair and maintenance garages, workshops and shops will be started.

The location is rural and economically backward. The industry will lead to creation of

new job opportunities and scope for transport and other petty business activity.

8.2 Improvements in the Social Infrastructure

The location is rural and economically backward. Creation of job opportunity and

scope for transport and other petty business activity will improve the economy and

attitude of the public towards education and health. This may result in the creation of

education and health care facilities in this rural area.

The total employment potential after expansion of the co-gen sugar industrial

complex is 847 people. However, the commencement of this industry will create direct

and indirect employment opportunities to more than 2,000 people in terms of factory

employment, transportation, vehicle maintenance, petty shops etc. In addition, about

2,000 workers will be indirectly benefitted through harvesting and other sugarcane

cultivation work.

It will not disturb the existing pattern of social relations and democratic setup.

In rural areas much of the time and energy is wasted in reaching from one place to

another. This is due to lack of swift mode of transport. By the expansion of this

268

industry, movement of vehicles in this area will generally improve (both private and

public-owned).

Society of farmers and this Industry are interdependent. Industry gets raw material

from the farmers. Better and purer the raw material quality better is the finished

product of the industry and sophisticated market. Both of them can get better pricing.

The cycle of sowing, cutting, removing, next sowing and milling can be computerized.

The intermediate time-loss can be avoided. Early and timely cutting of cane will make

the farmer free to plant the next crop early. Industry also is benefited as it will get the

sugarcane without any hydrocarbon loss into the air. Recovery will be better. This in

turn will create more job opportunities both in the field as well as in the factory.

The rural economy is found generally dwindling because they depend only on one

single source of livelihood namely conventional agriculture. With support of cash-

crop by our help, perhaps they will have more purchasing power and more use of

domestic animals. The increased greenery and farming with support of ready

compost will further improve conditions of farmers.

Firefighting tenders will be now more easily available.

In the study zone of 10 km radius, the purchasing power of people is very less. The

agricultural implements, agro-chemicals and vehicles will be in more demand as also

village grown milk products, vegetables and agricultural produce.

The level of education and literacy (especially rural and women) is very poor, needing

improvement. The establishment of this industry will play a catalytic role in this.

Education level will go up with flow of funds and avenue of livelihood. Likewise the

healthcare facilities are also said to improve.

Living in harmony is an important aspect of the society. This can happen only if all

the components are comfortably placed. Persons engaged in their respective vocation

and accruing job satisfaction leads to this. This will become possible by this venture.

8.3 Employment Potential – Skilled, Semi-Skilled and Unskilled

The industry and its supporting activities need people from manual to managerial

strength, in a pyramid. The raw material namely sugarcane growing may need

unskilled workers with people on tractors and tractor repairers as skilled ones. So in

manufacturing activity all three types i.e skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled people are

required. The overall potential including the garages, loading-unloading actions,

eateries, small shop owners is substantial. The local people can get a good share out of

this. In the factory, science and technology prevails and there some outsiders will

have to be engaged at least for the time being. If the second generation local people

acquire that skill, they too will be able to fill the gap and accrue benefit of higher jobs.

269

If the activity of sugar and alcohol manufacturing becomes stable by that time,

perhaps expansion may become possible further and then employment availability

may further enhance.

A total of 697 employees including office staff, skilled & unskilled workers and

contract laborers are required to run the industry consisting of sugar, power and

distillery units. Out of 697 people, 627 employees are for co-gen sugar unit and 70

employees for distillery unit. Additional Manpower requirement during operation to

the industry after expansion programme will be 150 no’s and during construction will

be 200 no’s. However, the commencement of this industry will create direct and

indirect employment opportunities to more than 2,000 people in terms of factory

employment, transportation, vehicle maintenance, petty shops etc. In addition, about

2,000 workers will be indirectly benefitted through harvesting and other sugarcane

cultivation work.

Sl. No. Department Permanent Seasonal Total

1 Admin 57 10 67

2 CDO 89 33 122

3 Civil 8 8 16

4 Engineering 141 34 175

5 Manufacturing 24 87 111

6 Store 18 5 23

7 Time office 7 1 8

8 Vehicle 7 17 24

9 Co-gen 70 11 81

10 Distillery 50 20 70

Grand total 697

8.4 Other Tangible Benefits

Both tangible and non-tangible benefits will result from this activity and many of

those are described above. Apart from direct employment, other benefits are listed

below.

Erosion control by nalla training, terracing and bunding

Flood control by rainwater harvesting

Groundwater level enhancing by recharging

Time saving by quicker transport

Aesthetics improvement by general greening with emphasis on biodiversity

Availability of nursery facilitates

270

Availability of compost fertilizer facilitates for raising crops and grass

Availability of grass facilitates animal husbandry

Developed economy strengthens democratic set-up.

Strengthened democratic set-up will bring weightage to secure better school-

subsidy and health-institutes.

Developed economy brings with it literacy and healthy living.

Improved safety-security in surrounding with better Law and Order.

Symbiosis and sustainable development will be the ultimate objective.

All these social benefits will become a reality by the expansion of this industry.

271

Chapter – 9

Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis

9.1 Introduction

The need and benefits of the industry are well established. During scoping stage the

authorities have not specified the requirement of environmental cost benefit analysis.

Hence, the environmental cost benefit analysis was not considered in the report.

The need and benefits of the integrated sugar industry with bio-mass based co-gen

power unit and molasses based distillery unit are already well established. Sugar

industries are agro based and located in rural area and they have contributed

significantly in socio-economic development of rural region of the country.

The industry while making production also generates the pollution. Pollution is

diseconomy to the general public, by way of mal-effect on health and wellbeing.

Industrialization is an essential feature of economic growth in developing countries,

but industrial practices may also produce adverse environmental health consequences

and wellbeing.

Cost and benefit are in inverse proportion. More mitigation cost to industry means

more benefit to society. Less mitigation cost to industry is benefit saving to industry

but adverse to society. Industry has designed budgetary plan for pollution mitigation

measures. Best solution is the industry gets production and society gets the benefit.

This study has under taken full responsible care to see that the industry does not wish

to gain profit at the cost of comfort of the society. In fact it is in the endeavor of the

proponents.

To reduce the pollution created by this project by recycling as to usable matter.

In the final analysis the society to get pollution free environment.

This is possible for which environment management plan as worked out below

is meticulously obeyed.

To keep transparent relation with the neighbor in the area

Not to disturb any prime agriculture land.

Not to encroach on other existing water source.

Not to overload the existing power supply, causing load shading to the

villagers.

To remove the bareness of the land and prevent wasting in rainwater

To recharge the groundwater

To strengthen the physical infrastructure

To create greenery within premises and even outside to possible extent.

272

To reduce the wastewater pollution created by this new activity by utilizing it

our own fields to grow plantation and landscaping.

To reduce the organic solid waste pollution created by this new activity by

utilizing it in the fields to grow greenery.

In the final analysis society to get pollution free environment, farmers to get

cash payment to their sales proceeds and proponent get comfortable peaceful

neighbors for this project.

9.2 Corporate Social Responsibility

M/s Nandi Sahakari Sakkare Karkhane Niyamit, (NSSKN), being a dedicated

industry for CSR activities, always keeps going with activities for social welfare &

upliftment. The organization does a lot of philanthropic activities for the community

development. Several philanthropic activities carried out by industry. Following are

the photograph of few activities.

As a part of “World Environment Day” celebrations various environmental

programs such as tree plantation, water conservation initiatives, as part of

Environmental awareness; quiz, drawing competition, essay competition were

conducted for government and Nandi International residential school

children’s.

The Company’s employees organize and participate in blood donation

campaigns every year with association with Rotary Organization.

The company provides an opportunity to all the Engineering Graduates,

M.Tech Graduates, MBA Graduates, under Graduates of nearby colleges in

state to undergo in-plant training / projects as part of their academic

curriculum, thus enabling them to acquire application of theoretical knowledge

and get an exposure to the industrial practice.

The company is running an education institution up to matriculation level,

where employee’s children and children’s of nearby villages and shareholders

of factory are studying.

Free eye check-up camp was conducted for all the families of our employees

and also for citizens of surrounding villages of the company.

The industry has established Ritha Sabha Bhavana (Function Hall/ Community

hall) for villagers and shareholders for organizing the functions.

The company has implemented RO Plant, for which free good quality of

drinking water supply is provided for nearby villages.

Health safety & Environment is a high priority issue of the company. Safety of

persons overrides all production targets.

273

The company has been conducting regularly safety awareness programme in

Association with local Factory Directorate office & with the assistance of the

experts in the respective field.

The company is focusing on the development of Eco system & improvement of

the green belt in the factory site.

The financial allocation for the socio-economic activity is detailed in the table 9.1

Table 9.1: Financial Allocation for the Socio-Economic Activity

Sl. No. Particulars of activity Budget in

Lakhs.

1 Provision will be made for Drinking water facility with bore well, water storage tank and pump at isolated locations at 8 villages -Schools.

200.00

2 Construction of public toilets & Bath rooms, toilets for school, kitchen rooms, dining halls will be taken in next 5 years for the nearby villages

500.00

3

Supply of learning materials, Sports materials, furniture’s, Laboratory Equipment’s will be made available for the students of nearby village schools

100.00

4 Personality / Skill development & training to Pre-University students & carrier development programs will be undertaken

60.00

5 Meritorious Award to students will be made. 50.00

6 Health Care programs will be undertaken for nearby villages.

120.00

7 Community facilities (Community Hall) for benefit of the region will be made for the region.

450.00

8 Bus stand (Shelter) will be constructed for the development villages.

50.00

9 LED Lamps & Solar systems to neighbor villages will be made.

150.00

10 Green Belt development to the nearby villages will be undertaken. 100.00

Total 1780.00

Table 9.2: CSR Program for period of 5 year

CORPORATE SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY (CSR)

PROGRAMME FOR THE PERIOD OF FIVE YEAR FROM 2017-2018 TO 2021-2022

Sl No

Village Name 2017 - 2018

2018-2019

2019-2020

2020-2021

2021-2022

Total (Rs. In Lakh)

1 For Drinking water facility

1. Jambagi 1 2.5 4 5 12 24.5

2. Kanabur 1 2.5 4 5 12 24.5

274

3. Hosur 1 2.5 4 5 12 24.5

4. Sutagundi 1 2.5 4 5 12 24.5

5. Babaladi 1 2.5 4 5 12 24.5

6. Chikkagalagali 1 2.5 4 5 12 24.5

7. Galagali 1 2.5 4 5 14 26.5

8. Rabakavi 1 2.5 4 5 14 26.5

8 20 32 40 100 200

2 Construction of public toilets & Bath rooms, toilets for school, kitchen rooms, dining halls

1. Jambagi 2 4 6 20 30 62

2. Kanabur 2 4 6 20 30 62

3. Hosur 2 4 6 20 30 62

4. Sutagundi 2 4 6 20 30 62

5. Babaladi 2 4 6 20 30 62

6. Chikkagalagali 2 4 6 20 30 62

7. Galagali 2 4 8 20 30 64

8. Rabakavi 2 4 8 20 30 64

500

3 Supply of learning materials, Sports materials, furniture’s, Laboratory Equipment’s

1. Jambagi 1 1 2 3 5 12

2. Kanabur 1 1 2 3 5 12

3. Hosur 1 1 2 3 5 12

4. Sutagundi 1 1 2 3 5 12

5. Babaladi 1 1 2 4 5 13


7. Galagali 1 1 2 4 5 13

8. Rabakavi 1 1 2 4 5 13

8 8 16 28 40 100

4 Personality / Skill development & training to Pre-University students & carrier development programs

1. Jambagi 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 7.5

2. Kanabur 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 7.5

3. Hosur 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 7.5

4. Sutagundi 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 7.5

5. Babaladi 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 7.5

6. Chikkagalagali 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 7.5

7. Galagali 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 7.5

8. Rabakavi 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 7.5

4 8 12 16 20 60

5 Meritorious Award to students

1. Jambagi 0.25 0.5 1.5 2 2 6.25

2. Kanabur 0.25 0.5 1.5 2 2 6.25

3. Hosur 0.25 0.5 1.5 2 2 6.25

4. Sutagundi 0.25 0.5 1.5 2 2 6.25

5. Babaladi 0.25 0.5 1.5 2 2 6.25

275

6. Chikkagalagali 0.25 0.5 1.5 2 2 6.25

7. Galagali 0.25 0.5 1.5 2 2 6.25

8. Rabakavi 0.25 0.5 1.5 2 2 6.25

2 4 12 16 16 50

6 Health Care programs

1. Jambagi 0.5 1 2 4 7.5 15

2. Kanabur 0.5 1 2 4 7.5 15

3. Hosur 0.5 1 2 4 7.5 15

4. Sutagundi 0.5 1 2 4 7.5 15

5. Babaladi 0.5 1 2 4 7.5 15

6. Chikkagalagali 0.5 1 2 4 7.5 15

7. Galagali 0.5 1 2 4 7.5 15

8. Rabakavi 0.5 1 2 4 7.5 15

4 8 16 32 60 120

7 Community facilities (Community Hall)

1. Jambagi 2.5 3.5 12 18 18 62

2. Kanabur 2.5 3.5 12 18 18 54

3. Hosur 2.5 3.5 12 18 20 56

4. Sutagundi 2.5 3.5 12 18 20 56

5. Babaladi 2.5 3.5 12 18 20 56

6. Chikkagalagali 2.5 3.5 12 18 20 56

7. Galagali 2.5 3.5 12 18 18 54

8. Rabakavi 2.5 3.5 12 18 20 56

20 28 96 144 154 450

8 Bus stand (Shelter)

1. Jambagi 1 1 1 1.5 1.5 6

2. Kanabur 1 1 1 1.5 1.5 6

3. Hosur 1 1 1 1.5 1.5 6

4. Sutagundi 1 1 1 1.5 1.5 6

5. Babaladi 1 1 1.5 1.5 1.5 6.5

6. Chikkagalagali 1 1 1.5 1.5 1.5 6.5

7. Galagali 1 1 1.5 1.5 1.5 6.5

8. Rabakavi 1 1 1.5 1.5 1.5 6.5

8 8 10 12 12 50

9 LED Lamps & Solar systems to neighbour villages

1. Jambagi 1 1 4 5 7 18

2. Kanabur 1 1 4 5 7 18

3. Hosur 1 1 4 5 8 19

4. Sutagundi 1 1 4 5 8 19

5. Babaladi 1 1 4 5 8 19


7. Galagali 1 1 4 5 8 19

8. Rabakavi 1 1 4 5 8 19

8 8 32 40 62 150

10 Green Belt development

1. Jambagi 0.5 1 2 4 5 12.5

276

2. Kanabur 0.5 1 2 4 5 12.5

3. Hosur 0.5 1 2 4 5 12.5

4. Sutagundi 0.5 1 2 4 5 12.5

5. Babaladi 0.5 1 2 4 5 12.5

6. Chikkagalagali 0.5 1 2 4 5 12.5

7. Galagali 0.5 1 2 4 5 12.5

8. Rabakavi 0.5 1 2 4 5 12.5

4 8 16 32 40 100

Grand Total 1780

277

Chapter – 10

Environmental Management Plan

10.1 Introduction

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) is the process used to integrate

environmental management with planning for proposals. EIA is an established

process for:

Ensuring that proponents assume primary responsibility for protection

of any environmental values that may be affected by their proposals;

Addressing the environmental management of the life of proposals;

Forming a basis for statutory decisions on whether a proposal meets

ecologically sustainable development principles, and if so, relevant

environmental management and monitoring conditions;

Industrial development is an important constituent in our pursuits for economic

growth, employment generation and betterment in the quality of life. On the other

hand, industrial activities, without proper precautionary measures for environmental

protection are known to cause pollution and associated problems. Hence, it is

necessary to comply with the regulatory norms for prevention and control of

pollution. Alongside, it is also imperative to go beyond compliance through adoption

of clean technologies and improvement in management practices. Commitment and

voluntary initiatives of industry for responsible care of the environment will help in

building a partnership for pollution control.

This Environmental Management Plan has indicated the details as to how various

measures have been or are proposed to be taken. The base line settings of different

relevant environmental components in the study area are predicted potential impacts

on those components due to the proposed project are documented. In this plan,

mitigation measures for the identified environmental impacts are documented for

both construction and operational stages of the proposed project in the form of an

Environmental Management Plan (EMP)

278

Table 10.1: Environmental Management Plan (EMP) during Construction Phase

Activity Anticipated Impacts Environmental Management Plan

1. Land

Site clearing / Leveling and approach road formation.

Impact on soil nutrients and soil biota, dust generation.

The excavated top soil coming in the proposed construction site will be removed in advance and reused for greenery development.

During the process of excavation if stones and gravels are encountered, the same will be used in construction work or can be used construction of gully plugs, retaining walls etc.

Slope stabilization and Soil embankments will to be carried out as part of soil conservation measures by constructing check walls, retaining walls, terracing, rock anchors, rock bolts, shot create with wire mesh and wire crates etc.

Water sprinkling through sprinklers/tankers

All road drainage structures (ditches, out sloping, culverts, water bars, dips, etc.) will be in place as soon as possible during the construction of the road. Surface water drainage will be provided for sites associated with road construction such as waste areas, borrow areas and rock pits. All drainage water will be filtered through natural vegetation before it enters streams.

Soil binding and fast growing vegetation grass would be grown around the construction site before commencement of construction activity to reduce soil erosion;

2. Air

Site clearing/leveling activities, excavation activities, transportation of construction, movement of trucks,

Dislodging of particles from the ground, exhaust emission from vehicles.

Unpaved roads and disturbed areas in the project construction site will be watered as frequently as necessary to prevent fugitive dust plumes. The frequency of watering can be reduced or eliminated during periods of precipitation.

The vehicle speed limit will be restricted to 15 kmph within the construction site.

279

construction activities on land materials, roads formation, unloading, operation of construction machinery, welding activities

The construction site entrances shall be posted with visible speed limit signs.

Soil storage piles and disturbed areas that remain inactive for longer than 10 days will be covered or treated with appropriate dust suppressant compounds.

Vehicles used to transport solid bulk material on public roadways and having the potential to cause visible emissions will be provided with a cover, or the materials will be sufficiently wetted and loaded onto the trucks in a manner to provide at least one foot of freeboard.

All vehicles and construction equipment with internal combustion engines in use will be maintained in good conditions through six monthly O & M for effective combustion to reduce carbon particles and CO emission.

Water sprinkling will be done in all the dust generating activities like site clearing, leveling, excavation, material handling etc to suppress the dust.

Vehicles delivering loose and fine materials like sand and fine aggregates will be covered by tarpaulin sheets to reduce spills on roads and to reduce fugitive emissions.

3. Noise

Site Clearing/ Leveling activities, excavation activities, Ready Mix Concrete preparation, Transportation of construction materials, Construction activities on Land, Roads formation

Increase in Noise Levels

Provision of insulating caps and enclosures at the exit of noise source on the machinery.

Construction equipment generating minimum noise and vibration will be chosen.

Internal speed limit for vehicles carrying construction materials will be maintained with 15 kmph.

Trained security men will be deployed for guiding smooth entry/exit without traffic congestion which will help in reducing honking conditions.

Ear plugs will be provided to the workers exposed to high noise prone activities and it will be enforced to be used by the workers.

D.G.Set with acoustic enclosures complying to Environment (Protection)

280

Rules will be provided and it will be ensured prior with supplier before finalizing and installation.

4. Surface and Ground Water

Labour camps, construction activities, construction site works

Disposal of sewage, stagnation of Water, mosquito breeding sites, storm water run-off

Construction equipment requiring minimum water for cooling and operation for optimum effectiveness will be chosen

High pressure hose will be used for cleaning and dust suppression purposes.

Water harvesting measures would be taken.

Appropriate sanitation facilities, septic tank and soak pits will be provided for the workers onsite and offsite to reduce impact on water resources. Regular maintenance will be done during the entire life cycle.

No discharge of construction wastes to surface water bodies or ground water will be allowed during construction.

Efforts will be made for reuse of water and its conservation.

5. Solid & Hazardous Waste

281

Labor Camps, excavation, construction activities, operation of DG Set(s) & Painting works reject during external & internal finishing’s, biomedical waste from first aid unit, open burning of solid wastes

Leachate formation, DO depletion decomposition oforganic solid wastes, odour nuisance, breeding ofrats/flies/mosquitoes/ birds fly,dislodging of earth particles causing dust generation of debris, ground water contamination, irritation to skin/eyes, spread of infection/diseases

The hazardous materials used during the construction may include petrol, diesel, Welding gas and paints. These materials will be stored and handled according to the KSPCB guidelines.

Diesel and other fuels will be stored in separate enclosures;

Wherever possible, hazardous raw materials to be substituted by non- hazardous materials, e.g. cleaning solvent can be replaced with film–free biodegradable cleaners. Usage of non-chlorinated strippers instead of strippers containing methylene chloride and substitution of water based paint for oil based ones;

Separate storage of waste paints, thinners, contaminated rags and brushes will be adopted.

Vehicle maintenance area to be designed to prevent contamination of ground water by accidental spillage of oil

6. Ecology and Biodiversity

Clearing of ground cover

Loss of vegetative cover

such as herbs and shrubs

Greenbelt of 84 Acres (33% of total plot area) will be developed.

7. Socio-economics

Site clearing / leveling activities, excavation activities, transportation of construction materials, construction, activities on land, Labor Camps, Disposal of Sewage, Disposal of Solid wastes, Construction

Noise pollution, impact

on social receptors, Risk

of accidents during

transit, traffic congestion,

noise and dust emanating

from the vehicles. Dust

emissions from various

activities, Influx of

Local people from nearby villages will be employed for construction work to the maximum extent possible.

Proper facilities for domestic water supply and sanitation services will be made available to the construction workers at the site.

Annual health check-up camps for labors will be planned.

Well trained safety personnel’s will be employed for monitoring and implementation of Environmental, Health and Safety aspects at project site as per Factories Act and Labor Act.

Security personnel will be employed at regular intervals.

Regular sprinkling of water will be undertaken at site to evade fly of dust on

282

activities and labor camps

people, Disposal of

Sewage/Solid wastes,

Odour nuisance and

creation of water borne

diseases, Disposal of

Sewage, unhealthy

aesthetics, Degradation of

Solid waste, attraction of

flies, Stagnation of Water,

Mosquito breeding sites

surrounding plants/trees to avoid wilting of trees.

Adequate planting of trees will be undertaken by the PA which will improve the local biota.

Table 10.2: Environmental Management Plan (EMP) during operation phase

Activity Anticipated Impacts Environmental Management Plan

1. Land

Disposal of wastewater Soil contamination Wastewater generated from the project will be treated in the proposed 1500 KLD ETP.

2. Air

Boilers, Process,

storage, transportation of raw materials and finished products

Gaseous and fugitive emissions

Existing and proposed Boilers of 105 TPH & 240 T P H will be connected with ESP, with a separate chimney of 65 m & 77 m.

8m and 7m chimney above the nearest working platform to the DG sets with acoustic enclosures will be provided

Monitoring of stack emissions will be carried out regularly to ascertain the performance of the air pollution control equipment’s.

Arrangements are made for monthly monitoring of stack gas and ambient air quality. The sampling points are located based on meteorological

283

conditions of the region in consultation with KSPCB.

Ladder, port hole, power supply points are provided to the boiler for monitoring of emissions.

Water spraying will be adopted at loading and unloading points and storage yards which will reduce fugitive emissions due to movement of truck.

All the internal roads will be asphalted to reduce the fugitive dust due to truck movement.

Greenery cover will be provided. For this, the project has proposed to have greenery cover of 33% of the total site area.

A good housekeeping and proper maintenance will be practiced in the industry, which helps in controlling pollution.

Proper maintenance air pollution control equipment

Regular maintenance of vehicles and machinery’s in order to control emissions.

Bagasse storage Designing of stockpiles to reduce exposure to prevailing winds;

Minimizing the distance that bagasse falls during movement;

Fully enclosing the bagasse handling conveyors, particularly transfer points;

Installing belt cleaning systems so that bagasse is not carried back on the underside of conveyor belts;

Implementing bagasse dust management plan that prescribes mitigation measures for unfavorable weather conditions;

Installing water spray system to reduce dust emissions around, and from, the site;

Cane handling Water sprays de-dusting. Plantation around source.

Transportation Water sprinklers will be provided to reduce dust.

D.G Set operation, Exhaust Emissions HSD (High Speed Diesel) with sulphur content of <0.05% will be usedfor D.G.Set.

Vehicular traffic The conditions of the internal roads will be checked & maintained at least

284

once in a year.

Trained securities will be deployed to guide the vehicles for smooth entry/exit without causing any traffic congestion.

Greenery development will create aesthetic environment and also acts as a pollution sink for dust emissions.

3. Surface and Ground Water

Process Effluent,

Sewage, Storm water run off

Leachate generation, ground water contamination, flooding

The process waste water/effluent including sewage from the domestic activities will be treated in proposed 1500 KLD ETP

Achieve Zero Discharge

Storm water drains will be provided to avoid flooding in the proposed Storm water gutters/drains will be constructed in the premises on either side of the haul roads (0.8 m X 0.6 m) and along the periphery of 1.0 m X 0.6 m

Garland channels will be provided around the storage yards.

As per estimation rain water thus collected and harvested of about 3,00,000 lts/annum will be used for greenery development/ sprinkling applications and non-potable uses thereby conservation fresh water requirement.

Rainwater harvesting sump of capacity 300 KLD (10m X 10m X 3.0m) is proposed for implementation 10 recharge shafts will be provided for the purpose of ground water recharge pits constructed along the way of internal drains

4. Geology and Hydrology

Extraction of water Depletion of water table Since, there is no water extraction from the borewell for the project, no impact anticipated.

However, implementation of recharge to ground water body through rainwater harvesting.

Conjunctive use of surface and ground water ensures rise in ground water level and improves water quality.

285

5. Noise

Manufacturing process, cogeneration unit, transportation of raw materials and finished products, D.G Set operation, Vehicular traffic,

Increase in noise levels Personnel working near noisy areas will be provided with adequate personal protective equipment such as earplugs and earmuffs, use of which will be strictly enforced.

Sophisticated and low noise generating equipment’s will be selected.

Proper mounting of equipment’s and providing noise insulating enclosures or paddling where practicable.

The equipment’s will be maintained at all times to ensure permissible noise levels.

Appropriate advanced silencers, acoustic barriers; vibration-reducing pads will be provided for all noise generating equipment’s.

The sources of continuous noise generating equipment such as compressors, pumps etc will be designed to have noise level not exceeding 85-90 dB(A).

It would be ensured that there would not be any operator near the noise generating equipment’s on continuous basis.

Boundary walls and dense greenery will be erected to act as acoustic barriers.

Adequate and appropriate type of greenery would be developed in and around the proposed project site for noise mitigation in the area.

Shock absorbing techniques will be adopted to reduce noise level.

Acoustical walls and roofs are provided to buildings where such machineries are installed.

Proper maintenance of machineries especially oiling and greasing of bearing and gears etc.

Use of personnel protective to persons working near noise creating locations.

Plantation of green trees around the factory building and premises to control the intensity of noise to the surrounding area.

286

33 % land area around the factory is covered with greenery. It includes greenery of 6 to 10 m width around storage yards.

Trees are planted on either side of the roads with in the factory premise and within the vicinity around the factory.

Trees species are selected as per guidelines of CPCB.

6. Solid and Hazardous Waste

Domestic garbage, solid waste from sugar industry, cogeneration unit

Improper handling will affect the land and water environment

Bagasse generated from the sugar plant will be sent to cogeneration unit to use it as fuel for boiler for power generation

Boiler-Bottom ash, boiler fly ash, lime grit, press mud, ETP sludge will me mixed in required proportion and used as manure.

Used oil from DG sets, spent turbine oil, waste oil residue from ETP will be used as lubricant within the industry.

Domestic Solid waste (Garbage/ Trash/ garden litters) will be stored in garbage collection bins and disposed to nearby municipality.

7. Ecology and biodiversity

Green belt development

Improvement of local flora and fauna, movement of species

With the development of green belt inside the project will increase the movement of birds, butterflies, etc positively. Watch & ward arrangements with proper watering during summer

8. Socio-economics

Quality of Life, Sharing of local resources

Employment generation,

Improvement in quality of

life, development of

infrastructure facilities,

increase in housing

accommodation,

There is a great possibility of industrialization in the vicinity of the proposed sugar complex. This is likely to bring dramatic changes by transforming this backward area into an industrially developed one.

The project has very strong positive impact, which is likely to result in the improvement of economic situation of Kambagi Village and Mantur village

Overall peoples’ perception on the project is a mix of advantages and disadvantages. On one hand, they expect job opportunities, market expansion

287

etc. as advantages and on the other hand they are worried about the damage to agriculture.

As an impact of identification of the project, small-scale industrial economy is likely to flourish in the surrounding area. The small-scale industrial units are expected to get financial supports from the financial institutions and banks. In this way, an overall development may take place in this area.

The process of development will have maximum impact on the lifestyle of the local people. The project and the consequent peripheral industrial economy will generate income to the local and migrated people which will increase the aggregate demand. This demand will get realized in the market and finally, lead to the market in the locality of the project. Market expansion supported by expected infrastructural developments like roads, electricity, water supply etc. will result in improving the economic development in the entire region.

Occupational Safety

and Health

All precautionary methods will be adopted by the company to reduce the risk of exposure of employees to occupational safety and health hazards.

Pre & post medical check-ups will be done of all the employees.

Employees will be regularly examined and the medical records will be maintained for each employee. Pulmonary function test and periodical medical checkup shall be done once in every year. The following tests will be conducted for each worker as Occupational health surveillance programme: Lung Function Test, Radiology – X-ray, Pulmonary Function Test, and Audiometric Test.

For the safety of workers, personnel protective appliances like hand gloves, goggles, aprons, ear mufflers, nose mask etc. will be provided.

Proper ventilation system will be provided in the process area.

288

10.2 EMC Cell

Managing Director

GM (Technical)

GM (Process)

DGM (Distillery)

DGM (Electrical)

Environmental Manager

Medical Officer

Chemist

289

Table 10.3: Waste Minimization and Management Disposal Considered in the Complex

Sl. No

Station Pollutant Preventive Measures

Waste Management Proposals Nature Type

1 Cane yard Solid Cane trash & dung Collect as early as possible Municipality

2 Bagasse storage

yard

Solid Bagasse Collect at the end of crushing Use as fuel for co-generation unit

3 Milling section Liquid Oil & grease Collect in trays which can be easily lifted & stored in drum

Re use as lubricants within industry

Liquid Floor washings Dry cleaning will be adopted,

proper slope floors will be given

To ETP

Liquid Leakages & spill

overs

Use mechanical seals for all pump glands & alarms for overflow

To ETP

Liquid Cooling waters Collect desuper heater & mill bearing cooling water

Recycle

4 Cane carrier Solid Bagasse Closed transfer system will be adopted

Cover the drains so that bagasse do

not enter into the drains

5 Sulphur burner Gaseous SO2 Operation scrubbers Provide mask to operators

6 Lime station Semi -solid Lime solution Proper slope to the drains will be provided

To ETP

7 Clarification on and vacuum filters

Liquid Leakages from

pumps, glands & pipes overflow

Overflow alarms & mechanical seals will be installed/ provided

Recycle the cooling waters

8 Boiler house Liquid

Gaseous

Boiler blow down

Stack emissions

Maintain boiler condition& also

feed water quality

Adjust air fuel ratio for efficient combustion. Air pollution control equipment’s performance will be

Reuse for irrigation after neutralization.

Fly ash will be used as soil conditioner /composting.

290

checked

9 Crystallizer & pan boiling

Liquid Leakages from

pumps Spillovers

Mechanical seals wherever it

is

appropriate will be

provided

All cooling waters will be recycled overloading & the equipment avoided

Recycle the cooling waters

To ETP

10 Cleanings of

vessels, boilers

etc., & laboratory washings

Liquid High BOD & COD,

chemicals as

NaOH

Sulphamic Acid, lead

NaOH for next cleaning will

be recycled Standby units to

have continuous operations will be

provided

The effluent in a holding tank to avoid shock loads on ETP

Controlled loading in ETP from a

storage tank

Segregate laboratory Effluents and join to storage tank

11 Press mud Solid Soil conditioner Immediate disposal Use as a filler material in

“composting”

12 Molasses Semi solid By - product storage in MS steel tanks To distillery To avoid auto combustion

13 Fugitive emission Gaseous Sugar Dust SO2 ESP/Bag Filters Land filters

14 Vibrating & heavy machinery

Noise Sound Silencer pads & closed rooms to be used/provided

Earplugs & earmuffs to workers

will be provided and also change the work environment frequently on shift basis

15 Bagasse Solid Dust & Fire Proper ventilation for storage and also stand posts in case of fire will be provided

Store of far away from the industry

Source: Central Pollution Control Board

291

Additional recommendations for sugar industry

Install steam turbine-based combined heat and power technology, enabling

the facility to generate its own process steam and electricity requirements and

sell excess electricity.

Ensure that the bagasse moisture level is below 50% before it is used as boiler

fuel to improve its calorific value and overall efficiency for steam generation

and avoid the need for supplemental fuels.

Keep heating surfaces clean by adding chemicals to prevent incrustations.

Incrustations are generated by minerals salts that are not removed during

clarification and may be prevented or reduced by adding special polymers to

the thin juice.

Ensure even energy consumption by management of batch processes

(e.g. centrifuges, vacuum pans) to schedule energy demand and equalize

steam demand on the boilers.

Reuse vapor from vacuum pans for heating juice or water

Use an evaporator with at least five effects

Select the operating conditions of the boiler and steam turbine system to

match the heat-power ratio of the utility system to that of the facility.

10.3 Guidelines for plantation

Three rows of samplings will be planted all along the periphery of the industry to

arrest the dust and to avoid noise. Further, 3 m distance between the rows will be

maintained to avoid over crowning. 33% (84 acres) of the total area will be brought

under green belt. The areas around bagasse storage area, cane mill, bunk, stock

yard and on either side of the internal roads will be planted. Green belt

development plan is stated below. The pit size for planting trees will be maintained at

45 cm x 45 cm x 45 cm. Soil proposed to be used for filling the pit will be mixed with

well decomposed farm yard manure in the range of 2.0 – 3.0 kg. The filling of soils

will be completed at least 7 days prior to the plantation. Seedlings with good

condition shall be identified and opted for plantation. Plantation of trees shall be

undertaken after one year of start of construction and must be completed within 2

years before occupancy.

Design Plantation pattern followed at the periphery of the site area is as per “The

Guidelines on Landscaping and tree Plantation”:

The first row along the roads will be of small to medium sized ornamental trees.

292

Subsequent rows depending on the availability of width will comprise of

ornamental and/or shade bearing species, of more height than those in the first

row. In rural sections the last row will always be of shade bearing tall trees.

Planting of shrubs in the median.

Planting of herbaceous species as ground cover in the median, special

landscapes, and embankment slopes.

Turfing with grass in the median, special landscapes, and embankment slopes.

A total of 10 mts buffer is provided for the plantation of trees (i.e Between the

Factory boundary to the Industry).

Typical cross section of the plantation on the periphery of the site area is given in the

below picture.

Estimated Plant boundary area : 5.0 Km

Plant boundary Available for plantation area : 3.8 Kms

Sl. No Rows Total number of Plants to be planted / Km

Total number of Plants to be planted for 8.5 Km

1 1st Row 333 1265

2 2nd Row 166 630

3 3rd Row 84 320

Total 583 2215

List of Ist RowTrees plantation

Sl. No Local Names Botanical Names Family

1 Bandaraki Dodonaea viscosa Fabaceae

2 Chaduranga Lantana camara Ebenaceae

III Row Plant Height above 15 Mts

Plant to Plant distance

3Mts

Plant to Plant distance

3Mts 1Mts Compound to Plant

distance 3 Mts

I Row Plant Height 3 Mts

(Shrubs)

II Row Plant Height Less than 15

Mts (Shrubs)

293

3 Henkal Gymonsporia montana Rubiaceae

4 Honnambri Cassia auriculata Rubiaceae

5 Jaali Prosopis juliflora Fabaceae

6 Kalli Euphorbia tirukalli Euphorbiaceae

7 Lakki Vitex nigundo Lamiaceae

8 Menbandti Mundulia suberosa Fabaceae

9 Pargi Toddalia auriculata Rutaceae

10 Torani Zizyphus rugosa Rhamnaceae

11 Ekka Calotropis procera Asclepiadaceae

12 Hooli Kirganelia reticulata Euphorbiaceae

13 Papaskalli Opuntia dillenii Cactaceae

14 Kare Randia dumetorum Rubiaceae

Total 1265

List of 2ndRow Trees plantation

Sl. No

Botanical Names Local Names

Family Uses Height Crown shape

Nos. for 5 years

1

Manilkara zapota Sapota Sapotaceae Fruiting 12 Round 70 2 Anacardium

occidentale Geru,Cashew Anacardiacea

e Fruiting 10 Round 50

3 Annona squamosa Seethaphala Annonaceae Fruiting 7 Round 70 4 Feronia elephantum Bela Rutaceae Fruiting 9 Round 80

5 Pithecolobium dulce Sihihunase Fabaceae Fruiting 12 Round 40 6 Mangifera indica Mavu Anacardiacea

e Fruiting 12 Round 90

7 Pongamia pinnata Honge Leguminosae Flowering 10 Round 90 8 Psidium guajava Perale Myrtacecae Fruiting 12 Round 80 9 Thespesia populnea Bugari Malvaceae Flowering 10 Round 60

Total 630

List of 3rdRow Trees plantation

Sl. No

Botanical Names

Local Names

Family Uses Height Crown shape

Nos. for 5 years

1 Artocarpus Halasu Moraceae Fruiting 15 Round 45

2 Ficus bengalensis

Ala Moraceae Fruiting 20 Round 30

3 Ficus glomerata

Atti, lustertree

Moraceae Fruiting 20 Round 20

4 Ficus religiosa

Arali Moraceae Fruiting 20 Round 35

5 Peltoforum pterocarpum

Copperpod Fabaceae Flowering 15 Round 20

6 Samanea saman

Rain Tree Fabaceae Flowering 15 Round 25

294

7 Syzygium cumini

Nerale Myrtacecae Fruiting 15 Round 40

8 Tamarindus indica

Hunse, Tamarind

Fabaceae Fruiting 18 Round 35

9 Terminalia bellerica

Shanti, Tare

Combretace Fruiting 20 Round 20

10 Michelia champaca

Sampige Magnoliacea Flowering 15 Round 25

11 Millingtonia hortensis

Aakash Mallige

Bignoniaceae Flowering 20 Conical 25

Total 320

Selection of Species for plantation inside the industry

Landscape/plantation with varieties of species (higher ecological values) is preferred

to maintain species diversity which in turn helps in movement of species between the

areas. Adequate watering, maintenances will be undertaken during the first 5

years with well-equipped/trained landscape personnel at site. The seedlings for the

plantation will be procured from nearby forest dept., nurseries.

Table 10.4: List of Tree species recommended for landscaping and Greenbelt

Development.

Sl. No Local Names Botanical Names Family List of Trees

1 Sapota Manilkara zapota Sapotaceae

2 Geru,Cashew Anacardium occidentale Anacardiaceae

3 Seethaphala Annona squamosa Annonaceae

4 Halasu Artocarpus heterophyllus Moraceae

5 Bela Feronia elephantum Rutaceae

6 Ala Ficus bengalensis Moraceae

7 Atti, clustertree Ficus glomerata Moraceae

8 Sihihunase Pithecolobium dulce Fabaceae

9 Arali Ficus religiosa Moraceae

10 Mavu Mangifera indica Anacardiaceae

11 Copperpod Peltophorum pterocarpum Fabaceae

12 Honge Pongamia pinnata Leguminosae

13 Perale Psidium guajava Myrtacecae

14 Rain Tree Samanea saman Fabaceae

15 Neralu Syzygium cumini Myrtacecae

16 Hunse, Tamarin Tamarindus indica Fabaceae

17 Shanti, Tare Terminalia bellerica Combretaceae

18 Bugari Thespesia populnea Malvaceae

19 Sampige Michelia champaca Magnoliaceae

295

20 Aakash Mallige Millingtonia hortensis Bignoniaceae

List of Shrubs 1 Bandaraki Dodonaea viscosa Fabaceae

2 Henkal Gymonsporia montana Rubiaceae

3 Honnambri Cassia auriculata Rubiaceae

4 Jaali Prosopis juliflora Fabaceae

5 Kalli Euphorbia tirukalli Euphorbiaceae

6 Lakki Vitex nigundo Lamiaceae

7 Menbandti Mundulia suberosa Fabaceae

8 Pargi Toddalia auriculata Rutaceae

9 Torani Zizyphus rugosa Rhamnaceae

10 Ekka Calotropis procera Asclepiadaceae

11 Hooli Kirganelia reticulata Euphorbiaceae

12 Papaskalli Opuntia dillenii Cactaceae

13 Kare Randia dumetorum Rubiaceae

14 Lakki Vitex negundo Verbanaceae Herbs and Climbers

1 Nachike mullu Mimosa pudica Fabaceae

2 Anantmullu Hemidesmus indicus Apocynaceae

3 Gulaganji Abrus precatorius Fabaceae

4 Mallige Jasminum sp. Oleaceae

5 Bondwell Litsea elliptica Lauraceae

6 Avarike Casssia tora Caesulpinaceae

7 Pettige Abutilon indicum Malvaceae

8 Uttarani Achyranthes aspera Amaranthaceae

9 Nelabevu Andrographis paniculata Acanthaceae

10 Mullarive Amaranthus spinosus Amaranthaceae

11 Naribala Andropogon pumilus Poaceae

12 Arishina Datturi Argemone mexicana Papaveraceae

13 Mangaraballi Cissus quadrangularis Vitaceae

14 -- Crotalaria paniculata Fabaceae

15 Kadumenasu Croton sparsiflorus Euphorbiaceae

16 Datturi Datura metel Solanaceae

17 Garike Cynodon dactylon Poaceae

18 Achhe gida Euphorbia hirta Euphorbiaceae

19 Morning glory Ipomoea purpurea Convolvulaceae

20 Tulasi Ocimum sanctum Lamiaceae

Table 10.5: Time frame for Green Belt Development Plan

The species have a good history of survival and growths (70 %) under similar site conditions were planted. Around 12,000 trees are existing which are more than 20 years old, recently around 3856 species are newly planted in recent years.

Sl. No Financial Year Nature of activity Estimate budget in

296

1 2018-19 Replanting of 500 samplings and planting of 500 new saplings

5,00,000.00


5,25,000.00


5,50,000.00

4 2021-22 Planting of 400 new saplings 2,00,000.00

5 2022-23 Maintenance and replanting 2,25,000.00

The total Number of trees to be planted all along the project boundary and inside

the project site will be around 3000 numbers.

10.4 Cost of Estimates for implementation of EMP

The total cost of the expansion project is Rs. 35,500 Lakhs (i.e expansion of Sugar

Unit capacity from 6500 TCD to 14000 TCD and Cogeneration Power Unit from 18.14

MW to 62.14 MW). The cost of implementing the above mitigation measures as

estimated in Table below, works out to Rs. 500 Lakhs/- . The Recurring cost of the

same is estimated at Rs.75 Lakhs/- per year

Cost estimates for implementation of Environmental Management Plan

Sl.no. Particulars Amount in Lakhs

1

Capital Investment on EMP facilities 500.00

Air Pollution Control

Water pollution Control

Laboratory & Monitoring

Green Belt & greenery development , rain water harvesting , landscape development

2 CSR activity 1780.00

3

Recurring Cost of Operation & Maintenance 75.00

Air pollution Control

Water Pollution Control

Greenery , water harvesting and land scape maintenance

Laboratory & Monitoring of Environmental Quality

Occupational health & safety

Total Recurring cost 75.00

10.5 Social Commitment plan

CSR Activities proposed at and around factory premises for the five financial years

after implementation of the project

297

Sl. No. Particulars of activity Budget in

Lakhs.

1 Provision will be made for Drinking water facility with bore well, water storage tank and pump at isolated locations at 8 villages -Schools.

200.00

2 Construction of public toilets & Bath rooms, toilets for school, kitchen rooms, dining halls will be taken in next 5 years for the nearby villages

500.00

3

Supply of learning materials, Sports materials, furniture’s, Laboratory Equipment’s will be made available for the students of nearby village schools

100.00

4 Personality / Skill development & training to Pre-University students & carrier development programs will be undertaken

60.00

5 Meritorious Award to students will be made. 50.00

6 Health Care programs will be undertaken for nearby villages.

120.00

7 Community facilities (Community Hall) for benefit of the region will be made for the region.

450.00

8 Bus stand (Shelter) will be constructed for the development villages.

50.00

9 LED Lamps & Solar systems to neighbor villages will be made.

150.00

10 Green Belt development to the nearby villages will be undertaken. 100.00

Total 1780.00

10.6 Conservation of Air, Water and Energy recovery

100 % utilization of bagasse for power generation

100 % utilization of ETP treated wastewater for greenbelt development / on

land for irrigation

100 % utilization of harvested rainwater after first flush for domestic usage

other than drinking

ETP sludge, Boiler ash, lime grit, will be completely reused in the bio-

composting process

Spent wash treatment through concentration and incineration to

achieve zero discharge and in turn to produce minimum power

CFL/LEDs will be used at all the areas for illumination

Garden lighting based on solar energy

298

Water heating application in canteen areas will be based on solar

Construction debris will be reused in internal drain works

Use of BEE 3 star rated appliances is considered at all administrative areas

299

Chapter 11 Summary & conclusion

11.1 Overall Justification for Implementation of the Project

The Environmental Impact Assessment studies carried out for the proposed project of

M/s Nandi Sahakari Sakkare Karkhane Niyamit, (NSSKN), has been completed.

The study conducted has covered various facts of the proposed expansion project

starting with the need for expansion, its basic requirements like raw materials, water

requirement, availability of land, manufacturing process etc.

In addition to this the metrological data and baseline environmental features have

been evaluated to understand the environmental setting of the project site. Based on

the baseline environmental survey air pollution modeling studies were carried out to

predict the impact of the proposed project on the air environment. Also the ecological

features of the location including the flora & fauna, socio-economic environment, the

demographic structure have been evaluated.

Based on the above studies an Environmental Impact Statement has been prepared to

ascertain the possible impacts of the proposed project on the environmental

parameters like air, water, land, biological and socio-economic environment. An

impact matrix has also been prepared based on the observations of the impacts on the

environment.

An Environmental Management Plan has been prepared covering the environmental

aspect and the management plan required to be adopted by the management not only

during the course of setting up of the proposed industry but also during its

operational phase. An environmental monitoring plan is envisaged deciding

frequency, location, data analysis, reporting schedules.

Detailed risk assessment study is carried out to evaluate the risks involved due to

storage of various solvents & precautionary measures to be taken for

prevention/management of such risks.

The conclusions drawn from the above study relates to the fact that the proposed

expansion of the industry undertaken by the management of the industry has certain

level or marginal impacts on the local environmental setting, which will not affect the

natural environmental setting of the study zone either drastically or otherwise.

However, certain beneficial impacts are anticipated in terms of the employment

opportunities created during the operation of the industry. Also there will be

economic growth at the regional level.

The industry proposes to create Environmental Management Cell in its organization

to monitor and implement programs to improve its environmental status from time to

time and will adopt all such technological advances to reduce the impact due to its

operation on the environment.

300

To put it in a nut shell the management of Company strongly believes in the concept

of sustainable development and understands the impacts of the proposed industry on

the environment from the Environmental Impact Assessment studies conducted. It is

committed to develop its industry without giving room for any adverse impacts on

the environment and also lays emphasis on the implementation of the

recommendations of the Environmental Management Plan in true spirits.

11.2 Explanation of How Adverse Effects Have Been Mitigated

M/s Nandi Sahakari Sakkare Karkhane Niyamit, (NSSKN) have proposed for

expansion of Sugar Unit capacity from 6500 TCD to 14000 TCD and Cogeneration

Power Unit from 18.14 MW to 62.14 MW with no change in 50 KLPD distillery unit,

which is an fully integrated industry complex at Krishnanagar village, Survey No 90

& 92, Hosur Village, Vijayapur Taluk and District, Karnataka State.

The expansion project does not require additional land since it is already available

within the industry. The industry has obtained Water drawl permission from

Executive Engineer, Karnataka Nigam Ltd – Biligi for lifting water from Krishna river,

enclosed as Annexure-7

There are no protected forests, sanctuaries, archeologically important

structures or other sensitive locations in the vicinity of the factory except river

Krishna flowing from East to west direction and is 1.5 Kms away from the

project site and River Don, which is present at 35 Kms from the project site in

North direction. Therefore, the industry will not have adverse effect on the

environment or the eco system.

The boiler and turbo generator to be provided in the power plant are of high

efficiency and maximum built in safety.

Fresh water requirement to the proposed industry is 1132 m3/d. The industry

has obtained permission to draw water needed for the expansion project.

Effluent generated from the proposed sugar plant will be treated in existing

ETP. The domestic sewage will be stabilized in septic tank & the overflow from

septic tank will be treated in sugar plant ETP.

Air emissions from the expansion project will be the flue gases from 105 TPH

and 240 TPH boilers. Boiler is fired with bagasse. Suspended particulate matter

is the main pollutant in flue gas. Boilers are proposed to be provided with

adequate stack heights and ESP, bag-filter are used to control pollution from

the flue gases.

Boiler ash contains plant micronutrients. This is mixed with press mud and

supplied to the farmers for use in sugarcane lands as soil conditioner cum

nutrient.

301

This industry does not produce any toxic products and does not have

significant adverse effect on the quality of land, water and air. The industry has

taken all the necessary preventive measures to mitigate even the small effects

which may be caused by industrial activities.

The industry adopted an effective environment management system and

environment management plan to protect the environment. Due priority is

given for greenery development and rain harvesting in the factory premises

and around. Environmental management plan and suggested measures for

pollution control are proposed for protection of environment and to seek

environmental clearance to the project.

302

Chapter 12

Disclosure of consultants engaged

This EIA report is prepared on behalf of the proponents, taking inputs from proponent’s

office staff, their R & D wing, Architects, Project Management Professionals etc. by

Environmental Consultants M/s. Ultra-Tech Environmental Consultancy & Laboratory,

Thane, Mumbai, who have been accredited by QCI-NABET, NABET Accreditation No.

NABET/EIA/1417/RA010, NABET Certificate enclosed as Annexure- 14.

M/s Ultra-Tech Environmental Consultancy & Laboratory:

Ultra-Tech Environmental Consultancy & Laboratory [Lab Gazetted by MoEF – Govt.

of India] not only give environmental solutions for sustainable development, but

make sure that they are economically feasible. With innovative ideas and impact

mitigation measures offered, make them distinguished in environmental consulting

business. The completion of tasks in record time is the key feature of Ultra-Tech. A

team of more than hundred environmental brigadiers consists of engineers, experts,

ecologists, hydrologists, geologists, socio-economic experts, solid waste and hazard

waste experts apart from environmental media sampling and monitoring experts and

management experts , strive hard to serve clients with up to mark and best services.

Ultra-Tech offers environmental consultancy services to assist its clients to obtain

environmental clearance for their large buildings, construction, CRZ, SEZ, high rise

buildings, township projects and industries covering sugar and distilleries from

respective authorities. Ultra-Tech is in the process of getting QCI-NABET final

accreditation for its EIA organization.

Ultra-Tech also provide STP/ETP /WTP project consultancy on turn-key basis apart

from Operation and Maintenance of these projects on annual contract basis. Also,

having MoEF approved environmental laboratory, Ultra-Tech provide laboratory

services for monitoring and analysis of various environmental media like air, water,

waste water, stack, noise and meteorological data to its clients all over India and

abroad.

303

Functional area experts and assistance to FAE involved in the EIA study for “M/s

Nandi Sahakari Sakkare Karkhane Niyamit, (NSSKN). at Hosur Village, Vijayapur

Taluk and District, Karnataka State” is as follows:

EIA Coordinator

Name : Mr. Partho Mukherjee

Signature :

Period of involvement : 15th December 2016 to 15th March 2017

Contact information : Ultra-Tech Environmental Consultancy &

Laboratory (Gazetted By MOEF)

Unit No,224,225,206 Jai Commercial Complex, 463

Eastern Express Highway, Opp. Cadbury Factory,

Khopat, Thane(W).400601

Functional area experts involved in the EIA:

Sl.No

Name Of Sector

Name Of Project

Name Of Client

Name Of EIA Coordinator

Functional Area Experts Involved

FA NAME/S SIGN

1 Sugar 5 (j) &

Co-gen 1 (d) Industrial Project

Nandi Sahakari Sakkare Karkhane Niyamit, (NSSKN)

Mr. Partho

Mukherjee AP Mr.

Shekhar Tamhane

AQ & NV

Partho

Mukherjee

WP Mrs. Deepa Tamhane – Karnik

EB Dr. T. K. Ghosh

SE Mr. Kishore Wankhede

HG Dr. T. P.

Natesan

GEO Dr. T. P.

Natesan

SC Dr. D. S.

Ramteke

304

Sl.No

Name Of Sector

Name Of Project

Name Of Client

Name Of EIA Coordinator

Functional Area Experts Involved

FA NAME/S SIGN

SHW Mrs. Deepa Tamhane Karnik

LU Mr. Yogesh

Raskar

Team Members

Table No. 12.1: List of Functional Area Experts

1 AQ, SHW Ms. Archana Sadashiva.

2 EB, AQ & SHW Ms. D. Suneetha

3 AQ, SHW Mr. Vinay D.B

4 AQ, NV Mr. Akshay Kulkarni

Laboratory for analysis:

Table No. 12.2: Laboratory Details

Name of laboratory Scope of services Accreditation status

Ultra-Tech Environmental

Consultancy &

Laboratory [Lab Gazetted

by MoEF – Govt. of India]

Monitoring and Analysis of:

1. Ambient Air Quality

Monitoring

2. Ground and Surface Water

Quality Monitoring

3. Noise Level Monitoring and

4. Soil Quality Monitoring

5. Metrological data collection

Gazetted by MoEF- Govt. of

India

additional details sought by ms, dated · condensate polishing unit (cpu) for sugar & co-gen...

Documents